INTERNATIONAL STANDARD
Lifts, escalators and moving walks
international cooperation group
CEN/TC 010/AH 17
2019-09-30
Date:
N 0292
Doc. Number:
Maria-José GONZALEZ
Direct line : 01 41 62 81 26
mariajose.gonzalez@afnor.org
Assistant:
Eva CONTIVAL
Direct line : 01 41 62 82 87
eva.contival@afnor.org
Your contact:
(EN) ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019
COMMENTARIES /
DECISIONS
Dear member,
You are kindly invited to have a close look on document N
292 that is
the latest draft version of (EN) ISO 8100-1/2 and to provide
comments at latest 10 days before
the meeting date.
Please use the official template and address it the secretariat
eva.contival@afnor.org
FOLLOW UP Comments before 2019-10-24
Association Française de Normalisation 11, rue Francis de Pressensé F-93571 La Plaine Saint-Denis Cedex
http://www.afnor.fr SIRET 775 724 818 00205INTERNATIONAL STANDARD
(EN) ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
First Second edition
Lifts for the transport of persons and goods — Part 1: Passenger and goods passenger
lifts
Elévateurs pour le transport de personnes et d'objets — Partie 1: Exigences de sécurité
des ascenseursISO/PRF 8100-1:20192023(E)
ii © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Copyright notice
This ISO document is a Draft International Standard and is copyright-protected by ISO. Except as permitted
under the applicable laws of the user's country, neither this ISO draft nor any extract from it may be
reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
photocopying, recording or otherwise, without prior written permission being secured.
Requests for permission to reproduce should be addressed to either ISO at the address below or ISO's
member body in the country of the requester.
ISO copyright office
Case postale 56 • CH-1211 Geneva 20
Tel. + 41 22 749 01 11
Fax + 41 22 749 09 47
E-mail copyright@iso.org
Web www.iso.org
Reproduction may be subject to royalty payments or a licensing agreement.
Violators may be prosecuted.ISO/PRF 8100-1:20192023(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved iii
Contents Page
Foreword ...................................................................................................................................................... 7
Introduction.................................................................................................................................................. 9
1 Scope ..................................................................................................................................................... 1
2 Normative references............................................................................................................................. 2
3 Terms and definitions............................................................................................................................. 5
4 List of significant hazards...................................................................................................................... 15
5 Safety requirements and/or protective measures.................................................................................. 18
5.1 General .....................................................................................................................................................18
5.2 Well, machinery spaces and pulley rooms ...............................................................................................18
5.2.1 General provisions................................................................................................................................18
5.2.2 Access to well and to machinery spaces and pulley rooms.................................................................24
5.2.3 Access and emergency doors — Access trap doors — Inspection doors.............................................25
5.2.4 Notices..................................................................................................................................................27
5.2.5 Well.......................................................................................................................................................27
5.2.6 Machinery spaces and pulley rooms....................................................................................................42
5.3 Landing doors and car doors....................................................................................................................52
5.3.1 General provisions................................................................................................................................52
5.3.2 Height and width of entrances.............................................................................................................52
5.3.3 Sills, guides, door suspension...............................................................................................................52
5.3.4 Horizontal door clearances ..................................................................................................................53
5.3.5 Strength of landings and car doors ......................................................................................................58
5.3.6 Protection in relation to door operation..............................................................................................66
5.3.7 Local landing lighting and “car here” signal lights................................................................................74
5.3.8 Locking and closed landing door check................................................................................................75
5.3.9 Locking and emergency unlocking of landing and car doors ...............................................................76
5.3.10 Requirements common to devices for proving the locked condition and the closed condition of
the landing door................................................................................................................................................79
5.3.11 Sliding landing doors with multiple, mechanically linked panels.....................................................80
5.3.12 Closing of automatically operated landing doors ............................................................................80
5.3.13 Electric safety device for proving the car doors closed....................................................................80
5.3.14 Sliding or folding car doors with multiple, mechanically linked panels...........................................81
5.3.15 Opening the car door .......................................................................................................................81
5.4 Car, counterweight and balancing weight...............................................................................................82
5.4.1 Height of car.........................................................................................................................................82
5.4.2 Available car area, rated load, number of passengers.........................................................................82
5.4.3 Walls, floor and roof of the car ............................................................................................................89
5.4.4 Car door, floor, wall, ceiling and decorative materials ........................................................................91ISO/PRF 8100-1:20192023(E)
iv © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.4.5 Apron ................................................................................................................................................... 91
5.4.6 Emergency trap doors and emergency doors...................................................................................... 92
5.4.7 Car roof................................................................................................................................................ 93
5.4.8 Equipment on top of the car................................................................................................................ 96
5.4.9 Ventilation ........................................................................................................................................... 97
5.4.10 Lighting ............................................................................................................................................ 97
5.4.11 Counterweight and balancing weight.............................................................................................. 98
5.5 Suspension means, compensation means and related protection means............................................... 98
5.5.1 Suspension means ............................................................................................................................... 98
5.5.2 Sheave, pulley, drum and rope diameter ratios, rope/chain terminations....................................... 102
5.5.3 Rope traction ..................................................................................................................................... 109
5.5.4 Winding up of ropes for positive drive lifts ....................................................................................... 110
5.5.5 Distribution of load between the ropes or the chains ...................................................................... 110
5.5.6 Compensation means........................................................................................................................ 111
5.5.7 Protection for sheaves, pulleys and sprockets.................................................................................. 112
5.5.8 Traction sheaves, pulleys and sprockets in the well.......................................................................... 114
5.6 Precautions against free fall, excessive speed, unintended car movement and creeping of the car .... 115
5.6.1 General provisions............................................................................................................................. 115
5.6.2 Safety gear and its tripping means.................................................................................................... 116
5.6.3 Rupture valve..................................................................................................................................... 124
5.6.4 Restrictors.......................................................................................................................................... 125
5.6.5 Pawl device ........................................................................................................................................ 126
5.6.6 Ascending car overspeed protection means ..................................................................................... 127
5.6.7 Protection against unintended car movement.................................................................................. 129
5.7 Guide rails.............................................................................................................................................. 132
5.7.1 Guiding of the car, counterweight or balancing weight.................................................................... 132
5.7.2 Permissible stresses and deflections................................................................................................. 133
5.7.3 Combination of loads and forces....................................................................................................... 137
5.7.4 Impact factors.................................................................................................................................... 137
5.8 Buffers.................................................................................................................................................... 140
5.8.1 Car and counterweight buffers.......................................................................................................... 140
5.8.2 Stroke of car and counterweight buffers........................................................................................... 141
5.9 Lift machinery and associated equipment............................................................................................. 142
5.9.1 General provision............................................................................................................................... 142
5.9.2 Lift machine for traction lifts and positive drive lifts......................................................................... 143
5.9.3 Lift machine for hydraulic lifts........................................................................................................... 150
5.10 Electric installations and appliances...................................................................................................... 160
5.10.1 General provisions......................................................................................................................... 160
5.10.2 Incoming supply conductor terminations...................................................................................... 163
5.10.3 Contactors, contactor relays, components of safety circuits........................................................ 163
5.10.4 Protection of electrical equipment................................................................................................ 165
5.10.5 Main switches................................................................................................................................ 165
5.10.6 Electric wiring ................................................................................................................................ 166
5.10.7 Lighting and socket outlets............................................................................................................ 168ISO/PRF 8100-1:20192023(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved v
5.10.8 Control of the supply for lighting and socket outlets.....................................................................168
5.10.9 Protective earthing.........................................................................................................................169
5.10.10 Electrical identification...................................................................................................................169
5.11 Protection against electric faults; failure analysis; electric safety devices ............................................169
5.11.1 Protection against electric faults; failure analysis..........................................................................169
5.11.2 Electric safety devices ....................................................................................................................170
5.12 Controls — Final limit switches — Priorities...........................................................................................178
5.12.1 Control of lift operations................................................................................................................178
5.12.2 Final limit switches.........................................................................................................................187
5.12.3 Emergency alarm device and intercom system .............................................................................189
5.12.4 Priorities and signals.......................................................................................................................189
6 Verification of the safety requirements and/or protective measures.....................................................190
6.1 Technical compliance documentation....................................................................................................190
6.2 Verification of design..............................................................................................................................190
6.3 Examinations and tests before putting into service ...............................................................................195
6.3.1 Braking system (5.9.2.2).....................................................................................................................195
6.3.2 Electric installation .............................................................................................................................196
6.3.3 Checking of the traction (5.5.3)..........................................................................................................196
6.3.4 Car safety gear (5.6.2) ........................................................................................................................196
6.3.5 Counterweight or balancing weight safety gear (5.6.2).....................................................................197
6.3.6 Pawl device (5.6.5) .............................................................................................................................198
6.3.7 Buffers (5.8.1, 5.8.2)...........................................................................................................................198
6.3.8 Rupture valve (5.6.3)..........................................................................................................................199
6.3.9 Restrictor/one-way restrictor (5.6.4) .................................................................................................199
6.3.10 Pressure test...................................................................................................................................199
6.3.11 Ascending car overspeed protection means (5.6.6).......................................................................199
6.3.12 Stopping of the car at landings and levelling accuracy (5.12.1.1.4)...............................................200
6.3.13 Protection against unintended car movement (5.6.7)...................................................................200
6.3.14 Protection against falling/shearing (5.3.9.3.4)...............................................................................200
7 Information for use..............................................................................................................................200
7.1 General ...................................................................................................................................................200
7.2 Instruction manual .................................................................................................................................200
7.2.1 General ...............................................................................................................................................200
7.2.2 Normal use .........................................................................................................................................201
7.2.3 Maintenance.......................................................................................................................................201
7.2.4 Examinations and tests.......................................................................................................................202
7.3 Logbook ..................................................................................................................................................202
8 Use of ISO/TS 8100-3 ...........................................................................................................................204
Annex A (normative) List of the electric safety devices................................................................................205ISO/PRF 8100-1:20192023(E)
vi © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Annex B (informative) Technical compliance documentation ...................................................................... 208
Annex C (informative) Periodic examinations and tests, examinations and tests after an important
modification or after an accident ............................................................................................................... 210
Annex D (informative) Machinery spaces — Access .................................................................................... 212
Annex E (informative) Building interfaces................................................................................................... 213
Annex F (normative) Pit access ladder........................................................................................................ 216
Annex G (informative) Relationship between this document and ISO 8100-20............................................. 221
Bibliography .............................................................................................................................................. 222ISO/PRF 8100-1:20192023(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved vii
European Foreword
This document will supersede EN 81-20:2019.
This document has been prepared under a mandate given to CEN by the European Commission and the
European Free Trade Association, and supports essential requirements of EU Directive(s).
For relationship with EU Directive(s), see informative Annex ZA, which is an integral part of this document.
This is the second edition of the standard. The need for replacement was based on the following points:
— improvement in safety due to changes in proven technology;
— the need to reflect changes to the state of the art;
— incorporation of essential health and safety requirements from the relevant EU Directives;
— elimination of reported errors;
— clarification of the text and incorporation of proposals resulting from interpretation requests1);
— improvement of the references to other standards according to the progress in that field
According to the CEN-CENELEC Internal Regulations, the national standards organizations of the following
countries are bound to implement this European Standard: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech
Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, France, Germany, Greece,
Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland,
Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey and the United Kingdom.
1) Within CEN/TC 10 an interpretation committee has been established to answer questions about the spirit in which the
experts have drafted the various clauses of this standard. All such interpretations are published within CEN TS 81-11 until
incorporated by amendment into the standards concerned.
Formatted: English (United States)ISO/PRF 8100-1:20192023(E)
viii © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Foreword
ISO (the International Organization for Standardization) is a worldwide federation of national standards
bodies (ISO member bodies). The work of preparing International Standards is normally carried out through
ISO technical committees. Each member body interested in a subject for which a technical committee has
been established has the right to be represented on that committee. International organizations,
governmental and non-governmental, in liaison with ISO, also take part in the work. ISO collaborates closely
with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) on all matters of electrotechnical standardization.
The procedures used to develop this document and those intended for its further maintenance are described
in the ISO/IEC Directives, Part 1. In particular, the different approval criteria needed for the different types
of ISO documents should be noted. This document was drafted in accordance with the editorial rules of the
ISO/IEC Directives, Part 2 (see www.iso.org/directives).
Attention is drawn to the possibility that some of the elements of this document may be the subject of patent
rights. ISO shall not be held responsible for identifying any or all such patent rights. Details of any patent
rights identified during the development of the document will be in the Introduction and/or on the ISO list
of patent declarations received (see www.iso.org/patents).
Any trade name used in this document is information given for the convenience of users and does not
constitute an endorsement.
For an explanation of the voluntary nature of standards, the meaning of ISO specific terms and expressions
related to conformity assessment, as well as information about ISO's adherence to the World Trade
Organization (WTO) principles in the Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) see www.iso.org/iso/foreword.html.
This document was prepared by Technical Committee ISO/TC 178, Lifts, escalators, passenger conveyors.
Any feedback or questions on this document should be directed to the user’s national standards body. A
complete listing of these bodies can be found at www.iso.org/members.html.
A list of all parts in the ISO 8100 series can be found on the ISO website.ISO/PRF 8100-1:20192023(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved ix
Introduction
0.1 General
The content of this document was already published in EN 81-20:2014. This document contains only
editorial changes and update of references.
This document is a type C standard as stated in ISO 12100.
The machinery concerned and the extent to which hazards, hazardous situations and hazardous events are
covered are indicated in the scope of this document.
When provisions of this type C standard are different from those which are stated in type A or B standards,
the provisions of this type C standard take precedence over the provisions of the other standards, for
machines that have been designed and built according to the provisions of this type C standard.
0.2 General remarks
0.2.1 The object of this document is to define safety rules related to passenger and goods passenger lifts
with a view to safeguarding persons and objects against the risk of accidents associated with the normal use,
maintenance and emergency operation of lifts.
0.2.2 A study has been made of the various possible hazards with lifts, see Clause 4.
0.2.2.1 Persons to be safeguarded:
a) users, including passengers and competent and authorized persons, e.g. maintenance and inspection
personnel (see EN 13015);
b) persons in the surrounding area of the well, or any machine room and pulley room, who can be effected
by the lift.
0.2.2.2 Property to be safeguarded:
a) loads in car;
b) components of the lift installation;
c) building in which the lift is installed;
d) immediate surrounding area of the lift installation.
NOTE EN 81-71 gives additional requirements covering lifts resistant to acts of vandalism and EN 81-77 gives
additional requirements covering lifts in seismic conditions.
0.2.3 When the weight, size and/or shape of components prevent them from being moved by hand, they
are:
a) fitted with attachments for lifting gear; or
b) designed so that they can be fitted with such attachments (e.g. by means of threaded holes); or
c) shaped in such a way that standard lifting gear can easily be attached.
0.3 Principles
Commented [IJ1]: This will be deleted in the next
revisionISO/PRF 8100-1:20192023(E)
x © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
0.3.1 General
In drawing up this document, the following principles have been used:
0.3.2 This document does not repeat all the general technical rules applicable to every electrical,
mechanical, or building construction including the protection of building elements against fire.
However, it has been necessary to establish certain requirements for good construction, either because they
are peculiar to lift manufacture or because, in the case of lift utilization, the requirements can be more
stringent than elsewhere.
0.3.3 This document states minimum rules for the installation of lifts into buildings/constructions. There
can be regulations for the construction of buildings in some countries which cannot be ignored.
Typical clauses affected by this are those defining minimum values for the height of the machine and pulley
rooms and for the dimensions of their access doors.
0.3.4 As far as possible, this document sets out only the requirements that materials and equipment should
meet in the interests of safe operation of lifts.
0.3.5 Risk analysis, terminology and technical solutions have been considered, taking into account the
methods of ISO 12100, ISO 14798 and the IEC 61508 series of standards.
0.3.6 In order for this document to be a widely applicable standard, the average weight of a person has been
determined to be 75 kg.
This document defines the maximum car area related to a specified design load in the car (rated load) and
the minimum car area to transport a corresponding number of persons, based on 75 kg per person, in order
to detect and discourage overloading.
0.4 Assumptions
0.4.1 General
In drawing up this document, the following assumptions have been made:
0.4.2 Negotiations have been made between the customer and the supplier, and an agreement was reached
about:
a) the intended use of the lift;
b) the type and mass of the handling devices intended to be used to load and unload the car, in the case of
goods passenger lifts;
c) environmental conditions such as temperature, humidity, exposure to sun or wind, snow, corrosive
atmosphere;
d) civil engineering problems (for example, building regulations);
e) other aspects related to the place of installation;
f) the dissipation of heat from the components/equipment of the lift which would require ventilation of
the well and/or the machinery space/location of equipment;
g) information about the aspects relating to noise and vibrations emitted by the equipment.ISO/PRF 8100-1:20192023(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved xi
h) Type and performance of automatic rescue operation if any
0.4.3 Relevant risks have been considered for each component that can be incorporated in a complete lift
installation and rules have been drawn up accordingly.
Components are:
a) designed in accordance with usual engineering practice (see ISO/TS 8100-21) and calculation codes,
taking into account all failure modes;
b) of sound mechanical and electrical construction;
c) made of materials with adequate strength and of suitable quality;
d) free of defects;
e) free from harmful materials, e.g. asbestos.
0.4.4 Components are kept in good repair and working order, so that the required dimensions remain
fulfilled despite wear. All lift components are considered as requiring inspection to ensure safe continued
operation during use.
The operational clearances specified in the standard should be maintained not only during the examination
and tests before the lift is put into service, but also throughout the life of the lift.
NOTE Components not requiring maintenance (e.g. maintenance free, sealed for life) are still required to be
available for inspection.
0.4.5 Components are selected and installed so that foreseeable environmental influences and special
working conditions do not affect the safe operation of the lift.
0.4.6 By design of the load bearing elements, safe normal operation of the lift is assured for loads ranging
from 0 % to 100 % of the rated load, plus any designed overload capacity (see 5.12.1.2).
0.4.7 The requirements in this document are such that the possibility of a failure of an electric safety device
(see 5.11.2) or a type tested safety component complying with all the requirements of this document and
ISO 8100-2, does not need to be taken into consideration.
0.4.8 Users need to be safeguarded against their own negligence and unwitting carelessness when using the
lift in the intended way.
0.4.9 A user can, in certain cases, make one imprudent act. The possibility of two simultaneous acts of
imprudence and/or the abuse of instructions for use is not considered.
0.4.10 If in the course of maintenance work, a safety device normally not accessible to the users is
deliberately neutralized, safe operation of the lift is no longer assured, but compensatory measures are taken
to ensure users’ safety, in conformity with maintenance instructions.
It is assumed that maintenance personnel are instructed and work according to the instructions.
0.4.11 Horizontal forces and/or energies to consider are indicated in the applicable clauses of this
document. Typically, where not otherwise specified in this document, the energy exerted by a person results
in an equivalent static force of:
a) 300 N;
Commented [IJ2]: See N1544ISO/PRF 8100-1:20192023(E)
xii © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
b) 1 000 N where impact can occur.
0.4.12 With the exception of the items listed below, which have been given special consideration, a
mechanical device built according to good practice and the requirements of this document (including
uncontrolled slipping of the traction meansropes on the traction sheave) does not deteriorate to a point of
creating hazard without the possibility of detection, provided that all of the instructions given by the
manufacturer have been duly applied:
a) breakage of the suspension;
b) breakage and slackening of all linkage by auxiliary ropes, chains and belts;
c) failure of one of the mechanical components of the electromechanical brake which take part in the
application of the braking action on the drum or disk;
d) failure of a component associated with the main drive elements and the traction sheave;
e) rupture in the hydraulic system (jack excluded);
f) small leakage in the hydraulic system (jack included, see 6.3.10).
0.4.13 The possibility of the safety gear not engaging should the car free fall from a stationary position, at
the lowest landing before the car strikes the buffer(s), is considered acceptable.
0.4.14 When the speed of the car is linked to the electrical frequency of the mains, the speed is assumed not
to exceed 115 % of the rated speed or a corresponding lesser speed where specified in this document for
inspection control, levelling, etc.
0.4.15 Means of access are provided for the hoisting of heavy equipment [see 0.4.2 e)].
0.4.16 To ensure the correct functioning of the equipment in the well and machinery space(s), i.e. taking
into account the heat dissipated by the equipment, the ambient temperature in the well and the machinery
space(s) is assumed to be maintained between +5 °C and +40 °C.
NOTE See IEC 60364-5-51, Code AA5.
0.4.17 The well is suitably ventilated, according to national building regulation, taking into consideration
the heat output as specified by the manufacturer, the environmental conditions of the lift and the limits given
in 0.4.16, e.g. ambient temperature, humidity, direct sunlight, air quality and air tightness of buildings due to
energy saving requirements.
NOTE See 0.4.2 and E.3 for further guidance.
0.4.18 Access ways to the working areas are adequately lit (see 0.4.2).
0.4.19 Minimum passageways, corridors, fire escapes, etc. are not obstructed by the open door/trap of the
lift and/or any protection means for working areas outside of the well, where fitted according to the
maintenance instructions (see 0.4.2).
0.4.20 Where more than one person is working at the same time on a lift, an adequate means of
communication between these persons is ensured.ISO/PRF 8100-1:20192023(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved xiii
0.4.21 The fixing system of guards, used specifically to provide protection against mechanical, electrical or
any other hazards by means of a physical barrier, which need to be removed during regular maintenance and
inspection, remains attached to the guard or to the equipment when the guard is removed.
0.4.22 The fluids used for the operation of hydraulic lifts are according to ISO 6743-4.INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 1
Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts — Lifts for the transport of persons and
goods — Part 1: Passenger and goods passenger lifts
1 Scope
1.1 This document specifies the safety rules for permanently installed new passenger or goods passenger
lifts, with traction, positive or hydraulic drive, serving defined landing levels, having a car designed for the
transportation of persons or persons and goods, suspended by ropes, belts, chains or jacks and moving
between guide rails inclined not more than 15° to the vertical.
1.2 In addition to the requirements of this document, supplementary requirements need to be considered
in special cases (use of lifts by persons with disabilities, in case of fire, potentially explosive atmosphere,
extreme climate conditions, seismic conditions, transporting dangerous goods, etc.).
1.3 This document does not cover:
a) lifts with:
1) drive systems other than those stated in 1.1;
2) rated speed less than or equal to 0,15 m/s;
b) hydraulic lifts:
1) with a rated speed exceeding 1,0 m/s;
2) where the setting of the pressure relief valve (5.9.3.5.3) exceeds 50 MPa;
c) new passenger or goods passenger lifts in existing buildings2 where, in some circumstances due to
limitations enforced by building constraints, some requirements of this document cannot be met and
local requirements, e.g., EN 81-21 need to be considered;
d) lifting appliances, such as paternosters, mine lifts, theatrical lifts, appliances with automatic caging,
skips, lifts and hoists for building and public works sites, ships' hoists, platforms for exploration or
drilling at sea, construction and maintenance appliances or lifts in wind turbines;
e) important modifications (see Annex C) to a lift installed before this document is brought into application;
f) safety during operations of transport, erection, repairs, and dismantling of lifts.
2 An existing building is a building which is used or was already used before the order for the lift was placed. A building whose
internal structure is completely renewed is considered a new building.
Commented [IJ3]: See 17xxISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
2 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
However, this document can usefully be taken as a basis.
Noise and vibrations are not dealt with in this document as they are not found at levels which could be
considered harmful with regard to the safe use and maintenance of the lift (see also 0.4.2).
1.4 This document is not applicable to passenger and goods passenger lifts, which are installed before the
date of its publication.
2 Normative references
The following documents are referred to in the text in such a way that some or all of their content constitutes
requirements of this document. For dated references, only the edition cited applies. For undated references,
the latest edition of the referenced document (including any amendments) applies.
ISO 1219-1:2012, Fluid power systems and components — Graphical symbols and circuit diagrams — Part 1:
Graphical symbols for conventional use and data-processing applications
ISO 3008-2, Fire-resistance tests — Part 2: Lift landing door assemblies
ISO 4344:2004, Steel wire ropes for lifts — Minimum requirements
ISO 8100-2:2019, Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts — Examinations and tests — Part 2:
Design rules, calculations, examinations and tests of lift components
ISO/TS 8100-3:2019, Requirements from Other Standards (ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and JIS A 4307-1/ JIS A 4307-
2) not included in ISO 8100-1 or ISO 8100-2
ISO 12100:2010, Safety of machinery — General principles for design — Risk assessment and risk reduction
ISO 13857:2008, Safety of machinery — Safety distances to prevent hazard zones being reached by upper and
lower limbs
ISO 22200, Electromagnetic compatibility — Product family standard for lifts, escalators and moving walks —
Immunity
ISO 22199, Electromagnetic compatibility — Product family standard for lifts, escalators and moving walks —
Emission
ISO 29584:2015, Glass in building — Pendulum impact testing and classification of safety glass
IEC 60204-1:20062016, Safety of machinery — Electrical equipment of machines — Part 1: General
requirements
IEC 60227-6:2001, Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and including 450/750 V — Part
6: Lift cables and cables for flexible connections
IEC 60245-5:1994, Rubber insulated cables — Rated voltages up to and including 450/750 V — Part 5: Lift
cables
Commented [IJ4]: Replacing EN 81-58
Commented [IJ5]: Replacing EN 12385-5
Commented [IJ6]: Replacing EN 12105 and EN 12016
Commented [IJ7]: Replacing EN 12600:2002ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 3
IEC 60364-4-41:2005, Low voltage electrical installations — Part 4-41: Protection for safety — Protection
against electric shock
IEC 60364-4-42:2010, Low voltage electrical installations — Part 4-42: Protection for safety — Protection
against thermal effects
IEC 60364-6:20062016, Low voltage electrical installations — Part 6: Verification
IEC 60417:2002, Database — Graphical symbols for use on equipment
IEC 60529:1992+A2:2013, Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 60617:2012, Graphical symbols for diagrams
IEC 60664-1:2007, Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems — Part 1: Principles,
requirements and tests
IEC 60947-4-1:20092018, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 4: Contactors and motor —
starters - Section 1: Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters
IEC 60947-5-1:20032016, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 5-1: Control circuit devices and
switching elements — Electromechanical control circuit devices
IEC 60947-5-5:1997, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 5-5: Control circuit devices and
switching elements — Electrical emergency stop device with mechanical latching function
IEC 61310-3:2007, Safety of machinery - Indication, marking and actuation — Requirements for the location
and operation of actuators
IEC 61800-5-2:20072016, Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems — Part 2: Safety requirements.
Functional)
IEC 61810-1:2015, Electromechanical elementary relays — Part 1: General requirements
IEC 61810-3:2015, Electromechanical elementary relays - Part 3: Relays with forcibly guided (mechanically
linked) contacts
EN 12385-5:2002, Steel wire ropes — Safety — Stranded ropes for lifts
EN 81-28:2018, Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts — Lifts for the transport of persons and
goods — Part 28: Remote alarm on passenger and goods passenger lifts
EN 81-58:2018, Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts — Examinations and tests - Part 58:
Landing door fire resistance test
EN 131-2:2010+A1:2017, Ladders — Requirements, testing, marking
Commented [IJ8]: See N1541ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
4 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
EN 1993-1-1:2002, Eurocode 3 — Design of steel structures — Part 1-1: General rules and rules for buildings
EN 10305-1:2016, Steel tubes for precision applications — Technical delivery conditions — Part 1: Seamless
cold drawn tubes
EN 10305-2:2016, Steel tubes for precision applications — Technical delivery conditions — Part 2: Welded cold
drawn tubes
EN 10305-3:2016, Steel tubes for precision applications — Technical delivery conditions — Part 3: Welded cold
sized tubes
EN 10305-4:2016, Steel tubes for precision applications — Technical delivery conditions — Part 4: Seamless
cold drawn tubes for hydraulic and pneumatic power systems
EN 10305-5:2016, Steel tubes for precision applications — Technical delivery conditions — Part 5: Welded cold
sized square and rectangular tubes
EN 10305-6:2016, Steel tubes for precision applications — Technical delivery conditions — Part 6: Welded cold
drawn tubes for hydraulic and pneumatic power systemsEN 10305 (all parts), Steel tubes for precision
applications — Technical delivery conditions
EN 13015:2019, Maintenance for lifts and escalators — Rules for maintenance instructions
EN 13501-1:2007+A1:2009, Fire classification of construction products and building elements — Part 1:
Classification using data from reaction to fire tests
EN 50214:2006, Flat polyvinyl chloride sheathed flexible cables
EN 50274:2002, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies — Protection against electric shock —
Protection against unintentional direct contact with hazardous live partsISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 5
3 Terms and definitions
For the purposes of this document, the following terms and definitions as well as terms and definitions given
in ISO 12100:2010 apply.
ISO and IEC maintain terminological databases for use in standardization at the following addresses:
— ISO Online browsing platform: available at https://www.iso.org/obp
— IEC Electropedia: available at http://www.electropedia.org/
3.1
apron
smooth vertical part extending downwards from the sill of the landing or car entrance
3.2
authorized person
person with the permission of the natural or legal person who has the responsibility for the operation and
use of the lift, to access restricted areas (machinery spaces, pulley rooms and lift well) for maintenance,
inspection or rescue operations
Note 1 to entry: Authorized persons should be competent for the tasks they have been authorized for (see also 3.7).
3.3
automatic rescue operation
device or function that operates automatically in case of failure or loss of power supply to move the lift car
to a landing.
3.4
available car area
area of the car, which is available for passengers or goods during operation of the lift
3.5
balancing weight
mass which saves energy by balancing all or part of the mass of the car
3.6
buffer
resilient stop at the end of travel, and comprising a means of braking using fluids or springs (or other similar
means)
3.7
car
part of the lift which carries the passengers and/or other loads
Commented [IJ9]: See N1722
Commented [IJ10]: See N1544ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
6 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
3.8
competent person
person, suitably trained, qualified by knowledge and practical experience, provided with necessary
instructions to safely carry out the required operations for maintaining or inspecting the lift, or rescuing
users
Note 1 to entry: National regulations can require certification of competence.
3.9
counterweight
mass which ensures traction
3.10
direct acting lift
hydraulic lift where the ram or cylinder is directly attached to the car or its sling
3.11
down direction valve
electrically controlled valve in a hydraulic circuit for controlling the descent of the car
3.12
drive control system
system controlling and monitoring the running of the lift machine
3.13
electric safety device
safety contact, safety circuit or SIL-rated circuit, having the required reliability of operation
3.14
electrical anti-creep system
combination of precautions for hydraulic lifts against the danger of creeping
3.15
electric safety chain
the total of the electric safety devices connected in such a way as to stop the lift when one of them is activated
3.16
full load pressure
static pressure exerted on the piping, jack, valve block, etc., with the car and rated load being at rest at the
highest landing level
3.17
goods passenger lift
lift mainly intended for the transport of goods, which are generally accompanied by persons
3.18
guide railsISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 7
rigid components which provide guiding for the car, the counterweight or the balancing weight
3.19
headroom
part of the well between the highest landing served by the car and the ceiling of the well
3.20
hydraulic lift
lift in which the lifting power is derived from an electrically driven pump transmitting hydraulic fluid to a
jack, acting directly or indirectly on the car (multiple motors, pumps and/or jacks may be used)
3.21
indirect acting lift
hydraulic lift where the ram or cylinder is connected to the car or the car sling by suspension means (ropes,
chains)
3.22
installer
legal or natural person taking responsibility to erect and commission the lift at its final location in the
building
3.23
instantaneous safety gear
safety gear in which the full gripping action on the guide rails is almost immediate
3.24
jack
combination of a cylinder and a ram forming a hydraulic actuating unit
3.25
laminated glass
assembly of two or more glass layers, each of which is bonded together with one or more plastic or liquid
interlayers
3.26
levelling
operation which achieves the accuracy of stopping at landings
3.27
levelling accuracy
vertical distance between car sill and landing sill during loading or unloading of the carISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
8 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
3.28
lift machine
unit which drives and stops the lift, including any motor, gear, brake, sheave/sprockets and drum (traction
or positive drive lift) or comprising the pump, pump motor and control valves (hydraulic drive lift)
3.29
load bearing member
steel wire rope or steel wire strand inside of an elastomeric coated rope or belt
3.30
machine room
fully enclosed machinery space with ceiling, walls, floor and access door(s) in which machinery as a whole
or in parts is placed
3.31
machinery
equipment such as: control cabinet(s) and drive system, lift machine, main switch(es), and means for
emergency operations
3.32
machinery space
volume(s) inside or outside of the well where the machinery as a whole or in parts is placed, including the
working areas associated with the machinery
Note 1 to entry: A machinery cabinet with its associated working area(s) is considered as a machinery space.
3.33
maintenance
all the necessary operations to ensure the safe and intended functioning of the installation and its
components after the completion of the installation and throughout its life cycle
Note 1 to entry: Maintenance can include:
a) lubrication, cleaning, etc.;
b) checks;
c) rescue operations;
d) operations of setting and adjustment;
e) repair or changing of components which can occur due to wear or tear and do not affect the characteristics of the
installation.
3.34
minimum breaking force (MBF)
specified value in kN below which the measured breaking force is not allowed to fall in a breaking force test Commented [IJ11]: See N1722ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 9
3.35
mission time
mission time represents the maximum period of time for which a system or subsystem can be used before it
must be replaced.
3.36
non return valve
valve which allows flow in one direction only
3.37
on-board power supply
Integrated power supply located within limits of application of this standard (see 5.10.1.1.1). Includes but is
not limited to batteries, super capacitors and fuel cells.
3.38
one-way restrictor
valve which allows free flow in one direction and restricted flow in the other direction
3.39
overspeed governor
device which, when the lift attains a predetermined speed, causes the lift to stop, and if necessary, causes the
safety gear to be applied
3.40
passenger
any person transported by a lift in the car
341
pawl device
mechanical device for stopping involuntary descent of the car, and maintaining it stationary on fixed
supports
3.42
pit
the part of the well situated below the lowest landing served by the car
3.43
positive drive lift
lift which is directly driven (not reliant on friction) by drum and ropes or by sprockets and chains or by
sprockets and timing belts
Note 1 to entry: In this document, the term “positive drive lift” includes drum drive.
Commented [IJ12]: See N1722
Commented [IJ13]: “Integrated” added as WG1
comment
Commented [IJ14]: See N1544
Commented [IJ15]: See N17xxISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
10 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
3.44
preliminary operation
energizing of the machine and the brake/hydraulic valve as preparation to a normal run when the car is in
the door zone and doors are not closed and locked
3.45
pressure relief valve
valve which limits the pressure to a pre-determined value by exhausting fluid
3.
programmable electronic system in safety related applications for lifts
PESSRAL
system for control, protection or monitoring based on one or more programmable electronic devices,
including all elements of the system such as power supplies, sensors and other input devices, data highways
and other communication paths, and actuators and other output devices, used in safety-related applications
as listed in Table A.1
3.46
progressive safety gear
safety gear in which retardation is effected by a braking action on the guide rails and for which special
provisions are made so as to limit the forces on the car, counterweight or balancing weight to a permissible
value
3.47
pulley room
room not containing the machine, in which pulleys are located, and in which the overspeed governor can also
be housed
3.48
rated load
load which is intended to be carried in normal operation, which can include handling devices (see 0.4.2)
3.49
rated speed
v
speed in metres per second of the car for which the equipment has been built
Note 1 to entry: For hydraulic drive lifts:
— vm is the rated speed upwards in metres per second;
— vd is the rated speed downwards in metres per second;
— vs is the higher value of both rated speeds vm and vd in metres per second.
3.50
re-levellingISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 11
operation, after the lift has stopped, to permit the stopping position to be corrected during loading or
unloading
3.51
rescue operations
specific actions required to safely release persons entrapped in the car and well by competent persons
3.52
residual breaking force (RBF)
measured value of suspension member after normal use at the end of expected life span which is detected
when discard criteria have been reached
3.53
restrictor
valve in which the inlet and outlet are connected through a restricted passage way
3.54
rupture valve
valve designed to close automatically when the pressure drop across the valve, caused by the increased flow
in a pre-determined flow direction, exceeds a pre-set amount
3.55
safety circuit
circuit containing electricalcontacts and/or electronic components which is capable regarded to fulfil
demands of an electric safety device
Note 1 to entry: Electronic components include electromechanical devices like contacts and relays. Electronic
components include solid0state non-programmable electronic devices.
3.56
safety component
component provided to fulfil a safety function when in use
3.57
safety gear
mechanical device for stopping in the down direction, and maintaining stationary on the guide rails, the lift
car, counterweight or balancing weight in case of overspeeding or breaking of the suspension
3.58
safety integrity level
SIL
discreete level (one out of a possible three) for specifying the safety-integrity requirements of the safety
functions allocated to the SIL-rated circuitthe programmable electronic safety-related system, where safety
integrity level 3 has the highest level of safety integrity and safety-integrity level 1 has the lowest
Commented [IJ16]: See N17xx
Commented [IJ17]: See N1722
Commented [IJ18]: See N1722ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
12 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
3.59
safety rope
auxiliary rope attached to the car, the counterweight or balancing weight for the purpose of tripping a safety
gear in case of suspension failure
3.60
shut-off valve
manually operated two-way valve which can permit or prevent flow in either direction
3.61
single acting jack
jack in which displacement in one direction is by fluid action and in the other by influence of gravity
3.62
SIL-rated circuit
circuit based on electrical (E), and/or electronic (E), and/or programmable electronic (PE) technology
which is capable to fulfil demands of an electric safety device with a defined safety integrity level (SIL).
Note to entry:
The term is intended to cover any and all devices or systems operating on electrical principles.
EXAMPLE: Electrical/electronic/programmable electronic devices include:
(a) electromechanical devices (electrical)
(b) solid-state non-programmable electronic devices (electronic)
(c) electronic devices based on computer technology (programmable electronic)
3.63
sling
metal framework carrying the car, counterweight or balancing weight, connected to the means of suspension
Note 1 to entry: This sling can be integral with the car enclosure.
3.64
special tool
tool unique to the equipment required in order to keep the equipment in a safe operating condition or for
rescue operations
3.65
stopping accuracy
vertical distance between car sill and landing sill at the moment when a car is stopped by the control system
at its destination floor and the doors reach their fully open position
3.66
Commented [IJ19]: AH06 to confirm if still neededISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 13
Suspension member
is one rope/coated rope/belt/timing belt in the system to suspend car/cwt and is engaged to car/cwt side
terminations
3.67
Suspension means
includes all ropes/belts/chains) suspending car/cwt/balancing weight and is engaged to
car/cwt/balancing weight side termination
3.68
traction lift
lift whose suspension means lifting ropes are driven by friction in the grooves of the driving sheave of the
machine
3.69
travelling cable
flexible electric cable containing multiple cores between the car and a fixed point
3.70
type examination certificate
document issued by an approved body carrying out a type-examination in which it certifies that the product
example under consideration complies with the provisions applicable to it
Note 1 to entry: For the process of type examination and definition of approved body, see ISO 8100-2.
3.71
unintended car movement
non-commanded movement of the car with doors open within the door zone away from the landing,
excluding movements resulting from loading/unloading operation
3.72
unlocking zone
zone, extending above and below the landing level, in which the car floor has to be to enable the
corresponding landing door to be unlocked
3.73
user
person making use of the services of a lift installation which includes passengers, persons waiting at the
landings and authorized persons
3.74
well
Commented [IJ20]: See N17xx
Commented [IJ21]: See N17xxISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
14 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
space in which the car, the counterweight or the balancing weight travels. This space is usually bounded by
the bottom of the pit, the walls and the ceiling of the wellISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 15
4 List of significant hazards
This clause contains all the significant hazards, hazardous situations and events, as far as they are dealt with
in this document, identified by risk assessment as significant for this type of machinery and which require
action to eliminate or reduce the risk (see Table 1).
Table 1 — List of significant hazards
No. Hazards
as listed in ISO 12100:2010, Annex B
Relevant subclauses
1 Mechanical hazards due to
Acceleration, deceleration (kinetic energy) 5.2.5; 5.3.6, 5.5.3; 5.6.2; 5.6.3; 5.6.6;
5.6.7; 5.8.2; 5.9.2; 5.9.3
Approach of a moving element to a fixed part 5.2.5; 5.2.6; 5.5.8
Falling objects 5.2.5; 5.2.6
Gravity (stored energy) 5.2.5
Height from the ground 5.3; 5.4.7; 5.5; 5.6
High pressure 5.4.2; 5.9.3; See also 1.3
Moving elements 5.2; 5.3; 5.4; 5.5; 5.6; 5.7; 5.8
Rotating elements 5.5.7; 5.6.2; 5.9.1
Rough, slippery surface 5.2.1; 5.2.2; 5.4.7
Sharp edges Not addressed. See 5.1.1
Stability See 0.4.3
Strength See 0.4.3
Crushing hazard 5.2.5; 5.3
Shearing hazard 5.3
Entanglement hazard 5.5.7; 5.6.2; 5.9.1
Drawing-in or trapping hazard 5.2.1; 5.3.1; 5.3.8; 5.4.11; 5.5.3;
5.5.7; 5.6.2; 5.9.1; 5.10.5; 5.12.1
Impact hazard 5.8
— Slip, trip and fall of persons (related to machinery) 5.2.1; 5.2.2; 5.3.11; 5.4.7; 5.3; 5.5;
5.6; 5.12.1.1.4
— Uncontrolled amplitude of movements 5.2.1; 5.2.5; 5.5.6; 5.8
— From insufficient mechanical strength of parts See 0.4.3
— From inadequate design of pulleys, drums 5.5.3
Commented [IJ22]: Will need to be updated
Commented [IJ23]: See N1537ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
16 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
No. Hazards
as listed in ISO 12100:2010, Annex B
Relevant subclauses
— Falling of person from person carrier 5.3; 5.4.3; 5.4.6; 5.4.7
2 Electrical hazards
Arc 5.11.2
Live parts 5.2.6; 5.11.2; 5.12.1
Overload 5.10.4
Parts which have become live under faulty conditions 5.10.1; 5.10.2; 5.10.3; 5.11.2
Short-circuit 5.10.3; 5.10.4, 5.11.1; 5.11.2
Thermal radiation 5.10.1
3 Thermal hazards
Flame 5.3.6
Objects or materials with a high or low temperature 5.10.1
Radiation from heat sources 5.10.1
4 Hazards generated by noise Not relevant (See 1.3)
5 Hazards generated by vibration Not relevant (See 1.3)
6 Hazards generated by radiation
Low frequency electromagnetic radiation 5.10.1.1.3
Radio frequency electromagnetic radiation 5.10.1.1.3
7 Hazards generated by materials and substances
Combustible 5.4.4
Dust 5.2.1
Explosive Not addressed (See 1.2)
Fibre 0.4.3
Flammable 5.9.3
Fluid 0.4.22; 5.2.1
8 Hazards generated by neglecting ergonomic
principles in machinery design as, e.g. hazards from
Access 5.2.1; 5.2.2; 5.2.4; 5.2.5; 5.2.6; 5.6.2;
5.9.3; 5.12.1
Design or location of indicators and visual displays
units
5.2.6; 5.3.9; 5.12.1.1; 5.12.4
Design, location or identification of control devices 5.4.8; 5.10.5; 5.10.8; 5.10.10;
5.12.1.1; 5.12.1.5ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 17
No. Hazards
as listed in ISO 12100:2010, Annex B
Relevant subclauses
Effort 5.2.1; 5.2.3; 5.2.5; 5.2.6; 5.3.8;
5.3.12; 5.3.14; 5.4.7; 5.9.2
Local lighting 5.2.1; 5.2.2; 5.2.6; 5.3.10; 5.4.10;
5.10.1; 5.10.5; 5.10.7; 5.10.8
Repetitive activity 5.12.1
Visibility 5.2.5; 5.9.1; 5.12.1
9 Hazards associated with the environment in which
the machine is used
Dust and fog 5.2.1
Electromagnetic disturbance 5.10.1
Moisture 5.2.1, 5.2.6
Temperature 5.2.1; 5.2.6; 5.3.12; 5.9.3; 5.10.4
Water 5.2.1; 5.2.6
Wind 5.7.2.3.1 a) 2)
Failure of the power supply 5.2.1; 5.2.3; 5.2.4; 5.2.5; 5.2.6;
5.3.12; 5.4.3; 5.4.6; 5.6.2; 5.9.2;
5.9.3; 5.12.1; 5.12.3
Failure of the control circuit 5.6.7
Unexpected start-up, unexpected overrun/overspeed
(or any similar malfunction) from restoration of energy
supply after an interruption
5.2.1; 5.2.6; 5.4.7; 5.6.2; 5.6.5; 5.6.6;
5.6.7; 5.8; 5.10.5; 5.12.2ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
18 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5 Safety requirements and/or protective measures
5.1 General
5.1.1 Passenger and goods passenger lifts shall comply with the safety requirements and/or protective
measures of the following clauses. In addition, the passenger and goods passenger lifts shall be designed
according to the principles of ISO 12100 for hazards relevant but not significant that are not dealt with by
this document (e.g. sharp edges).
5.1.2 All labels, notices, markings and operating instructions shall be permanently affixed, indelible, legible
and readily understandable (if necessary aided by signs or symbols). They shall be of durable material, placed
in a visible position, and written in the accepted language(s) of the country where the lift is installed.
5.2 Well, machinery spaces and pulley rooms
5.2.1 General provisions
Arrangement of lift equipment
5.2.1.1.1 All lift equipment shall be located in the well or in machinery spaces or pulley rooms.
5.2.1.1.2 If parts of different lifts are present in one machine and/or pulley room each lift shall be identified
with a number, letter or colour consistently used for all parts (machine, controller, overspeed governor,
switches, etc.).
Exclusive use of the well, machine and pulley rooms
5.2.1.2.1 The well, machine and pulley rooms shall not be used for purposes other than lifts. They shall not
contain ducts, cables or devices other than for the lift.
The lift well, machine and pulley rooms may, however, contain:
a) equipment for air-conditioning or heating of these spaces, excluding steam heating and high-pressure
water heating. However, any control and adjustment devices of the heating apparatus shall be located
outside the well.
b) fire detectors or extinguishers, with a high operating temperature (e.g. above 80° C), appropriate for the
electrical equipment and suitably protected against accidental impact.
When sprinkler systems are used, activation of the sprinkler shall only be possible, when the lift is stationary
at a landing and the electrical supply of the lift and lighting circuits are automatically switched off by the fire
or smoke detection system.
NOTE Such smoke, fire detection and sprinkler systems are the responsibility of the building management.
5.2.1.2.2 Machine rooms may contain machines for other kinds of lifts, e.g. goods only lifts.
5.2.1.2.3 In the case of partially enclosed lift wells according to 5.2.5.2.3, the well is regarded as the area:ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 19
a) inside the enclosure where enclosures are present;
b) being within a horizontal distance of 1,50 m from movable components of the lift, where enclosures are
missing.
Ventilation of the well, machinery spaces and pulley rooms
The well, machinery spaces and pulley rooms shall not be used to provide ventilation of rooms other than
those belonging to the lift.
Ventilation shall be such that the motors and equipment, as well as electric cables, etc., are protected from
dust, harmful fumes and humidity.
NOTE See E.3 for further guidance.
Lighting
5.2.1.4.1 The well shall be provided with permanently installed electric lighting, giving the following
intensity of illumination, even when all doors are closed, at any position of the car throughout its travel in
the well:
a) at least 50 lux, 1,0 m above the car roof within its vertical projection;
b) at least 50 lux, 1,0 m above the pit floor, and above the pit platform (where provided), and above the pit
platform (where provided), everywhere a person can stand, work and/or move between the working
areas;
c) at least 20 lux outside of the locations defined in a) and b), excluding shadows created by car or
components.
To achieve this, sufficient number of lamps shall be fixed throughout the well and, where necessary,
additional lamp(s) may be fixed on the car roof as a part of the well’s lighting system.
Lighting elements shall be protected against mechanical damage.
The supply for this lighting shall be in conformity with 5.10.7.1.
NOTE For specific tasks additional temporary lighting can be necessary, e.g. by hand lamp.
The light meter should be oriented towards the strongest light source when taking lux level readings.
5.2.1.4.2 Machinery spaces and pulley rooms shall be provided with permanently installed electric lighting
with an intensity of at least 200 lux at floor level everywhere a person needs to work, and 50 lux at floor level
to move between working areas. The supply for this lighting shall be in conformity with 5.10.7.1.
NOTE This lighting can be part of the lighting of the well.
Commented [IJ24]: See TFxxISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
20 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Electric equipment in the pit and in machinery spaces and pulley rooms
5.2.1.5.1 There shall be in the pit:
a) stopping device(s) in conformity with the requirements of 5.12.1.11; located:
1) at any pit door (landing door or access door)
— within a vertical distance of minimum 0,40 m and maximum 1,20 m from the access floor;
visible and accessible on opening the door(s) to the pit, and from the pit floor, in conformity with the
requirements of 5.12.1.11. The stopping device(s) shall be located as follows:
1) For pits with depth less than or equal to 1,60 m, the stop switch shall be:
— within a vertical distance of minimum 0,40 m above the lowest landing floor and a maximum of 2,0 m
from the pit floor;
— within a horizontal distance of maximum 0,75 m from the door frame inner edge.
Where there are two landing doors at the same level giving access to the pit, then one shall be
determined as the pit access door, having the access equipment;
1)2) above the pit floor or the pit platform,
— within a vertical distance of maximum 1,20 m
— within 0,30 m of a refuge space operable
NOTE This device may be combined with the one on the inspection control station required in b).
2) below the pit platform, when testing and maintenance work has to be executed there.For pits with
depth greater than 1,60 m, two stop switches shall be provided:
3) — the upper switch within a vertical distance of minimum 1,0 m above the lowest landing floor
and within a horizontal distance of maximum 0,75 m from the door frame inner edge;
4) — the lower one within a maximum vertical distance of 1,20 m above pit floor operable from a
refuge space.
5) 3) In the case of a pit access door, other than landing doors, a single stop switch, within a horizontal
distance of maximum 0,75 m from the access door frame inner edge, at 1,20 m in height from the pit
floor.
6) Where there are two landing doors at the same level giving access to the pit, then one shall be
determined as the pit access door, having the access equipment;
7)3) NOTE The stop switch can be combined with the inspection station required in b).
Commented [IJ25]: See TFxxISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 21
b) a permanently installed inspection control station according to 5.12.1.5, operable within 0,30 m of a
refuge space;
c) socket outlet(s) (5.10.7.2) accessible from:
— the pit; where no platform is provided
— the pit platform;
below the pit platform, when testing and maintenance work has to be executed there.
d) means to switch the well lighting (5.2.1.4.1), positioned at any pit door (landing door or pit access door):
— within a vertical distance of minimum 0,40 m and maximum 1,20 m from the access floor;
— within a horizontal distance of maximum 0,75 m from the door frame inner edge.
5.2.1.5.2 There shall be in machinery spaces and pulley rooms an emergency electrical operation switch
according 5.12.1.6, where the distance between the lowest floor and;
— the floor of the pit or
— the pit platform
exceeds 2.0 m, operable within 0,30 m of a refuge space. c) a socket outlet (see 5.10.7.2);
d) means to switch the well lighting (see 5.2.1.4.1), positioned within a maximum horizontal
distance of 0,75 m from the pit access door frame inner edge and at a minimum height of 1,0 m above the
access floor level.
5.2.1.5.2 There shall be in machinery spaces and pulley rooms:
a) a switch accessible only to authorized persons and placed close to each access point, at an
appropriate height, controlling the lighting of the areas and spaces;
b) at least one socket outlet (see 5.10.7.2) provided at an appropriate place for each working area;
c) a stopping device, in conformity with 5.12.1.11, installed in the pulley room, close to each point
of access.
Emergency release
If no means to escape are provided for person(s) trapped in the well, alarm initiation devices to the alarm
system according to EN 81-28 shall be installed at places where the risk of trapping exists (see 5.2.1.5.1,
5.2.6.4 and 5.4.7), operable within 0,30 m of a from the refuge space(s).
Formatted: p5
Commented [IJ26]: See N1538ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
22 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
If there is a risk of trapping in areas outside of the well, such risks should be discussed with the building
owner [see 0.4.2 e)].
Handling of equipment
One or more suspension point(s) with the indication of the safe working load, as appropriate, shall be
provided in the machinery spaces and where necessary, at the top of the well, conveniently positioned to
permit the hoisting of heavy equipment (see 0.4.2 and 0.4.15).
Strength of walls, floors and ceilings
5.2.1.8.1 The structure of the well, machinery spaces and pulley rooms shall conform to national building
regulations and shall be able to support at least the loads which can be applied by the machine; by the guide
rails at the moment of safety gear operation, in the case of eccentric load in the car; by the action of the
buffers; by those which can be applied by the anti-rebound device; by loading and unloading the car; etc. See
also Annex E, E.1.
5.2.1.8.2 The walls of the well shall have a mechanical strength such that when a force of 1 000 N, being
evenly distributed over an area of 0,30 m × 0,30 m in round or square section, is applied at right angles to
the wall at any point on either face, they shall resist without:
a) permanent deformation greater than 1 mm;
b) elastic deformation greater than 15 mm.
5.2.1.8.3 Glass panels, plane or formed, shall be made of laminated glass.
They and their fixings shall withstand 1 000 N horizontal static force on an area of 0,30 m × 0,30 m at any
point, from both inside and outside the well, without permanent deformation.
5.2.1.8.4 The floor of the pit shall be able to support beneath each guide rail, except hanging guide rails,
the force due to the mass of the guide rails plus any load due to components fixed or linked to the guide(s)
and/or any additional reaction, N, occurring during emergency stopping (e.g. load on traction sheave due to
rebound when machine on rails), plus the reaction at the moment of operation of the safety gear and any
push through force exerted by the guide rails clips (see 5.7.2.3.5).
5.2.1.8.5 The floor of the pit shall be able to support beneath the car buffer supports, four times the static
load imposed by the mass of the fully loaded car, evenly distributed between the total number of car buffers
[see Formula (1)]:
F g PQ =⋅ ⋅ + 4 n ( ) (1)
where
F is the total vertical force in newtons;
gn is the standard acceleration of free fall, [9,81 (m/s2)];
P is the mass of the empty car and components supported by the car, i.e. part of the travelling
cable, compensation means compensating ropes/chains (if any), etc. in kilograms; Commented [IJ27]: See N17xxISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 23
Q is the rated load (mass) in kilograms.
5.2.1.8.6 The floor of the pit shall be able to support beneath the counterweight buffer supports, four times
the static load imposed by the mass of the counterweight, evenly distributed between the total number of
counterweight buffers [see Formula (2)]:
F g P qQ =⋅ ⋅ +⋅ 4 n ( ) (2)
where
F is the total vertical force in newtons;
gn is the standard acceleration of free fall, [9,81 (m/s2)];
P is the mass of the empty car and components supported by the car, i.e. part of the travelling
cable, compensationing ropes/chainsmeans (if any), etc. in kilograms;
Q is the rated load (mass) in kilograms;
q is the balance factor indicating the amount of counterbalance of the rated load by the
counterweight.
5.2.1.8.7 For hydraulic lifts, the floor of the pit shall be able to support beneath each jack the loads and
forces (in newtons) imposed to it.
5.2.1.8.8 For hydraulic lifts, the total vertical force imposed on the fixed stops during operation of the pawl
device can be evaluated approximately according to the following formulae:
a) Pawl devices provided with energy accumulation type buffers [see Formula (3)]:
⋅ ⋅+ ( ) =
3 n g PQ F n
(3)
b) Pawl devices provided with energy dissipation type buffers [see Formula (4)]:
⋅ ⋅+ ( ) =
2 n g PQ F n
(4)
where
F is the total vertical force in newtons on fixed stops imposed during operation of pawl device;
gn is the standard acceleration of free fall, [9,81 (m/s2)];
n is the number of pawl devices;
P is the mass of the empty car and components supported by the car, i.e. part of the travelling
cables, compensation means compensating ropes/chains (if any), etc. in kilograms;
Q is the rated load (mass) in kilograms.
Commented [IJ28]: See N17xxISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
24 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Surfaces of walls, floors and ceilings
Surfaces of walls, floors and ceilings of wells, machine and pulley rooms shall be in durable material not
favouring the creation of dust, e.g. concrete, brick or blockwork.
The surface of the floor where a person needs to work or to move between working areas shall be of non-slip
material.
NOTE 1 For guidance, see ISO 14122-2:2016, 4.2.4.6.
The floor of working areas shall be approximately level, except for any buffer and guide rail bases and water
drainage devices.
After the building-in of guide rail fixings, buffers, any grids, etc., the pit shall be impervious to infiltration of
water.
For hydraulic lifts, the space in which the power unit is situated and the pit shall be designed in such a way
that it is impervious, so that all the fluid contained in the machinery placed in these areas is retained if it
leaks out or escapes.
NOTE 2 National regulations can require the protection of hydraulic pipe routed through the building.
5.2.2 Access to well and to machinery spaces and pulley rooms
5.2.2.1 The well, machinery spaces and pulley rooms and the associated working areas shall be
accessible. Provisions shall be made to allow access to spaces other than the car interior only to authorized
persons. See also Annex D, Figure D.1.
5.2.2.2 The access way adjacent to any door/trap giving access to the well or to machinery spaces and
pulley rooms shall be lit by a permanently installed electric lighting with an intensity of at least 50 lux.
NOTE National regulations can require lighting level greater than 50 lux.
5.2.2.3 If access to the lift for maintenance and rescue purposes is via private premises, then permanent
access of authorized persons to the premises and relevant instructions shall be provided.
The manufacturer/installer should make the building designer/architect/owner aware of the agreement
regarding access, fire, entrapment and also problems of security associated with lifts serving directly into
private premises (see 0.4.2).
NOTE Access via private premises can be subject to national regulations.
5.2.2.4 A means to enter the pit shall be provided consisting of;
a) an access door where the pit depth exceeds 2,50 m;
b) either an access door or a ladder inside the well, easily accessible from the landing door, where the pit
depth is not exceeding 2,50 m.
c) a ladder according EN ISO 14122-4 and an access trap door according 5.2.3.and 5.2.4, where the access to the
bottom of the pit is only possible via a platform in the pit. Commented [IJ29]: See TFxxISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 25
Any pit access door shall comply with the requirements of 5.2.3.
Where a pit access door is greater than 500mm from the pit floor a ladder shall also be provided.
Ladders shall comply with Annex F.
Where there is a risk of the ladder in its deployed position colliding with moving elements of the lift, the
ladder shall be provided with an electric safety device(s) in accordance with 5.11.2 to prevent the lift from
operating if the ladder is not in its stored position.
If the ladder is stored on the pit floor, all pit refuge spaces shall be maintained when the ladder is in its stored
position.
5.2.2.5 A safe access for persons to machinery spaces and pulley rooms shall be provided. For
preference, this should be effected entirely by way of stairs. If it is not possible to install stairs, ladders
satisfying the following requirements shall be used:
a) the access to the machinery spaces and pulley rooms shall not be situated more than 4 m above the level
accessible by stairs. For access over 3 m in height by ladder, fall protection shall be provided;
b) ladders shall be fastened to the access permanently or at least by rope or chain in such a way that they
cannot be removed;
c) ladders exceeding 1,50 m in height shall, when in position for access, form an angle between 65° and 75°
to the horizontal and shall not be liable to slip or turn over;
d) the clear width of the ladder shall be at least 0,35 m, the depth of the steps shall not be less than 25 mm
and in the case of vertical ladders the distance between the steps and the wall behind the ladder shall
not be less than 0,15 m. The steps shall be designed for a load not less than 1 500 N;
e) adjacent to the top end of the ladder there shall be at least one hand hold within easy reach;
f) around a ladder, within a horizontal distance of 1,50 m, the risk of falling by more than the height of the
ladder shall be prevented.
NOTE National building regulations can require access only by stairs.
5.2.3 Access and emergency doors — Access trap doors — Inspection doors
5.2.3.1 When the distance between consecutive landing door sills exceeds 11 m, one of the following
conditions shall be fulfilled. There shall be:
a) intermediate emergency doors; or
b) adjacent cars each fitted with an emergency door, provision for which is made in 5.4.6.2.
Commented [IJ30]: Editorial revision by WG1 ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
26 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
NOTE "Consecutive" is understood as meaning two adjacent floors, with landing doors, regardless of open through
or open adjacent configurations.
5.2.3.2 Access and emergency doors, access trap doors and inspection doors shall have the following
dimensions:
a) access doors to machine rooms and access doors to the well shall have a minimum height of 2,0 m and a
minimum width of 0,60 m;
b) access doors to pulley rooms shall have a minimum height of 1,40 m and a minimum width of 0,60 m;
c) access trap doors for persons to machine and pulley rooms shall give a clear passage of at least
0,80 m × 0,80 m, and shall be counterbalanced;
d) emergency doors shall have a minimum height of 1,80 m and a minimum width of 0,50 m;
e) inspection doors shall have a maximum height of 0,50 m and a maximum width of 0,50 m and shall have
sufficient dimensions to carry out the required work through the door.
5.2.3.3 Access and emergency doors and inspection doors shall:
a) not open towards the inside of the well or machine or pulley room;
b) be provided with a key-operated lock, capable of being reclosed and relocked without a key;
c) be openable from inside the well, machine or pulley room without a key, even when locked;
d) be provided with an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2, checking the closed position;
An electric safety device is not required in the case of;
1) access door(s) to machine and pulley rooms, and
1)2) in the case of access door(s) to the pit (5.2.2.4), if the pit door(s) does not give access to a
hazardous zone. This is regarded to be the case if the free vertical distance between the lowest parts
of car, counterweight or balancing weight including guide shoes, apron, etc. during normal operation
and the bottom of the pit is at least 2 m.
The presence of travelling cables, compensation means compensating ropes/chains and their
equipment, tensioning pulleys for the overspeed governor and similar installations is not regarded as
being hazardous;
e) be imperforate , satisfy the same requirements for mechanical strength as the landing doors, and comply
with the regulations relevant to the fire protection for the building concerned;
f) have a mechanical strength such that when a force of 1 000 N, being evenly distributed over an area of
0,30 m × 0,30 m in round or square section, is applied at right angles at any point from outside the well,
it shall resist without elastic deformation greater than 15 mm.
Commented [IJ31]: China comment to assist in
translation
Commented [IJ32]: See N17xx
Commented [IJ33]: See N1537ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 27
g) 5.2.3.4 Access trap doors, when they are closed, shall be able to support 2 000 N on an area of
0,20 m × 0,20 m at any position.
h) Trap doors shall not open downwards. Hinges, if any, shall be of a type which cannot be unhooked.
i) Trap doors used only for access of material may be locked from the inside only.
When a trap door is in the open position, precautions shall be taken to prevent the fall of persons (e.g. a
guardrail) and prevent the trapdoor from closing such as to cause a crushing hazard (e.g. by
counterbalance).
NOTE National regulations can require a specific height for such protection from falls.
5.2.4 Notices
5.2.4.1 A notice bearing the following minimum inscription:
“Lift Machinery — Danger
Access forbidden to unauthorized persons”
shall be fixed to the outside of doors or trap-doors (excluding landing doors and doors of emergency and test
panels) giving access to machine and pulley rooms.
In the case of trap-doors, a permanently visible notice shall indicate to those using the trap-door:
“Danger of falling — Reclose the trap-door”
5.2.4.2 Outside of the well, near the access doors and emergency doors, if any, there shall be a notice
stating:
"Lift well — Danger
Access forbidden to unauthorized persons"
5.2.5 Well
General provisions
5.2.5.1.1 The well may contain one or more lift cars.
5.2.5.1.2 The counterweight or the balancing weight of a lift shall be in the same well as the car.
5.2.5.1.3 For hydraulic lifts jacks shall be in the same well as the car. They may extend into the ground or
other spaces.
Commented [IJ34]: China comment to correct
requirementsISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
28 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Well enclosure
5.2.5.2.1General
A lift shall be separated from the surroundings by:
a) walls, floor and ceiling; or
b) sufficient space.
5.2.5.2.2Totally enclosed well
5.2.5.2.2.1 The well shall be totally enclosed by imperforate walls, floor and ceiling.
The only permissible openings are:
a) openings for landing doors;
b) openings for access and emergency doors to the well and inspection doors;
c) vent openings for escape of gases and smoke in the event of fire;
d) ventilation openings;
e) necessary openings for the functioning of the lift between the well and the machine or pulley rooms.
5.2.5.2.2.2 Any horizontal projection from a wall into the well or horizontal beam greater than 0,15 m
width x 0,25 m in length x 1,20 m high;
Protection shall be such as:
a) the projection, where greater than 0,15 m, shall be chamfered to at least 45° to the horizontal; or
b) a deflector forming an inclined surface of minimum 45° to the horizontal, capable of resisting a force of
300 N applied at right angles to the deflector at any point, distributed evenly over a surface of 5 cm2 in
round or square section, such that it shall resist:
— without permanent deformation greater than 1mm ;
— without elastic deformation greater than 15 mm.
5.2.5.2.3Partially enclosed well
Where the well is required to be partially enclosed, e.g. observation lifts in connection with galleries or
atriums, tower buildings, etc., the following apply:
a) the height of the enclosure at places normally accessible to persons shall be sufficient to prevent such
persons from:
Commented [IJ35]: See N 1538
Commented [IJ36]: WG1 Comment
Commented [IJ37]: See N1537 & N 1538ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 29
1) being endangered by moving parts of the lift; and
2) interfering with the safe operation of the lift by reaching lift equipment within the well, either
directly or with hand-held objects;
b) the height is assumed to be sufficient if it is in conformity with Figures 1 and 2. i.e.:
1) minimum 3,50 m at a landing door side;
2) minimum 2,50 m at other sides and with a minimum horizontal distance of 0,50 m to moving parts
of the lift.
If the distance to moving parts exceeds 0,50 m, the value of 2,50 m can be reduced progressively to a
minimum height of 1,10 m in a distance of 2,0 m;
c) the enclosure shall be imperforate;
d) the enclosure shall be located within 0,15 m maximum of the edges of floors, stairs or platforms
(see Figure 1) or be protected in accordance with 5.2.5.2.2.2;
e) provisions shall be taken to prevent the interference with the operation of the lift by other equipment
[see 5.2.1.2.3 b) and 7.2.2 c)];
f) special precautions shall be taken for lifts exposed to weather (see 0.4.5), e.g. wall climbing lifts installed
against the exterior walls of a building.
Dimensions in millimetresISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
30 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Key
1 car
D distance to moving parts of the lift (see Figure 2)
He height of the enclosure
Figure 1 — Partially enclosed well
Dimensions in millimetresISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 31
Key
He height of the enclosure
D distance to moving parts of the lift
Figure 2 — Partially enclosed well — Distances
Construction of the walls of the well and landing doors facing a car entrance
5.2.5.3.1 The horizontal distance between the inner surface of the well and the sill, door frame of the car
or closing edge of car sliding doors shall not exceed 0,15 m, over the full height of the well (See Figure 3).
The distance given above:
a) may be extended to 0,20 m over a height not exceeding 0,50 m. There shall not be more than one of such
recesses in between two consecutive landing doors;
b) may be extended to 0,20 m throughout the travel on goods passenger lifts in which the landing doors are
vertically sliding;
c) is not limited if the car is provided with a mechanically locked door in accordance with 5.3.9.2, which
can only be opened in the unlocking zone of a landing door.
The operation of the lift shall automatically depend on the locking of the corresponding car door except in
the cases covered in 5.12.1.4 and 5.12.1.8. This locking shall be proved by an electric safety device in
conformity with 5.11.2.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
32 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Key
1 lift well wall
2 landing door leading panel
3 car door leading panel
Figure 3 — Clearances between car and wall facing the car entrance
5.2.5.3.2 Below each landing door sill, the wall of the well shall comply with the following requirements:
a) it shall form a vertical surface which is directly connected to the landing door sill, whose height is at least
half the unlocking zone plus 50 mm and whose width is at least the clear opening of the car access plus
25 mm on both sides;
b) this surface shall be continuous and be composed of smooth and hard elements, such as metal sheets,
and shall be capable of withstanding a force of 300 N applied at a right angle to the wall at any point,
being evenly distributed over an area of 5 cm2 in round or square section, it shall resist:
1) without permanent deformation greater than 1mm;
2) without elastic deformation greater than 15 mm;
c) any projections shall not exceed 5 mm. Projections exceeding 2 mm shall be chamfered at least 75° to
the horizontal. Furthermore, it shall be either:
Commented [IJ38]: See N1537ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 33
1) connected to the lintel of the next door; or
2) extended downwards using a hard smooth chamfer whose angle to the horizontal plane shall be at
least 60°. The projection to this chamfer on the horizontal plane shall not be less than 20 mm.
Protection of any spaces located below the well
If accessible spaces do exist below the well, the base of the pit shall be designed for an imposed load of at
least 5 000 N/m2, and the counterweight or the balancing weight shall be equipped with safety gear.
Protection in the well
5.2.5.5.1 The travelling area of the counterweight or the balancing weight shall be guarded by means of a
screen, which comply with the following:
a) if this screen is perforate, ISO 13857:2008, 4.2.4.1 shall be respected;
b) this screen shall extend from the lowest point of the counterweight resting on its fully compressed
buffer(s) or balancing weight in its lowest position to a minimum height of 2,0 m from the pit floor;
c) in no case shall it be more than 0,30 m from the pit floor to the lowest part of the screen. For buffers
travelling with the counterweight, see 5.8.1.1;
d) the width shall be at least equal to that of the counterweight or balancing weight;
e) if the gap between the counterweight/balancing weight guide rails and the well wall exceeds 0,30 m then
this area shall also be guarded in accordance with b) and c);
f) the screen may have slot(s) with the minimum width necessary to permit free passage of compensation
means or for the purpose of visual inspection;
g) the screen shall have sufficient rigidity to ensure that when a force of 300 N being evenly distributed
over an area of 5 cm2 in round or square section is applied at right angles at any point of the screen, it
shall not deflect to cause the counterweight or balancing weight to collide with it;
h) the car and its associated components shall be at a distance of at least 50 mm from the counterweight or
balancing weight (if there is one) and its associated components.
5.2.5.5.2 Where the well contains several lifts there shall be a partition between the moving parts of
different lifts.
If this partition is perforate, ISO 13857:2008, 4.2.4.1 shall be respected.
The partition shall have sufficient rigidity to ensure that when a force of 300 N being evenly distributed over
an area of 5 cm2 in round or square section, is applied at right angles at any point of the partition, it shall not
deflect to cause the moving parts to collide with it.
Commented [IJ39]: This is yet to be amended to
remove need for screen if buffers are more than 2.5m in
heightISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
34 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.2.5.5.2.1 This partition shall extend from within 0,30 m from the pit floor to a height of 2,50 m above
the floor of the lowest landing.
The width shall be sufficient as to prevent access from one pit to another.
Where the conditions of not giving access to a hazardous zone according to 5.2.3.3 d) are met, then such a
partition screen shall not be provided below the lowest point of travel of the car may be avoided.
5.2.5.5.2.2 The partition shall extend through the full height of the well if the horizontal distance
between the inner edge of any balustrade and a moving part (car, counterweight or balancing weight) of an
adjacent lift is less than 0,50 m.
This partition shall be at least the width of the moving part and extend a further 0,10 m on each side
throughout the height of the well.
Guided travel of car, counterweight and balancing weight
5.2.5.6.1Extreme position of car, counterweight and balancing weight
5.2.5.6.1.1 The extreme positions of car, counterweight and balancing weight according to Table 2 shall
be considered for requirements on guided travel according to 5.2.5.6, and refuge spaces and clearances
according to 5.2.5.7 and 5.2.5.8.
Table 2 — Extreme positions of car, counterweight and balancing weight
Position Traction drives Positive drives Hydraulic drives
Highest position of car
Counterweight on fully
compressed buffer
+0,035v2 a
Car on fully compressed
upper buffer
Ram in its ultimate
position achieved through
the means of ram stroke
limitation +0,035vm2
Lowest position of car Car on fully compressed
buffer
Car on fully compressed
lower buffer
Car on fully compressed
buffer
Highest position of
counterweight/balancing
weight
Car on fully compressed
buffer +0,035v2 Car on fully compressed
lower buffer
Car on fully compressed
buffer +0,035vd2
Lowest position of
counterweight/balancing
weight
Counterweight on fully
compressed buffer
Car on fully compressed
upper buffer
Ram in its ultimate
position achieved through
the means of ram stroke
limitation +0,035vm2
a 0,035v2 represents half the gravity stopping distance corresponding to 115 % of the rated speed:
⋅
⋅ =⋅
⋅
1 (1,15 )²
0,033 7 ²
2 2 n
v v
g
,
rounded to 0,035v2.
5.2.5.6.1.2 When for traction lifts the slowdown of the machine is monitored, in accordance with
5.12.1.3, the value of 0,035v2, in Table 2 may be reduced taking into account the speed at which the car or
counterweight comes into contact with the buffer (see 5.8.2.2.2).
Commented [IJ40]: See N1538ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 35
5.2.5.6.1.3 For traction lifts which are fitted with compensation means compensating ropes having a
tensioning pulley equipped with an anti-rebound device (braking or lock-down device), the value of 0,035v2
in Table 2 may be replaced by a figure value related to the possible travel of that pulley (depending on the
roping used) plus 1/500 of the travel of the car, with a minimum of 0,20 m to take account of the elasticity of
the ropes.
5.2.5.6.1.4 In the case of direct acting hydraulic lifts, the value of 0,035v2 mentioned in Table 2 need not
be taken into account.
5.2.5.6.2In the case of traction lifts
When the car or counterweight is at its highest position according to 5.2.5.6.1, its guide rail lengths shall be
such as would accommodate a further guided travel of at least 0,10 m.
5.2.5.6.3In the case of positive drive lifts
5.2.5.6.3.1 The guided travel of the car upwards from the top floor until it strikes the upper buffers shall
be at least 0,50 m. The car shall be guided to the limit of its buffer stroke.
5.2.5.6.3.2 When the balancing weight, if there is one, is at its highest position according to 5.2.5.6.1, its
guide rail lengths shall be such as would accommodate a further guided travel of at least 0,30 m.
5.2.5.6.4In the case of hydraulic lifts
5.2.5.6.4.1 When the car is at its highest position according to 5.2.5.6.1, its guide rail lengths shall be
such as would accommodate a further guided travel of at least 0,10 m.
5.2.5.6.4.2 When the balancing weight, if there is one, is at its highest position according to 5.2.5.6.1, its
guide rail lengths shall be such as would accommodate a further guided travel of at least 0,10 m.
5.2.5.6.4.3 With the balancing weight, if there is one, at its lowest position according to 5.2.5.6.1, its
guided length shall be such as would accommodate a further guided travel of at least 0,10 m.
Refuge spaces on car roof and clearances in headroom
5.2.5.7.1 When the car is at its highest position according to 5.2.5.6.1, at least one clear area where a refuge
space can be accommodated shall be provided on the car roof, selected from Table 3.
For type 2 refuge spaces, a reduction is allowed on one side at the lower edge where the refuge space touches
the car roof. A reduction of 0,10 m wide by 0,30 m high may be included in order to accommodate parts fixed
on the car roof (see Figure 4).
If more than one person is necessary on the car roof for carrying out inspection and maintenance work, an
additional refuge space shall be provided for each additional person.
In the case of more than one refuge space, they shall be of the same type and not interfering with each other.
Commented [IJ41]: See N17xx
Commented [IJ42]: WG1 editorial changeISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
36 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Dimensions in millimetres
Figure 4 — Maximum dimensions of a reduction in the refuge space
A sign on the car roof readable from the landings giving access to the car roof shall clearly indicate the
allowed number of persons and the type of posture (Table 3) considered for the refuge space(s)
accommodation.
Where a counterweight is used a sign shall be placed on or near the counterweight screen (see 5.2.5.5.1)
stating the maximum allowed clearances between the counterweight and the counterweight buffer when the
car is at its upmost landing level in order to maintain the car headroom dimensions.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 37
Table 3 — Dimensions of refuge spaces in headroom
Type Posture Pictogram
Horizontal dimensions
of the refuge space
m
Height
of the refuge space
m
1 Upright 0,40 × 0,50 2,00
2 Crouching 0,50 × 0,70 1,00
NOTE The overhead obstacle warning sign ISO 7010:2011, W020 is incorporated in these safety signs.
5.2.5.7.2 When the car is at its highest position according to 5.2.5.6.1, the clear distance between the
lowest parts of the ceiling of the well (including beams and parts situated under the ceiling) (see Figure 5)
and:
a) the highest pieces of equipment fixed on the roof, except for those covered in b) and c) below, shall be at
least 0,50 m in any vertical or inclined direction within the projection of the car;ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
38 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
b) the highest part of the guide shoes or rollers, of the suspension means rope terminations and of the
header or parts of vertically sliding doors, if any, shall be at least 0,10 m in any vertical direction within
a horizontal distance of 0,40 m within the projection of the car;
c) the highest part of the balustrade shall be at least:
1) 0,30 m within a horizontal distance of 0,40 m within the projection of the car and 0,10 m on the
outside of the balustrade;
2) 0,50 m in any inclined distance beyond 0,40 m within the projection of the car.
Key
l1 distance ≥0,50 m [5.2.5.7.2 a)]
l2 distance ≥0,50 m [5.2.5.7.2 a)]
l3 distance ≥0,50 m [5.2.5.7.2 c) 2)]
l4 distance ≥0,30 m [5.2.5.7.2 c) 1)]
l5 distance ≤0,40 m [5.2.5.7.2 c) 1)]
1 highest parts installed on the car roof
2 car
3 refuge space(s)
hr height of refuge spaces (Table 3)
Figure 5 — Minimum distances between parts fixed on car roof and lowest parts fixed to ceiling of
well
Commented [IJ43]: See N17xx
Commented [IJ44]: See N1537ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 39
5.2.5.7.3 Any single continuous area on the car roof, or on equipment on the car roof, with a minimum
clear area of 0,12 m2 and the minimum dimension of the smallest side being greater than 0,25 m, is
considered as a place where a person can stand. When the car is at its highest position according to 5.2.5.6.1,
the vertical clearance above any such area and the lowest parts of the ceiling of the well (including beams
and parts situated under the ceiling), shall be the height of the relevant refuge space(s) according to 5.2.5.7.1.
5.2.5.7.4 When the car is at its highest position according to 5.2.5.6.1. Tthe free vertical distance between
the lowest parts of the ceiling of the well and the highest parts of an upward travelling ram-head assembly
shall be at least 0,10 m.
Refuge spaces and clearances in the pit
5.2.5.8.1 When the car is at its lowest position according to 5.2.5.6.1, at least one clear area where a refuge
space can be accommodated shall be provided on the pit floor, selected from Table 4.
If more than one person is necessary in the pit to carry out inspection and maintenance work, an additional
refuge space shall be provided for each additional person.
Where due to restricted free floor area it is necessary to have the compensation means entering the refuge
space, it is allowed under the following conditions;
a) Where the compensation means comprises of several elements, only a single compensation element may
enter the refuge space,
b) This compensation means shall not enter the refuge space by more than 0,15m measured in the
horizontal direction.
c) The compensation means shall be able to be pushed away from the refuge space with a force not
exceeding 300N, at any position of the car,
d) The compensation means shall have a smooth surface and be free of snags.
e) A warning sign shall be placed in the pit, visible from the entrance to the well stating ;
“Attention – flexible component encroaches refuge space”
In the case of more than one refuge space, they shall be of the same type and not interfering with each other.
A sign in the pit readable from the entrance(s) shall clearly indicate the allowed number of persons and the
type of posture (Table 4) considered for the refuge spaces(s) accommodation.
Commented [IJ45]: Editorial Comment for consistency
with 5.2.5.8.1
Formatted: French (France)
Commented [IJ46]: See N1691
Formatted: French (France)ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
40 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Table 4 — Dimensions of refuge spaces in the pit
Type Posture Pictogram
Horizontal dimensions
of the refuge space
m
Height
of the refuge space
m
1 Upright 0,40 × 0,50 2,00
2 Crouching 0,50 × 0,70 1,00
3 Laying 0,70 × 1,00 0,50
NOTE The overhead obstacle warning sign ISO 7010:2011, W020 is incorporated in these safety signs.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 41
5.2.5.8.2 When the car is at the lowest position according to 5.2.5.6.1, the following conditions shall be
satisfied:
a) the free vertical distance between the bottom of the pit and the lowest parts of the car shall be at least
0,50 m. This distance may be reduced:
1) for any part of the apron or parts of the vertically sliding car door(s) to a minimum of 0,10 m within
a horizontal distance of 0,15 m to the adjacent wall(s);
2) for car frame parts, safety gears, guide shoes, pawl devices, within a maximum horizontal distance
from the guide rails according to Figures 6 and 7;
b) the free vertical distance between the highest parts fixed in the pit, for instance a tensioning device for
compensation means ropes being in its highest position, jack supports, pipes and other fittings, and the
lowest parts of the car, except for items detailed in 5.2.5.8.2 a) 1) and 2), shall be at least 0,30 m;
c) the free vertical distance between the bottom of the pit or the top of equipment installed there and the
lowest parts of the downwards-travelling ram-head assembly of an inverted jack shall be at least 0,50 m.
However, if it is impossible to gain involuntary access under the ram head assembly (e.g. by providing
screens in accordance with 5.2.5.5.1), this vertical distance may be reduced from 0,50 m to 0,10 m
minimum;
d) the free vertical distance between the bottom of the pit and the lowest guiding yoke of a telescopic jack
below the car of a direct acting lift shall be at least 0,50 m.
Key
IH horizontal distance around guide rail
Commented [IJ47]: See N17xxISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
42 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Figure 6 — Horizontal distance around guide rail
Key
IV minimum vertical distance
IH horizontal distance XH [m]
Figure 7 — Minimum vertical distances for car frame parts, safety gear, guide shoes and pawl
devices
5.2.6 Machinery spaces and pulley rooms
General provisions
The spaces and the associated working areas for maintenance/inspection work and emergency operation
shall be suitably protected against environmental influences. See 0.3.3, 0.4.2 and 0.4.5.
Notices and instructions
5.2.6.2.1 Notices shall be provided to permit easy identification and location of light switches and each
incoming and on-board power supply disconnection and isolation device (see 5.10.5).of the main switch(es)
and the light switch(es).
5.2.6.2.2 If, after release of a main switch, some parts remain live (interconnection between lifts, lighting,
etc.) notice (s) shall indicate this.
5.2.6.2.3 In the machine room (5.2.6.3), the machinery cabinet (5.2.6.5.1) or at the emergency and tests
panel(s) (5.2.6.6), there shall be detailed instructions [see 7.2.2 g), h) and i)] to be followed in the event of
lift breakdown, particularly concerning the use of the device for rescue operations and the emergency
unlocking key for landing doors.
Commented [IJ48]: See N1544ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 43
Machinery in a machine room
5.2.6.3.1Traction sheave in the well
The traction sheave may be installed in the well, provided that:
a) the examinations and the tests and the maintenance operations are able to be carried out from the
machine room;
b) the openings between the machine room and the well are as small as possible.
5.2.6.3.2Dimensions
5.2.6.3.2.1 The dimensions of machine rooms shall be sufficient to permit easy and safe working on
equipment.
A clear height of at least 2,10 m at working areas shall be provided, and:
a) a clear horizontal area in front of the control panels and cabinets. This area is defined as follows:
1) depth, measured from the external surface of the enclosures, at least 0,70 m;
2) width, the greater of the following values: 0,50 m or the full width of the cabinet or panel;
b) a clear horizontal area of at least 0,50 m × 0,60 m for maintenance and inspection of moving parts at
points where this is necessary and, if need be, manual emergency operation (5.9.2.3.1).
5.2.6.3.2.2 The clear height for movement shall not be less than 1,80 m.
The access ways to the clear spaces mentioned in 5.2.6.3.2.1 shall have a width of at least 0,50 m. This value
may be reduced to 0,40 m where there are no moving parts or hot surfaces, as defined in 5.10.1.1.6.
This clear height for movement is taken to the underside of the lowest striking point and measured from the
floor of the access area.
5.2.6.3.2.3 There shall be a clear vertical distance of at least 0,30 m above unprotected rotating parts of
the machine.
5.2.6.3.2.4 When the machine room floor comprises a number of levels differing by more than 0,50 m,
fixed ladders according to 5.2.2.5 or stairways and guardrails shall be provided.
5.2.6.3.2.5 When the floor of the machine rooms has any recesses with a depth of more than 0,05 m and
a width between 0,05 m and 0,50 m wide, or any ducts, they shall be covered. This applies only to areas where
a person may work or move between different working areas.
Recesses with a width of more than 0,50 m shall be considered as different levels, see 5.2.6.3.2.4.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
44 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.2.6.3.3Other openings
The dimension of holes in the slab and room floor shall be reduced to a minimum for their purpose.
With the aim of removing the danger of objects falling through openings situated above the well, including
those for electric cables, ferrules shall be used, which project at least 50 mm above the slab or finished floor.
Machinery inside the well
5.2.6.4.1General provisions
5.2.6.4.1.1 In the case of wells partially enclosed at the exterior of buildings, the machinery shall be
suitably protected against environmental influences.
5.2.6.4.1.2 The clear height for moving inside the well from one working area to another one shall not
be less than 1,80 m.
5.2.6.4.1.3 In the case of:
— a retractable platform (5.2.6.4.5) and/or movable stops [5.2.6.4.5.2 b)]; or
— manually operated mechanical device (5.2.6.4.3.1, 5.2.6.4.4.1),
a clear notice(s) giving all the necessary instructions for operation shall be affixed at an appropriate place(s)
in the well.
5.2.6.4.2Dimensions of working areas inside the well
5.2.6.4.2.1 The dimensions of working areas at the machinery shall be sufficient to permit easy and safe
working on equipment.
A clear height of at least 2,10 m at working areas shall be provided, and:
a) a clear horizontal space in front of the control panels and cabinets. This area is defined as follows:
1) depth, measured from the external surface of the enclosures, at least 0,70 m;
2) width, the greater of the following values: 0,50 m or the full width of the cabinet or panel;
b) a clear horizontal area of at least 0,50 m × 0,60 m for maintenance and inspection of parts at points
where this is necessary.
5.2.6.4.2.2 There shall be a clear vertical distance of at least 0,30 m above unprotected rotating parts of
the machine.
5.2.6.4.3Working areas in the car or on the car roof
5.2.6.4.3.1 Where maintenance/inspection work on the machinery is to be carried out from inside the
car or from the car roof, and if any kind of uncontrolled or unexpected car movement resulting from
maintenance/inspection can be dangerous to persons, the following applies:ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 45
a) any dangerous movement of the car shall be prevented by a mechanical device;
b) all movement of the car shall be prevented by means of an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2
unless the mechanical device is in its inactive position;
c) when this mechanical device is in its active position and cannot be disengaged due to forces exerted on
it; it shall be possible to leave the well:
1) via the landing door by a clear opening of at least 0,50 m × 0,70 m above the car door header/door
drive;
2) via the car by access through an emergency trap door in the car roof according to 5.4.6. Steps, ladder
and/or hand hold(s) shall be provided to allow a safe descent into the car; or
3) via an emergency door as described in 5.2.3.
Instructions regarding the escape procedure shall be given in the lift documentation.
5.2.6.4.3.2 The necessary devices for emergency operation and for dynamic tests shall be arranged so
that they can be carried out from outside of the well in accordance with 5.2.6.6.
5.2.6.4.3.3 If inspection doors are located in the walls of the car, they shall:
a) comply with 5.2.3.2 e);
b) in the case of inspection doors with a width of more than 0,30 m, be provided with a barrier to avoid
falling into the well;
c) not open towards the outside of the car;
d) be provided with a key-operated lock, capable of being reclosed and relocked without a key;
e) be provided with an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2, checking the locked position;
f) satisfy the same requirements as the walls of the car.
5.2.6.4.3.4 Where it is necessary to move the car from inside with an open inspection door, the following
applies:
a) an inspection control station according to 5.12.1.5 shall be available near the inspection door;
b) this inspection control station shall be accessible only to authorized persons, e.g. by placing it behind the
inspection door, and arranged so that it is not possible to use it to drive the car when standing on the car
roof;ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
46 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
c) if the smaller dimension of the opening exceeds 0,20 m the clear horizontal distance between the outside
edge of the opening in the car wall and equipment installed in the well in front of that opening shall be
at least 0,30 m.
5.2.6.4.4Working areas in the pit
5.2.6.4.4.1 Where machinery is to be maintained or inspected from the pit, and if any kind of
uncontrolled or unexpected car movement resulting from maintenance/inspection can be dangerous to
persons, the following applies:
a) a permanently installed device shall be provided to mechanically stop the car with any load up to rated
load and from any speed up to rated speed to create a free distance of at least 2 m between the floor of
the working area and the lowest parts of the car, excluding those mentioned in 5.2.5.8.2 a) 1) and 2). The
retardation of the car by mechanical devices other than safety gears shall not exceed that produced by
the buffers (see 5.8.2);
b) the mechanical device shall be able to maintain the car stopped;
c) the mechanical device can be operated manually or automatically;
d) the opening by the use of a key of any door providing access to the pit shall be checked by an electric
safety device according to 5.11.2, which prevents all further movement of the lift. Movement shall only
be possible under the requirements given in f) below;
e) all movement of the car shall be prevented by means of an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2
unless the mechanical device is in its inactive position;
f) when the mechanical device is in its active position as checked by means of an electric safety device in
conformity with 5.11.2, electrically driven movement of the car shall only be possible from the inspection
control station(s);
g) the return of the lift to normal operation shall only be made by operation of an electrical reset device
placed outside of the well and accessible to authorized persons only, e. g. inside a locked cabinet.
5.2.6.4.4.2 When the car is in the position according to 5.2.6.4.4.1 a), it shall be possible to leave the pit
either:
a) through a vertical gap from the landing door level to the lowest edge of the car apron of at least 0,50 m;
or
b) through an access door to the pit.
5.2.6.4.4.3 The necessary devices for emergency operation and for dynamic tests shall be arranged so
that they can be carried out from outside of the well in accordance with 5.2.6.6.
5.2.6.4.5Working areas on a platform
5.2.6.4.5.1 Where machinery is to be maintained or inspected from a platform, it shall be:ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 47
a) permanently installed; and
b) retractable if it is in the travel path of the car or counterweight/balancing weight.
5.2.6.4.5.2 Where machinery is to be maintained or inspected from a platform positioned into the travel
path of the car, the counterweight or the balancing weight:
a) the car shall be stationary by using a mechanical device in conformity with 5.2.6.4.3.1 a) and b); or
b) where the car needs to be moved, the travel path of the car shall be limited by movable stops, with any
load up to rated load and from any speed up to rated speed, in such a way that the car is stopped:
1) at least 2 m above the platform if the car, the counterweight or the balancing weight runs down with
rated speed towards the platform;
2) below the platform in compliance with 5.2.5.7.2, if the car , the counterweight or the balancing
weight runs up with rated speed towards the platform.
5.2.6.4.5.3 The platform shall be:
a) able to support at any position the mass of two persons, each counting for 1 000 N over an area of
0,20 m × 0,20 m without permanent deformation. If the platform is intended to be used for handling
heavy equipment, the dimensions shall be considered accordingly, and the platform shall have a
mechanical strength to withstand the loads and forces to which it is intended to be subjected (see
5.2.1.7). The maximum permissible load shall be indicated on the platform;
b) provided with a balustrade in conformity with 5.4.7.4;
c) equipped with means ensuring that:
1) the step rise between the floor of the platform and the level of the access does not exceed 0,50 m;
2) it shall not be possible to pass a ball with a diameter of 0,15 m through any gap between the platform
and the sill of the access door.
5.2.6.4.5.4 In addition to 5.2.6.4.5.3, any retractable platform shall be provided with:
a) an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2, checking the fully retracted position;
b) means for putting it into or removing it from the working position. This operation shall be possible from
the pit or by means located outside of the well and accessible only to authorized persons. The manual
effort for operation of the platform shall not exceed 250 N;
c) if the access to the platform is not through a landing door, the opening of the access door shall be
impossible when the platform is not in the working position, or alternatively, means shall be provided
to prevent persons from falling into the well.
Commented [IJ49]: Editorial comment for consistency
Commented [IJ50]: Editorial comment for consistency
Commented [IJ51]: Editorial comment for consistency
Commented [IJ52]: N1537ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
48 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.2.6.4.5.5 In the case of 5.2.6.4.5.2 b), movable stops shall be automatically operated when the platform
is lowered. They shall be provided with:
a) buffers in conformity with 5.8;
b) an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2, which only allows car movement if the stops are in
their fully retracted position;
c) an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2, which only allows car movement with a lowered
platform if the stops are in their fully extended position.
5.2.6.4.5.6 Where it is necessary to move the car from the platform, an inspection control station
according to 5.12.1.5 shall be available for use on the platform.
When the movable stop(s) is(are) in its active position, electrically driven movement of the car shall only be
possible from the inspection control station(s).
5.2.6.4.5.7 The necessary devices for emergency operation and dynamic tests shall be arranged so that
they can be carried out from outside of the well in conformity with 5.2.6.6.
5.2.6.4.5.8 The maximum permissible load shall be indicated on the platform.
5.2.6.4.6Working areas outside of the well
When the machinery is in the well and is intended to be maintained/inspected from outside of the well, the
working areas in accordance with 5.2.6.3.2.1 and 5.2.6.3.2.2 may be provided outside of the well. Access to
this equipment shall only be possible by an inspection door in conformity with 5.2.3.
Machinery outside of the well
5.2.6.5.1Machinery cabinet
5.2.6.5.1.1 The machinery of a lift shall be located inside a cabinet which shall not be used for purposes
other than the lift. It shall not contain ducts, cables or devices other than for the lift.
5.2.6.5.1.2 The machinery cabinet shall consist of imperforate walls, floor, roof and door(s).
The only permissible openings are:
a) ventilation openings;
b) necessary openings for the functioning of the lift between the well and the machinery cabinet;
c) vent openings for escape of gases and smoke in the event of fire.
These openings when accessible to non-authorized persons shall comply with the following requirements:
— protection according to ISO 13857:2008, Table 5 against contact with danger zones; and
— degree of protection of at least IP2XD to IEC 60529 against contact with electrical equipment.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 49
5.2.6.5.1.3 The door(s) shall:
a) have sufficient dimensions to carry out the required work through the open door;
b) not open towards the inside of the cabinet;
c) be provided with a key-operated lock, capable of being reclosed and relocked without a key.
5.2.6.5.2Working area
The working area in front of a machinery cabinet shall comply with the requirements according to 5.2.6.4.2.
Devices for emergency and test operations
5.2.6.6.1 In the case of 5.2.6.4.3, 5.2.6.4.4 and 5.2.6.4.5, the necessary devices for emergency and test
operations shall be provided on a panel(s) suitable for carrying out from outside of the well all emergency
operations and dynamic tests of the lift such as tests of traction, safety gear, buffer, ascending car overspeed
protection means, unintended car movement protection, rupture valve, restrictor, pawl device, cushioned
stop and pressure. The panel(s) shall be accessible to authorized persons only.
If the emergency and test devices are not protected inside a machinery cabinet, they shall be enclosed with
a suitable cover, which:
a) does not open towards the inside of the well;
b) is provided with a key-operated lock, capable of being reclosed and relocked without a key.
5.2.6.6.2 The panel(s) shall provide the following:
a) emergency operation devices according to 5.9.2.2.2.7 and 5.9.2.3 or 5.9.3.9, together with an intercom
system in conformity with 5.12.3.2;
b) control equipment which enables dynamic tests to be carried out;
c) direct observation of the lift machine or display device(s), which gives indication of:
— the direction of movements of the car;
— the reaching of an unlocking zone; and
— the speed of the car.
5.2.6.6.3 The devices on the panel(s) shall be lit by a permanently installed electric lighting with an
intensity of at least 200 lux measured at the device.
A switch placed on, or close to, the panel shall control lighting of the panel(s).ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
50 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
The electrical supply for this lighting shall be in conformity with 5.10.7.1.
5.2.6.6.4 There shall be working areas according to 5.2.6.3.2.1 in front of emergency and test panels.
Construction and equipment of pulley rooms
5.2.6.7.1Dimensions
5.2.6.7.1.1 Pulley room dimensions shall be sufficient to provide easy and safe access for authorized
persons to all the equipment.
In particular:
a) the clear height for movement shall not be less than 1,50 m.
This clear height for movement is taken to the underside of the lowest striking point and measured from
the floor of the access area;
b) a clear horizontal area shall be provided, of at least 0,50 m × 0,60 m, for maintenance and inspection of
moving parts at points where it is necessary.
The access ways to these areas shall have a width of at least 0,50 m. This value may be reduced to 0,40 m
where there are no moving parts or hot surfaces, as defined in 5.10.1.1.6.
5.2.6.7.1.2 There shall be a clear vertical distance of at least 0,30 m high above unprotected pulleys.
5.2.6.7.2Openings
The dimensions of holes in the slab and pulley room floor shall be reduced to a minimum for their purpose.
With the aim of removing the danger of objects falling through openings situated over the well, including
those for electric cables, ferrules shall be used which project at least 50 mm above the slab or finished floor.
5.2.7 Platform in the pit
Where a platform is provided in the pit, in order to maintain equipment placed in the pit and on the underside
of the car, the following shall be applied:
a) Where possible, the platform shall be designed and located to enable persons to work in an ergonomic
position between 0,50 m and 1,70 m above the surface of the working platform without increasing the
risk of falling (see EN ISO 14122 2:2016 4.2.1).
b) The clear vertical height between the bottom of the pit and the lowest parts of the platform shall be at
least: 1.00 m, when testing and maintenance work; have to be executed, or 0.50 m, if no inspection and
maintenance work is required.
c) Refuge space(s) type 1 or type 2 according 5.2.5.8.1 shall be available on the platform
d) Clearances between the platform and the car shall comply with 5.2.5.8.2.
Commented [IJ53]: See TFxxISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 51
e) The horizontal perpendicular distance between the platform and the shaft walls or components of the
lift shall not exceed 0.30 m. In the area of an access door, the distance shall not exceed 0.15 m.
f) Where the horizontal distance between the shaft walls or components of the lift and the platform exceeds
0,05 m, the platform shall be provided with a toe board of a height of 0,10 m.
g) The dimensions of openings in the platform, e.g. for rails, buffers, electrical lines, etc., shall be as small as
possible according to their purpose and provided with at least 0.05 m high ferrules, if they are not
already protected by a toe board.
h) No loads of elevator components shall act on the platform, e.g. of rails, of the tensioning weight of the
overspeed governor, of the compensation means tensioning device, of the hydraulic jack etc.
i) The minimum loads to be taken into account are as follows: (see ISO 14122 2:2016 4.2.5)
— 2,0 kN/m2 uniformly distributed load to account for the structure;
— 1,5 kN concentrated load applied in the most unfavourable position over an area of 0,20 m x 0,20
mof the platform.
j) The maximum permissible load shall be indicated on the platform.
k) The pit platform shall be designed as follows:
— slip resistant;
— permeable to liquids and dust;
— plane surface
From the open lowermost shaft door, the shaft bottom shall be visible through the platform.
l) The travelling area of the counterweight or balancing weight shall be protected as specified in 5.2.5.5.1.
m) The means to access the platform shall comply with 5.2.2.4 or n).
n) Where the platform is accessible by an access trap door with a fixed ladder from the bottom of the pit:
— The access trap door shall comply with 5.2.3 and 5.2.4
— The ladder shall comply with EN ISO 14122-4.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
52 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.3 Landing doors and car doors
5.3.1 General provisions
5.3.1.1 The openings in the well giving normal access to the car shall be provided with landing doors and
the access to the car shall be through a car door.
5.3.1.2 The doors shall be imperforate.
5.3.1.3 When closed, the landing and car doors shall, apart from the necessary clearances, completely
close the landing and car entrances.
5.3.1.4 When closed, the clearance between door panels, or between panels and uprights, lintels or sills,
shall not exceed 6 mm. This value, due to wear, may reach 10 mm, with the exception of doors made from
glass [see 5.3.6.2.2.1 i) 3]. These clearances are measured at the back of recesses, if present.
5.3.1.5 In the case of hinged car doors, they shall strike stops to prevent them swinging outside the car.
5.3.1.6 In the case of hinged landing doors, they shall strike stops to prevent them swinging inside the
well.
5.3.1.7 In the case of vertically sliding doors:
a) They shall be provided with means to stop the closing panel(s) when the distance between the closing
rigid members of the panel is not less than 20 mm and not more than 50 mm.
b) A non-shearing, and non-crushing member of either the meeting or overlapping type shall be provided
on the leading edge of the panel to close the distance between the rigid door sections when in contact
with the stops. This member shall allow a minimum compressible clearance of 20 mm.
c) Rigid members that overlap the meeting edge within the opening width are prohibited.
5.3.2 Height and width of entrances
Height
Landing doors and car doors shall be such that a minimum clear height of the entrance is 2 m.
Width
The clear entrance of the landing doors shall not extend more than 50 mm in width beyond the clear car
entrance on both sides.
5.3.3 Sills, guides, door suspension
Sills
Every landing and car entrance shall incorporate a sill of sufficient strength (see 5.7.2.3.6) to withstand the
passage of loads being introduced into the car.
Commented [IJ54]: See N1564
Commented [IJ55]: See N1564ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 53
NOTE A slight counter slope provided in front of each landing sill helps to avoid water from washing, sprinklers,
etc., draining into the well.
Guides
5.3.3.2.1 Landing and car doors shall be designed to prevent, during normal operation, derailment,
mechanical jamming, or displacement.
5.3.3.2.2 Horizontally sliding landing and car doors shall be guided top and bottom.
5.3.3.2.3 Vertically sliding landing and car doors shall be guided at both sides.
Suspension of vertically sliding doors
5.3.3.3.1 Panels of vertically sliding landing and car doors shall be fixed to two independent suspension
elements.
The failure of one suspension element shall by design not permit a panel to fall or means shall be provided
to prevent the panel from falling if one suspension element fails.
In the event of a failure of at least one suspension element the door shall not operate further.
5.3.3.3.2 Suspension ropes, chains, belts shall be designed with a safety factor of at least 8.
5.3.3.3.3 The pitch diameter of suspension rope pulleys shall be at least 25 20 times the rope diameter.
5.3.3.3.4 Suspension ropes and chains shall be guarded against leaving the pulley grooves or sprockets.
5.3.3.3.5 Vertically sliding panels shall be so counterweighted or counterbalanced, that they will not open
or close by gravity.
Fastenings shall be provided to prevent the fall of a counterweight, and the detachment or dislodgment of
counterweight parts or of balancing weights.
Counterweights shall be fixed securely to the supporting system. Where more than one suspension means is
fastened to one counterweight they shall be individually fixed to the counterweight. Counterweights shall
not be fixed using clamping screws only. The method of fixing shall ensure that accidental displacement is
prevented.
5.3.4 Horizontal door clearances
5.3.4.1 The horizontal distance between the sill of the car and sill of the landing doors shall not exceed
35 mm (see Figure 3).
5.3.4.2 The horizontal distance giving access to the well;
Commented [IJ56]: See N1564
Commented [IJ57]: See N1564
Commented [IJ58]: See N1564ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
54 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
a) between the leading edges of the car door and the landing doors during the whole of their normal
operation,
b) between the door jambs at the closing side of side opening doors,
c) between the door jambs of vertical sliding doors up to a height of 2,50 m,
shall not exceed 0,12 m (see Figure 3).
Where additional building doors are added in front of the landing door, the trapping of persons in the space
between should be avoided (see also 5.2.2.1 and 5.2.2.3).
5.3.4.3 In the case of;
a) the combination of:
— a hinged landing door and a folding car door (see Figure 8);
— a hinged landing door and a horizontal sliding car door (see Figure 9);
— horizontal sliding car and landing doors, which are not mechanically coupled (see Figure 10);
it shall not be possible to place a ball with a diameter of 0,15 m according to Figure 8, Figure 9 or
Figure 10 respectively in any gap between the closed doors.
b) the combination of:
— a hinged landing door and a vertical sliding car door (see Figure 11);
it shall not be possible to place a ball with a diameter of 0,15 m according to Figure 11 between the
closed landing door and leading panel(s) of the car door.
The top edge of the fast panel and the inner lower edge of the following panel shall be chamfered to at
least 45° to the horizontal (see figure 13).
c) the combination of:
— a vertical sliding landing door and a vertical sliding car door, which are not mechanically coupled
(see Figure 12);
it shall not be possible to place a ball with a diameter of 0,15 m according to figure 12 in any gap between
the leading edge of the fast panel of one door and the leading panel of the opposite door.
The top edge of the fast panel and the inner lower edge of the following panel of landing and car door
shall be chamfered to at least 45° to the horizontal (see figure 13).
Dimensions in millimetres
Commented [IJ59]: See N1564
Commented [IJ60]: ISO editors have deleted “Note”
Commented [IJ61]: See N1564
Commented [IJ62]: See N1564ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 55
Figure 8 — Hinged landing door and folding car door
Dimensions in millimetres
Figure 9 — Hinged landing door and horizontal sliding car door
Dimensions in millimetresISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
56 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Figure 10 — Horizontal sliding car and landing doors, not mechanically coupled
NOTE Figure 10 is also applicable for the “car door closed and landing door open” situation.
Figure 11- Hinged landing door and vertical sliding car doorISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 57
Figure 12- vertical sliding landing door and vertical sliding car door, not mechanically coupled
Figure 13- chamfers on vertically sliding car doorISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
58 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.3.5 Strength of landings and car doors
General
Components shall be made of material that maintains the strength property over their intended lifetime
under the environmental conditions.
Behaviour under fire conditions
Landing doors shall comply with the regulations relevant to the fire protection for the building concerned.
EN 81-58 or ISO 3008-2 shall be applied for the testing and certification of such doors.
Mechanical strength
5.3.5.3.1 Complete landing doors, with their locks, and car doors shall have a mechanical strength such
that in the locked position of landing doors and closed position of car doors:
a) when a static force of 300 N, being evenly distributed over an area of 5 cm2 in round or square section,
is applied at right angles to the panel/frame at any point on either face, they shall resist without:
1) permanent deformation greater than 1 mm;
2) elastic deformation greater than 15 mm;
After such a test, the safety function of the door shall not be affected.
b) when a static force of 1 000 N, being evenly distributed over an area of 100 cm2 in round or square
section, is applied at right angles at any point of the panel or frame from the landing side for landing
doors, or from the inside of the car for car doors, they shall resist without significant permanent
deformation affecting functionality and safety [see 5.3.1.4 (maximum clearance 10 mm) and 5.3.9.1].
For glass doors, see 5.3.6.2.2.1 i) 3).
NOTE For a) and b), the probe surface used to apply the test forces can be of soft material to avoid damage to the
door coating.
5.3.5.3.2 Horizontal sliding doors and folding doors on the landing and car doors shall be provided with
devices for retaining the door panel(s) in position should the guiding element fixed to the door panel fail. All
door panels with these devices installed in their complete door assembly shall withstand a pendulum shock
test as specified in 5.3.5.3.4 a) at striking points according to Table 5a and Figure 11 14 under the worst
possible failure conditions of the normal guiding elements.
Retainer should be understood as a mechanical means preventing the door panels from leaving their guides
which may be either an additional component or part of the panel/hanger.
The test shall be performed with the door panel in the normal operational position. The means simulating
the normal guiding elements keeping this position shall not give any horizontal support during the test.
Commented [IJ63]: See N1537
Commented [IJ64]: See N1564ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 59
5.3.5.3.3 Under the application of a manual force of 150 N in the direction of the opening of the leading
landing door panel(s) of horizontally sliding doors and folding doors, at the most unfavourable point, the
clearances defined in 5.3.1 may exceed 6 mm, but they shall not exceed:
a) 30 mm for side opening doors;
b) 45 mm in total for centre opening doors.
5.3.5.3.4 In addition, for:
— landing doors with glass panels;
— car doors with glass panels, and;
— side frames of landing doors that are wider than 150 mm;
the following shall be fulfilled (see Figure 1114):
Where additional panels to the side of the door frame are used to enclose the well, they should be considered
as side frames.
a) when an impact energy equivalent to a falling height of 800 mm of the soft pendulum shock device
(ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.14) is striking the middle of;
— the glass panel(s) in doors, or
— side frames, or
— glass panel(s) in the side frames
in the middle of the panel or frame width, at striking points according to Table 5a, from the landing side or
from the inside of the car, the following shall be satisfied:
1) they may have permanent deformation;
2) there shall be no loss of integrity of the door assembly. The door assembly shall remain in place with
no gaps greater than 0,12 m into the well;
3) after the pendulum test, the doors do not need to be able to operate;
4) for glass elements, there shall be no cracks;
b) when an impact energy equivalent to a falling height of 500 mm of the hard pendulum shock device
(ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.14) is applied on glass doors or glass panels bigger than stated in 5.3.7.2.1 a),
striking in the middle of;
— the glass door, or
Formatted: Bulleted + Level: 1 + Aligned at: 0.63 cm +
Indent at: 1.27 cm
Commented [IJ65]: China comment to assist in
translationISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
60 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
— glass panels in doors, or
glass panels in side frames
the door panels or glass panels in frames at striking points from the landing side or from the inside of the car
according to Table 5, there shall be:
1) no cracks;
2) no damage on the surface of the glass except chips of 2 mm maximum in diameter.
NOTE In the case of multiple glass panels, the weakest configuration of the panels can be taken into account.
Table 5a — Striking points
Pendulum shock test Soft pendulum Hard pendulum
Dropping height 800 mm 800 mm 500 mm 500 mm
Striking point height 1,0 m ± 0,10 m Centre of glass 1,0 m ± 0,10 m Centre of glass
Door panel or frame > 150 mm
without glass panel
(Figure 14 a and 14q)
X
Door panel or frame > 150 mm
with small glass panel
Figure 14 b)
X X X
Door panel or frame > 150 mm
with more than one glass panel
Figure 14 c)
Tests on whichever glass panel
represent the worst case
X X X
Door panel or frame > 150 mm
with big glass panel or full glass
Figure 14 d)
X
(Impact on
glass)
X
(Impact on
glass)
Door with glass panel starting
panel or frame > 150 mm or
ending at about 1 m height
Figure 14 e)
X X X
Door with glass panel starting or
ending at about 1 m height
Figure 14 f)
X
(Impact on
glass)
X
(Impact on
glass)
Side frames >150 mm
Figure 11 g) X
Door with vision panel
(5.3.7.2) X X
Commented [IJ66]: China comment to assist in
translation
See also N1546
Commented [IJ67]: Comment by China to aid
translationISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 61ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
62 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Table 5 b) Vertical sliding doors striking points
Pendulum
shock test Soft pendulum Hard
pendulum
Dropping
height 800 mm 500 mm
Striking point
position
1,0 ± 0,10
m height /
centre of
the panel
width
1,0 ± 0,10
m height /
1 m from
one side
Centre of
the lower
panel(s)
Centre of
the lower
panel(s)
height / 1m
from one
side
Centre of
glass if
present
Centre of
glass
1panel below
1 m < 2,4m
width
x x x
1 panel below
1 m >= 2,4m
width
x x x x
> 1 panel
below 1 m, <
2,4m width
x x x x
> 1 panel
below 1 m, >=
2,4m width
x x x x x x
Side frames >
150 mm
(Figure 14 g)
x
Additionally,
any panel
with vision
panel
(5.3.7.2)
x
Dimensions in millimetres
Commented [IJ68]: See N1564ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 63
a) Door panel
without glass panel
b) Door panel
with glass panel
c) Door panel with
more than one glass panel
d) Door panel with
glass panel or full glass
e) Door panel with
glass panel above 1,0 m
f) Door panel with
glass panel above 1,0 m
g) Complete landing door with door panels and side frames
[example according to a) and b)]
NOTE 1 Figures 14 e) and f) are alternative solutions.
NOTE 2 For striking points defined by 1 m, the tolerance is ±0,10 m.
KeyISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
64 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
striking point for soft pendulum shock test
striking point for hard pendulum shock test
Figure 14 — Door panels — Pendulum shock tests — Striking points
The worst case shall be tested. If it is not possible to determine the worst case, both or all variants shall be
tested.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 65
Key
• striking point for soft pendulum shock test
○ striking point for hard pendulum shock testISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
66 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Figure 15 — Vertical door panels - Pendulum shock tests - Striking points
5.3.5.3.5 Doors/frames with glass shall use laminated glass.
5.3.5.3.6 The fixing of the glass in doors shall ensure that the glass cannot slip out of the fixings, even when
sinking.
5.3.5.3.7 The glass panels shall have markings giving the following information:
a) name of the supplier and trade mark;
b) type of glass;
c) thickness (e.g. 8/8/0,76 mm).
5.3.5.3.8 Vertical sliding landing and car doors shall be provided with devices for retaining the door
panel(s) in position should the guiding element fixed to the door panel fail.
Vertical sliding doors with these devices installed in their complete door assembly shall withstand a
pendulum shock test as specified in 5.3.5.3.4 ax) at striking points according to Table 5b and Figure 15 under
the worst possible failure condition of the normal guiding elements.
Retainer should be understood as a mechanical means preventing the door panels from leaving their guides
which may be either an additional component or part of the panel/hanger/guiding elements.
The test shall be performed with the door panel in the normal operational position. The means simulating
the normal guiding elements keeping this position shall not give any horizontal support during the test.
5.3.5.3.9 When the door is closing and;
a) If there is an obstacle of 30 mm diameter is placed at any position between the sill and the fast panel of a
slide up to open vertical sliding door, or
b) If there is an obstacle of 45mm diameter is placed at any position between the leading edges of the panels
of a bi-parting vertical sliding door,
the door shall not lock. (see also 5.3.5.3.3)
5.3.6 Protection in relation to door operation
General
The doors and their surrounds shall be designed in such a way as to minimize risk of damage or injury due
to jamming of a part of a person, clothing or other object.
Formatted: Highlight
Commented [IJ69]: See N1564
Commented [IJ70]: See N1640
Commented [IJ71]: See N1640ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 67
To avoid the risk of shearing during operation, the face of automatic power-operated sliding doors, from the
landing and from inside the car shall not have recesses or projections exceeding 3 mm. The edges of these
shall be chamfered in the opening direction of movement.
Exception to these requirements is also made for the access to the unlocking triangle defined in 5.3.9.3.
Power-operated doors
5.3.6.2.1General
In the case of a combination of hinged landing door manually or power operated and power operated car
door, the following applies:
a) The car door shall move only when the landing door is closed and shall fully reopen if the landing door is
opened;
b) The landing door shall be locked when the car door has moved 50 mm from the full open position;
c) The landing door shall remain locked until the car door is within 50 mm of the fully open position.
Note: crossing the entrance is impossible with a locked landing door, see 5.3.6.2.2.1 and 5.3.6.2.3.3 a) 4).
In the case of coupled car and landing doors operated simultaneously, the following requirements are valid
for the joint door mechanism.
5.3.6.2.2Horizontally sliding doors
5.3.6.2.2.1 Automatic power-operated doors
The following applies:
a) the kinetic energy of the landing and/or car door and the mechanical elements which are rigidly
connected to it, calculated or measured at the average closing speed shall not exceed 10 J.
The average closing speed of a sliding door is calculated over its whole travel, less:
1) 25 mm at each end of the travel in the case of centrally closing doors;
2) 50 mm at each end of the travel in the case of side closing doors;
b) a protective device shall automatically initiate re-opening of the door(s) in the event of a person crossing
the entrance during the closing movement. The protective device may be rendered inoperative in the
last 20 mm of door closing gap;
1) the protective device (e.g. light curtain) shall cover the protected zone opening over the distance
between at least 25 mm and 1 600 mm above the car door sill;
2) the protective device shall be capable of detecting obstacles with a minimum diameter of 50 mm;
Commented [IJ72]: See N1564
Commented [IJ73]: See N1640ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
68 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
3) to counteract persistent obstructions when closing the door, the protective device may be de
activated after a predetermined time;
4) in case of failure, or deactivation of the protective device, the kinetic energy of the doors shall be
limited to 4 J, if the lift is kept in operation, and an acoustic signal shall operate at any time the
door(s) is (are) closing.
NOTE The protective device of the car door and the landing doors can be the same.
c) the effort needed to prevent the door from closing shall not exceed 150 N, excluding the first third of the
travel of the door;
d) the prevention of the door closing shall initiate a re-opening of the door;
Re-opening does not imply that the door shall open fully, but some reopening shall occur to allow an
obstacle to be removed.
e) the effort needed to prevent a folding door from opening shall not exceed 150 N. This measurement shall
be made with the door collapsed such that the adjacent outer edges of the folded panels or equivalent,
e.g. door frame, are at a distance of 100 mm;
f) if a folding car door is going into a recess, the distance between any outer edge of the door fold and the
recess shall be at least 15 mm;
g) if labyrinths or chicanes are used (for e.g. limitation of fire transmission) on the front edges of leading
door panels, or on the combination of leading door edge and fixed jamb, recesses and protrusions shall
not exceed 25 mm;
In the case of glass doors, the thickness of the front edge of the leading panel(s) shall not be less than
20 mm. The edges of the glass shall be ground in order not to cause injury.
h) doors made from glass, with the exception of vision panels to 5.3.7.2.1 a), shall be provided with means
to limit the opening force to 150 N and to stop the door and remove power to the door motor in the event
of an obstruction.
After a period of time e.g. 30 seconds, the door motor may be re-energized to open or close the door. If the 150N
force limitation is still in place then the door shall be stopped again
i) to avoid dragging of children hands, automatic power-operated horizontally sliding doors made of glass
of dimensions greater than stated in 5.3.7.2 shall be provided with means to minimize the risk, by:
1) making the glass opaque on the side exposed to the user by the use of either frosted glass or the
application of frosted material to a height of minimum 1,10 m, or
2) sensing the presence of fingers at least up to 1,60 m above sill and stopping the door movement in
opening direction, or
Commented [IJ74]: See N1640
Commented [IJ75]: See N1538 & N1640ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 69
3) limiting the gap between door panels and frame to maximum 4 mm, at least up to a minimum of
1,60 m above sill. This value due to wear may reach 5 mm.
Recesses (framed glass, etc.) shall not exceed 1 mm and shall be included in the 4 mm gap. The maximum
radius on the outer edge of the frame adjacent to the door panel shall not be more than 4 mm.
5.3.6.2.2.2 Non-automatic power-operated doors
When the closing of the door is carried out under the continuous control and supervision of the user, by
continuous pressure on a button or similar (hold-to-run control), the average closing speed of the fastest
panel shall be limited to 0,30 m/s, when the kinetic energy, calculated or measured as stated in 5.3.6.2.2.1 a),
exceeds 10 J.
5.3.6.2.3 Vertically sliding doors
5.3.6.2.3.1 General
The following applies:
a) The combination of vertical sliding car door and vertical sliding landing door shall only be used for
goods passenger lifts.
b) The door closing speed for vertical slide up to open landing doors or each panel of abi-parting landing
door shall be no more than 0.3 m/s and the average closing speed for a vertical slide up to open car
door shall be no more than 0.6 m/s.
c) A visual and audible warning starting at least 2 s prior to door closing, visible and audible from the car
and landing shall be used during closing movement.
The sound level shall be adjustable between 45 dB(A) and 65 dB(A), or might be fixed to 80 dB(A) for
industrial environments. (see 0.4.2).
The sound level shall be measured in 1 m height at 1 m distance from the centre of the door at car and
landing side with the door fully open.
Where the combination of hinged landing door and vertical sliding car door is used, the warning may be
visible and audible only in the car.
d) A roller shutter door and a bi-parting landing door is considered as vertical sliding door.
e) Assistance to passengers in the car shall always come from outside, being provided in particular by the
emergency operation mentioned in 5.9.2.3 and 5.9.3.9.
5.3.6.2.3.2 Automatic power operated vertically sliding doors
One of the following applies:
a) For:
Commented [IJ76]: See N1564ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
70 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
— landing and car door in parallel operation
— for the car door in case of sequence operation according 5.3.6.2.3.4
— for the car door in combination with a hinged landing door
1) the kinetic energy of the landing and/or car door and the mechanical elements which are rigidly
connected to it, calculated or measured at the average closing speed shall not exceed 10 J.
The average closing speed of a sliding door is calculated over its whole travel, less:
i) 25 mm at each end of the travel in the case of bi-parting doors;
ii) 50 mm at each end of the travel in the case of slide up to open doors;
2) the effort needed to prevent the door closing shall not exceed 150 N from the floor up to a height of
1,90 m and for doors exceeding a height of 2,2 m excluding the first 300 mm of the full height of the
door;
The 150 N shall be measured between the main closing edge and the opposing edge (floor) at the
following points of the main closing edge (see Figure 16):
i) at a distance of 200 mm from each lateral border of the horizontal clear distance of the door opening
and; at the centre of the clear opening.
Dimensions in millimetres
Figure 16 — Points of measuring at the leaf of a lifting door
ii) and at the opening gaps of:
• 50 mm;
• 300 mm;ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 71
• and 1 900 mm, or, if the clear opening height is > 2 200 mm, 300 mm below the fully open
position of the door.
3) The prevention of door closing movement shall initiate a re-opening of the door.
Re-opening does not imply that the door shall open fully, but some reopening shall occur to allow an
obstacle to be removed.
4) a protective device shall automatically initiate re-opening of the door(s) in the event of a person crossing
the entrance during the closing movement.
i) the protective device (e.g. light curtain) shall cover the opening over the distance between at least 25
mm and 1 600 mm above the car door sill;
ii) the protective device shall be capable of detecting obstacles minimum of 50 mm diameter;
iii) to counteract persistent obstructions when closing the door, the protective device may be deactivated
after a predetermined time;
iv) in case of failure, or deactivation of the protective device, the kinetic energy of the doors shall be limited
to 4J, if the lift is kept in operation.
NOTE Protective device of the car door and the landing doors could be common.
b) for
— Landing and car door in parallel operation
— for the car door in case of sequence operation according 5.3.6.2.3.4
1) the prevention of door closing movement shall initiate a re-opening of the door; Re-opening does not
imply that the door shall open fully, but some reopening shall occur to allow an obstacle to be removed.
2) a protective device shall detect the object defined in i) passing through the protected zone defined in ii)
at any position within this zone, stop the door and initiate re-opening of the door during the closing
movement.
i) the test object is a cylinder with a maximum of 50 mm diameter, 300 mm long with the axle parallel
to the floor and perpendicular to the protected zone
ii) The protected zone in parallel operation shall be between the car side of the car door leading panel
and landing side of the landing door leading panel and up to a height of 2000 mm from the door sill
(see Figure 17)
iii) The protected zone in sequence operation shall be between the car side of car door leading panel
and the well side of car door leading panel and up to a height of 2000 mm from the sill (see Figure
17)ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
72 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
iv) the protective device (e.g. light curtain) shall detect objects anywhere in the opening over the
distance between at least 25 mm and 2 000 mm above the car door sill; (see Figure 17)
v) in case of failure, or deactivation of the protective device the automatic door closing shall be
disabled (door open buttons shall remain active
NOTE Protective device of the car door and the landing doors could be common.
Figure 17 – Protected Zone
c) for
— the car door in combination with a hinged landing door in a goods passenger lift
1) The prevention of door closing movement shall initiate a re-opening of the door; Re-opening
does not imply that the door shall open fully, but some reopening shall occur to allow an
obstacle to be removed.
2) a protective device shall detect the object defined in i) entering from car side through the
protected zone defined in ii) at any position within this zone, stop the door and initiate re
opening of the door during the closing movement.
i) the test object is a cylinder with a maximum of 50 mm diameter, 300 mm long with the axle
parallel to the floor and perpendicular to the protected zone
ii) The protected zone shall be between the car side of the leading car door panel to the well
side of the hinged landing door and up to a height of 2000 mm from the door sill (see Figure
18)
iii) the protective device (e.g. light curtain) shall detect objects anywhere in the opening over
the distance between at least 25 mm and 2 000 mm above the car door sill; (see Figure 18)ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 73
iv) in case of failure, or deactivation of the protective device the automatic door closing shall be
disabled (door open buttons shall remain active
NOTE Protective device of the car door and the landing doors could be common.
Figure 18 – Protected Zone
5.3.6.2.3.3 Non-automatic power operated vertically sliding doors
Manual closing of power operated doors shall be operated by a hold-to-run control device. The following
conditions shall be fulfilled simultaneously:
a) The actuator(s) may be equipped with a key switch or similar;
b) when the manual actuator is released, re-opening shall be initiated automatically.
c) The closing of the door is carried out under the continuous control of the user
d) the closing movement shall not be initiated by any controls other than the manual actuator of the hold-to-run
device;
e) Re-closing shall only start if the closing command was released and is re-initiated.
f) The requirements of 5.3.6.2.3.2 apply in addition
5.3.6.2.3.4 Sequence operation for power operated vertical sliding doors.
Sequence operation is as follows:
a) The car door closes first. The landing door shall only start to close when the car door is within a distance of
0,50 m above the floor.
b) The protective device of the car door remains active until the landing door is closed.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
74 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
c) A control button at the landing with the door open symbol according EN 81-70:2018, 5.4.3.1.3 shall allow to
reopen the doors when the car is at the landing.
This type of sliding door shall only be used for goods passenger lifts.
Power closing shall only be used if the following five conditions are fulfilled at the same time:
a) the closing is carried out under the continuous control and supervision of the users, e.g. hold-to-run
operation;
b) the average closing speed of the panels is limited to 0,30 m/s;
c) the car door is of construction as provided for in 5.3.1.2;
d) the car door is at least two-thirds closed before the landing door begins to close;
e) the door mechanism is protected against unintentional access.
5.3.6.2.4Other types of doors
When using other types of doors, e.g. hinged doors, with power operation, where there is a risk of striking
persons when opening or closing, precautions similar to those laid down for power-operated sliding doors
shall be taken.
Reversal of closing movement
If car doors are automatic power-operated a control button inside the car shall allow to reopen the doors
when the car is at the landing.
NOTE This is normally referred to as a “door re-open button”.
5.3.7 Local landing lighting and “car here” signal lights
Local landing lighting
The natural or artificial lighting of the landings in the vicinity of landing doors shall be at least 50 lux at floor
level, such that a user can see ahead when they are opening the landing door to enter the lift, even if the car
light has failed (see 0.4.2).
NOTE This can be subject to national building regulations.
"Car here" indication
5.3.7.2.1 In the case of landing doors with manual opening, the user needs to know whether the car is there
or not.
To this effect, one of the following solutions shall be installed:
a) one or more transparent vision panels conforming to the following four conditions at the same time:
Commented [IJ77]: See N1564ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 75
1) mechanical strength as specified in 5.3.5.3, breaking or damaging the glass during the door
pendulum shock test per 5.3.5.3.4 a) is not considered as test failure. The glass panel shall not detach
from the door;
2) laminated glass of minimum thickness of 3/3/0,76 mm and marked with:
i) the name of the supplier and trade mark;
ii) the thickness (e.g. 3/3/0,76 mm);
3) minimum glazed area per landing door of 0,015 m2 with a minimum of 0,01 m2 per vision panel;
4) width of at least 60 mm, and at most 150 mm. The lower edge of vision panels which are wider than
80 mm shall be at least 1 m above floor level,
b) an illuminated “car here” signal which shall light up when the car is about to stop or has stopped at the
particular landing. This signal may be switched off when the car is parked and the doors are closed, but
shall light again when the call button of the landing where the car is parked is activated.
5.3.7.2.2 The car door shall be fitted with a vision panel(s) if the landing door has a vision panel(s) as in
5.3.7.2.1 a), unless the car door is automatic and remains in the open position when the car is stationary at
the level of a landing.
When a vision panel(s) is fitted, it shall satisfy the requirements of 5.3.7.2.1 a) and be positioned in the car
door such that it is in visual alignment with the landing door vision panel(s) when the car is at the level of
the landing.
5.3.8 Locking and closed landing door check
Protection against the risk of falling
It shall not be possible in normal operation to open a landing door (or any of the panels in the case of a multi
panel door) unless the car has stopped, or is on the point of stopping, in the unlocking zone of that door.
The unlocking zone shall not extend more than 0,20 m above and below the landing level.
In the case, however, of mechanically operated car and landing doors operating simultaneously, the
unlocking zone may extend to a maximum of 0,35 m above and below the landing level.
Protection against shearing
With the exception of 5.12.1.4 and 5.12.1.8, it shall not be possible to start the lift, nor keep it in motion, if a
landing door, or any of the panels in the case of a multi-panel door, is open.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
76 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.3.9 Locking and emergency unlocking of landing and car doors
Landing door locking devices
5.3.9.1.1General
Each landing door shall be provided with a locking device satisfying the conditions of 5.3.8.1. This device
shall be protected against deliberate misuse.
With the exception of 5.12.1.4 and 5.12.1.8, the effective locking of the landing door in the closed position
shall precede the movement of the car. The locking shall be proved by an electric safety device in conformity
with 5.11.2.
5.3.9.1.2 The electric safety device shall not be activated unless the locking elements are engaged by at
least 7 mm (see Figure 1219).
Dimensions in millimetres
Figure 12 19 — Examples of locking elements
5.3.9.1.3 The element of the electric safety device proving the locked condition of the door panel(s) shall
be positively operated without any intermediate mechanism by the locking element.
Specific case: In the case of locking devices used in installations requiring special protection against risks of
humidity or explosion, the connection may be only positive, provided the link between the mechanical lock
and the element of the electric safety device proving the locked condition, can only be interrupted by
deliberately destroying the locking device.
5.3.9.1.4 For hinged doors, locking shall be effected as near as possible to the vertical closing edge(s) of
the doors, and maintained even in the case of panels sagging.
5.3.9.1.5 The locking elements and their fixings shall be resistant to shock, and made of durable material
that maintains the strength property over their intended lifetime, under the environmental conditions.
NOTE Shock requirements can be found in ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.2.
5.3.9.1.6 The engagement of the locking elements shall be achieved in such a way that a force of 300 N in
the opening direction of the door does not diminish the effectiveness of locking.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 77
5.3.9.1.7 The lock shall resist, without permanent deformation or breakage which could adversely affect
safety during the test laid down in ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.2, a minimum force at the level of the lock and in the
direction of opening of the door of:
a) 1 000 N in the case of sliding doors;
b) 3 000 N on the locking pin, in the case of hinged doors.
5.3.9.1.8 The locking action shall be effected and maintained by the action of gravity, permanent magnets,
or springs. The springs shall act by compression, be guided and of such dimensions that, at the moment of
unlocking, the coils are not compressed solid.
In the event of the permanent magnet (or spring) no longer fulfilling its function, gravity shall not cause
unlocking.
If the locking element is maintained in position by the action of a permanent magnet, it shall not be possible
to neutralize its effect by simple means (e.g. heat or shock).
5.3.9.1.9 The locking device shall be protected against the risk of an accumulation of dust, which could
hinder its proper functioning.
5.3.9.1.10 Inspection of the working parts shall be easy; for example, by using a transparent cover.
5.3.9.1.11 In the case where the lock contacts are in a box, the fixing screws for the cover shall be of the
captive type, so that they remain in the holes in the cover or box when opening the cover.
5.3.9.1.12 The locking device is regarded as a safety component and shall be verified according to the
requirements in ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.2.
5.3.9.1.13 On locking devices, a data plate shall be fixed indicating:
a) the name of the manufacturer of the locking device;
b) the type examination certificate number;
c) the type of locking device.
Car door locking devices
If the car door needs to be locked [see 5.2.5.3.1 c)], the locking device shall be designed to meet the
requirements given in 5.3.9.1.
This device shall be protected against deliberate misuse.
The locking device is regarded as a safety component and shall be verified according to the requirements in
ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.2.
Commented [IJ78]: What needs to be updated in
relation with Q&A and “EN 81-50: 5.2.2.2.3 Static test”ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
78 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Emergency unlocking
5.3.9.3.1 Each of the landing doors shall be capable of being unlocked from the outside with the aid of an
emergency unlocking key, which will fit the unlocking triangle, as defined in Figure 13.
Dimensions in millimetres
Figure 13 20 — Unlocking triangle
5.3.9.3.2 The position of the unlocking triangle can be on the door panel, or frame or wall. When in a
vertical plane, on the door panel or frame, the position of the unlocking triangle shall not exceed 2,00 m in
height above the landing.
If the unlocking triangle is on the frame and the key hole downwards in the horizontal plane, the maximum
height of the unlocking triangle hole from the landing floor shall be 2,70 m. The length of the emergency
unlocking key shall be at least equal to the height of the door minus 2,0 m.
Where the emergency unlocking key is of a length greater than 0,20 m, it is regarded as a special tool and
shall be available at the installation site.
5.3.9.3.3 After an emergency unlocking, the locking device shall not be able to remain in the unlocked
position with the landing door closed.
Commented [IJ79]: See N1564ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 79
5.3.9.3.4 In the case of landing doors driven by the car door, if the landing door becomes open for whatever
reason when the car is outside the unlocking zone, a device (either weight or springs) shall ensure closing
and locking of the landing door.
5.3.9.3.5 If there is no access door to the pit, other than the landing door, the door lock shall be reachable
safely within a height of 1,80 m and a maximum horizontal distance of 0,80 m from the pit ladder as called
for inaccording to 5.2.2.4 b), or a permanently installed device shall allow a person in the pit to unlock the
door.
Note: In case of big vertical sliding doors having two locking devices, two persons might be needed to unlock the door.
5.3.9.3.6 Where the emergency unlocking device is located behind a cover opened by the triangle key, this
cover shall be self-closing and self-locking, and provided with a switch disabling automatic door operation
when the cover is opened.
5.3.9.3.7 Where the manual effort to open or to close a door exceeds 400 N,
a) more than 1 person is necessary for maintenance and rescue operation and this shall be stated in the
user manual, or
b) additional means shall be provided which may be either mechanical or electrical and which are available
on site.
if additional means are needed to exit pit, they shall be available in the pit
Electric safety device for proving the landing door closed
5.3.9.4.1 Each landing door shall be provided with an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2 for
proving the closed position, so that the requirements of 5.3.8.2 are satisfied.
5.3.9.4.2 In the case of horizontally sliding landing doors, coupled with car doors, this device may be in
common with the device for proving the locked condition, provided that it is dependent upon the effective
closing of the landing door.
5.3.9.4.3 In the case of hinged landing doors, this device shall be placed adjacent to the closing edge of the
door or on the mechanical device proving the closed condition of the door.
5.3.10 Requirements common to devices for proving the locked condition and the closed condition
of the landing door
5.3.10.1 It shall not be possible, from positions normally accessible to persons, to operate the lift with a
landing door open or unlocked, after one single action not forming part of the normal operating sequence.
5.3.10.2 The means used to prove the position of a locking element shall have positive operation.
Commented [IJ80]: See N1537
Commented [IJ81]: Already corrected in ISO
Commented [IJ82]: See N1640
Commented [IJ83]: See N1564
Commented [IJ84]: See N1640ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
80 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.3.11 Sliding landing doors with multiple, mechanically linked panels
5.3.11.1 If a sliding landing door comprises several directly mechanically linked panels, it is permitted to:
a) place the device required in 5.3.9.4.1 or 5.3.9.4.2, on a single panel; and
b) lock only one panel, provided that this single locking prevents the opening of the other panel(s) by
hooking the panels in the closed position in case of telescopic doors.
A back fold of the sheet of each panel of a telescopic door and hooking of the fast panel to the slow panel
when the door is in the closed position, or hooks on the hanger plate realizing the same linkage, are
considered as a direct mechanical linkage, and therefore does not require a device as per 5.3.9.4.1 or 5.3.9.4.2
on all panels. The linkage shall be ensured even in case of rupture of guiding means. Simultaneous rupture
of upper and lower guiding means needs not to be taken into consideration. Compliance with the strength
requirements of 5.3.11.3 shall be verified with the minimum possible design overlapping of the hooking
elements of the panels.
NOTE The hanger plate is not considered as part of the guiding means.
5.3.11.2 If a sliding door comprises several indirectly mechanically linked panels (e.g. by rope, belt or
chain), it is permitted to lock only one panel, provided that this single locking prevents the opening of the
other panel(s), and that these are not fitted with a handle.
The closed position of the other panel(s), not locked by the locking device, shall be proved by an electric
safety device in conformity with 5.11.2.
5.3.11.3 The devices providing direct mechanical linkage between panels according to 5.3.11.1, or indirect
mechanical linkage according to 5.3.11.2, are considered as forming part of the locking device.
They shall be capable of resisting the force of 1 000 N as per 5.3.9.1.7 a), even if the force of 300 N mentioned
in 5.3.5.3.1 is acting simultaneously.
5.3.12 Closing of automatically operated landing doors
In the case of lift landing doors participating to the fire protection of the building, they shall be closed in
normal operation, after the necessary period of time, which may be defined according to the usage of the lift,
in the absence of a command for the movement of the car.
NOTE For the requirements for fire-fighting lifts and the behaviour of lifts in the event of a fire, further guidance
can be found in EN 81-72 and EN 81-73 or in national requirements.
5.3.13 Electric safety device for proving the car doors closed
5.3.13.1 With the exception of 5.12.1.4 and 5.12.1.8, it shall not be possible to start the lift, nor keep it in
motion, if a car door, or any of the panels in the case of a multi-panel door, is open.
5.3.13.2 Each car door shall be provided with an electric safety device for proving the closed position in
conformity with 5.11.2, so that the conditions imposed by 5.3.13.1 are satisfied.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 81
5.3.14 Sliding or folding car doors with multiple, mechanically linked panels
5.3.14.1 If a sliding or folding car door comprises several directly mechanically linked panels, it is
permitted:
a) to place the device required in 5.3.13.2;
1) either on a single panel (the leading panel in the case of telescopic doors); or
2) on the door driving element, if the mechanical connection between this element and the panel is
direct; and
b) in the case and conditions laid down in 5.2.5.3.1 c), to lock only one panel, provided that this single
locking prevents the opening of the other panel(s) by hooking the panels in the closed position in case
of telescopic or folding doors.
A back fold of the sheet of each panel of a telescopic door and hooking of the fast panel to the slow panel
when the door is in the closed position, or hooks on the hanger plate realizing the same linkage are
considered as a direct mechanical linkage, and therefore does not require device as required in 5.3.13.2 on
all panels. The linkage shall be ensured even in case of rupture of guiding means. Simultaneous rupture of
upper and lower guiding means needs not to be taken into consideration. Compliance with the strength
requirements of 5.3.11.3 shall be verified with the minimum possible design overlapping of the hooking
elements of the panels.
NOTE The hanger plate is not considered as part of the guiding means.
5.3.14.2 If a sliding door comprises several indirectly mechanically linked panels (e.g. by rope, belt or
chain), it is permitted to place the device (5.3.13.2) on a single panel, provided that:
a) it is not the driven panel; and
b) the driven panel is directly mechanically linked to the door driving element.
5.3.15 Opening the car door
5.3.15.1 If the car is stationary lift stops for any reason in the unlocking zone (5.3.8.1), it shall be possible
with a force not greater than 300 N, to open the mechanically coupled car and landing door by hand from:
a) the landing, after the landing door has been unlocked with the emergency unlocking key or being
unlocked by the car door;
b) within the car.
when the door operator does not apply closing force.
Commented [IJ85]: See N1537
Commented [IJ86]: See N1564ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
82 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.3.15.1.1 If the car is stationary in the unlocking zone (5.3.8.1), and the power operation of the non
mechanically coupled car and landing door is non-operational, assistance to passengers in the car shall
come from outside.
5.3.15.2 In order to restrict the opening of the car door by persons inside the car, a means shall be
provided such that:
a) when the car is moving, the opening of the car door shall require a force of more than 50 N; and
b) when the car is outside of the zone defined in 5.3.8.1, it shall not be possible to open the car door more
than 50 mm with a force of 1 000 N at the restrictor mechanism, nor shall the door open under automatic
power operation.
5.3.15.3 It shall be possible, at least where the car is stopped within the distance defined in 5.6.7.5, once
the corresponding landing door has been opened, to open the car door from the landing without tools, other
than the emergency unlocking key or tools being permanently available on site. This also applies to car doors
fitted with locking devices as 5.3.9.2.
5.3.15.4 In the case of lifts covered by 5.2.5.3.1 c), the opening of the car door from inside the car shall be
possible only when the car is in the unlocking zone.
5.3.15.5 If the car is stationary in the unlocking zone (5.3.8.1), and the power operation of the non
mechanically coupled car and landing door is non-operational, assistance to passengers in the car shall come
from outside.
5.4 Car, counterweight and balancing weight
5.4.1 Height of car
The interior clear height of the car shall be at least 2 m.
5.4.2 Available car area, rated load, number of passengers
General case
5.4.2.1.1General
To prevent overloading of the car by persons, the available area of the car shall be limited.
To this effect the relationship between rated load and maximum available area is given in Table 6.
5.4.2.1.2 The car area shall be measured inside the car body, from wall to wall, excluding finishes, at a
height 1 m from the floor.
5.4.2.1.3 Recesses and extensions in the car walls, even of height less than 1 m, whether protected or not
by separating doors, are only permitted if their area is taken into account in the calculation of maximum
available car area.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 83
Recesses or extensions above the car floor level, which cannot accommodate a person due to equipment
placed in them need not be taken into account for the calculation of the maximum available car area (e.g.
niches for tip-up seats, recesses for intercoms).
Where there is an available area between the entrance frame uprights when the doors are closed, the
following applies:
a) where the area is less than or equal to 100 mm deep up to any door panel (including fast and slow doors
in the case of multi-panel doors), then it shall be excluded from the floor area;
b) where the area is greater than 100 mm deep, the total available area shall be included in the floor area.
Table 6 — Rated load and maximum available car area
Rated load,
mass
kg
Maximum available car
area
m2
Rated load,
mass
kg
Maximum available car
area
m2
100a 0,37 900 2,20
180b 0,58 975 2,35
225 0,70 1 000 2,40
300 0,90 1 050 2,50
375 1,10 1 125 2,65
400 1,17 1 200 2,80
450 1,30 1 250 2,90
525 1,45 1 275 2,95
600 1,60 1 350 3,10
630 1,66 1 425 3,25
675 1,75 1 500 3,40
750 1,90 1 600 3,56
800 2,00 2 000 4,20ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
84 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
825 2,05 2 500c 5,00
a Minimum for 1 person lift.
b Minimum for 2 persons lift.
c Beyond 2 500 kg, add 0,16 m2 for each extra 100 kg.
For intermediate loads, the area is determined by linear interpolation.
5.4.2.1.4 Overloading of the car shall be monitored by means of a device according to 5.12.1.2.
Goods passenger lifts
5.4.2.2.1 For goods passenger lifts, the requirements of 5.4.2.1 shall be applied under the following
conditions, either:
a) the weight of handling devices are included in the rated load; or
b) the weight of handling devices shall be considered separately from the rated load under the following
conditions:
1) handling devices are used only for loading and unloading of the car and are not intended to be
transported with the load;
2) for traction and positive drive lifts, the design of the car, the car sling, the car safety gear, the guide
rails, the machine brake, the traction and the unintended car movement protection means shall be
based on the total load of rated load plus the weight of handling devices;
3) for hydraulic lifts the design of the car, the car sling, the connection between the car and the ram
(cylinder), the car safety gear, the rupture valve, the restrictor/one-way restrictor, the pawl device,
the guide rails and the unintended movements protection means shall be based on the total load of
rated load plus the weight of handling devices;
4) if the stroke of the car due to loading and un-loading exceeds the maximum levelling accuracy, a
mechanical device shall limit any downward movement of the car, which complies with the
following:
i) the levelling accuracy shall not exceed 20 mm;
ii) the mechanical device shall be activated before the doors open;
iii) the mechanical device shall have a sufficient strength to hold the car even if the machine brake
is not engaged or the down valve on a hydraulic lift is opened;
iv) re-levelling movements shall be prevented by an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2
if the mechanical device is not in the active position;ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 85
v) normal operation of the lift shall be prevented by an electric safety device in conformity with
5.11.2 if the mechanical device is not in the inactive position;
5) the maximum weight of handling devices shall be indicated at the landings according to Figure 1421.
NOTE The Forklift symbol per ISO 7010:2011, W014, and the Mass symbol per ISO 7000:2014, 1321B, are
incorporated in these pictograms.
Figure 14 21 — Pictogram at landings for loading by handling devices
5.4.2.2.2 For goods passenger lifts, hydraulically driven, the available area of the car may be greater than
the value determined from Table 6, but shall not exceed the value determined from Table 7 for the
corresponding rated load.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
86 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Table 7 — Rated load and maximum available car area (for hydraulic goods passenger lifts)
Rated load,
mass
kg
Maximum available
car area
m2
Rated load,
mass
kg
Maximum available
car area
m2
400 1,68 975 3,52
450 1,84 1 000 3,60
525 2,08 1 050 3,72
600 2,32 1 125 3,90
630 2,42 1 200 4,08
675 2,56 1 250 4,20
750 2,80 1 275 4,26
800 2,96 1 350 4,44
825 3,04 1 425 4,62
900 3,28 1 500 4,80
1 600a 5,04
a Beyond 1 600 kg, add 0,40 m2 for each 100 kg extra.
For intermediate loads, the area is determined by linear interpolation.
NOTE Example of calculations:
A hydraulic goods passenger lift is required to carry a rated load of 6 000 kg and has dimensions not less than 5,60 m
deep by 3,40 m wide (i.e. 19,04 m2 car area).
a) The maximum car area to transport a load of 6 000 kg, using Table 7:
— 1 600 kg = 5,04 m2;
— according to footnote a of Table 7: 6 000 kg − 1 600 kg = 4 400 kg / 100 = 44, then 44 × 0,40 m2 = 17,60 m2;
— therefore, the total maximum car area for rated load is: 5,04 m2 + 17,60 m2 = 22,64 m2.
The chosen car size of 19,04 m2 is acceptable to transport 6 000 kg since it is less than the maximum allowed.
b) Calculation according to Table 6, the equivalent load to area full with passengers is:
— 5 m2 = 2 500 kg;ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 87
— according to footnote c of Table 6, 19,04 m2 − 5 m2 = 14,0 m2 / 0,16 m2 = 88, then 88 × 100 kg = 8 800 kg;
— therefore, the total maximum load for the maximum area is 2 500 kg + 8 800 kg = 11 300 kg.
According to 5.4.2.2.4, the calculation of lift components as listed, e.g. car sling and safety gear, etc., shall be
carried out for a load of 11 300 kg.
5.4.2.2.3 For goods passenger lifts, hydraulically driven, the available car area of a lift with balancing
weight shall be such that a load in the car resulting from Table 6 shall not cause a pressure exceeding
1,4 times the pressure that the jack and the piping are designed for.
5.4.2.2.4 For goods passenger lifts, hydraulically driven, the design of the car, the car sling, the connection
between the car and the ram (cylinder), the suspension means (of indirect acting lifts), the car safety gear,
the rupture valve, the restrictor/one-way restrictor, the pawl device, the unintended movement device, the
guide rails and the buffers shall be based on a load resulting from Table 6. The cylinder can be calculated
according to the rated load given in Table 7.
5.4.2.2.5 For goods passenger lifts with traction drive the following applies:
a) Any normal starting, including re-levelling, shall be prevented by an overload device according to 5.12.1.2
which satisfied the requirements of an electric safety device according to 5.11.2. This overload device shall
also be effective when the car is lifted up from the mechanical device according to 5.4.2.2.5 b) 4) i. or 5.2.2.5
c) 3).
b) When the weight of handling devices is included in the rated load.
1) The design of the car, the car sling, the car safety gear and the guide rails shall be based on a load
resulting from Table 6 (5.4.2.1).
2) The design of the lift machine including its brake, the unintended movement protection means and the
buffers, the traction and the safety factor of the suspension means shall be based on a load resulting from
Table 7.
3) Down movements in case of overloading and loss of traction shall be limited either:
i. by a mechanical device according to 5.4.2.2.1 b) 4), or
ii. by tripping the safety gear in downward movement of the car according to 5.6.2.2.4.
c) When the weight of handling devices is not included in the rated load according to 5.4.2.2.1 b).
1) The design of the car, the car sling, the car safety gear and the guide rails shall be based on the total
load of rated load from Table 6 (5.4.2.1) plus weight of handling devices.
Commented [IJ87]: Correction identified by ChinaISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
88 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
2) The design of the lift machine including its brake, the unintended movement protection means and the
buffers, the traction and the safety factor of the suspension means shall be based on a load resulting from
Table 7.
3) Down movements in case of overloading and loss of traction shall be limited by a mechanical device
according to 5.4.2.2.1 b) 4).
Number of passengers
5.4.2.3.1 The number of passengers shall be obtained from the smaller value of the following:
a) either, the result of Formula (5) rounded down to the nearest whole number:
75
Q (5)
where Q is the rated load; or
b) Table 8.
Table 8 — Number of passengers and minimum car available area
Number of
passengers
Minimum
available car area
m2
Number of
passengers
Minimum
available car area
m2
1 0,28 11 1,87
2 0,49 12 2,01
3 0,60 13 2,15
4 0,79 14 2,29
5 0,98 15 2,43
6 1,17 16 2,57
7 1,31 17 2,71
8 1,45 18 2,85
9 1,59 19 2,99
10 1,73 20a 3,13
a Beyond 20 passengers, add 0,115 m2 for each extra passenger.
5.4.2.3.2 In the car, the following shall be displayed:
a) the manufacturer/installer's name;
Commented [IJ88]: See N1690ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 89
b) the installation serial number;
c) the year of construction;
d) the rated load of the lift in kilograms;
e) the number of persons, in accordance with 5.4.2.3.1.
The notice shall be made as follows: "... kg ... PERS." or by using symbols for weight and persons.
EXAMPLE: For persons: and for load:
NOTE 1 Pictograms can be before or after the number, above or below each other, and in any order.
NOTE 2 Person symbol per ISO 7000:2014, 5840. Mass symbol per ISO 7000:2014, 1321B.
The minimum height of the characters and pictograms used for the notice shall be:
— 10 mm for capital letters and numbers and pictograms;
— 7 mm for small letters.
5.4.2.3.3 For goods passenger lifts, a sign visible from the landing loading area at all times shall display the
rated load.
5.4.3 Walls, floor and roof of the car
5.4.3.1 The car shall be completely enclosed by walls, floor and roof. The only permissible openings are
as follows:
a) entrances for the normal access of users;
b) emergency trap doors and doors;
c) ventilation apertures.
5.4.3.2 The assembly comprising the sling, guide shoes, walls, floor, ceiling and roof of the car shall have
mechanical strength to resist the forces which are applied in normal lift operation and the operation of safety
devices.
5.4.3.2.1 When safety devices are operated, the floor of the car, with or without the load uniformly
distributed, shall not incline more than 5 % from its normal position.
5.4.3.2.2 Each wall of the car shall have a mechanical strength such that:
Formatted: Italian (Italy)ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
90 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
a) when a force of 300 N, being evenly distributed over an area of 5 cm2 in round or square section, is
applied at right angles to the wall at any point from the inside of the car towards the outside, it shall
resist without:
— any permanent deformation greater than 1 mm;
— elastic deformation greater than 15 mm.
b) when a force of 1 000 N, being evenly distributed over an area of 100 cm2 in round or square section, is
applied at right angles to the wall at any point from the inside of the car towards the outside, it shall
resist without permanent deformation greater than 1 mm.
NOTE These forces can be applied on the “structural” wall, excluding mirrors, decorative panels, car operating
panel(s), etc.
5.4.3.2.3 Car walls made of glass or partly glass shall be laminated.
When an impacting energy equivalent to a falling height of 500 mm of the hard pendulum shock device
(ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.14.2.1) and an impacting energy equivalent to a falling height of 700 mm of the soft
pendulum shock device (ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.14.2.2) is striking the glass wall at a point 1 m above the floor
on the centre line of the panel or for partial glass walls at the centre of the glass element, the following shall
be satisfied:
a) there shall be no cracks on the wall element;
b) there shall be no damage on the surface of the glass except chips of 2 mm maximum in diameter;
c) there shall be no loss of integrity.
These tests are not needed if car wall elements made of flat glass, according to Table 9, are framed on all
sides.
The above tests shall be carried out on the inside face of the car wall.
Table 9 — Flat glass panels to be used in walls of the car
Type of glass
Minimum thickness
mm
Diameter of inscribed circle of
1 m maximum
Diameter of inscribed circle of
2 m maximum
Laminated toughened
or
laminated tempered
8
(4 + 4 + 0,76)
10
(5 + 5 + 0,76)
Laminated 10
(5 + 5 + 0,76)
12
(6 + 6 + 0,76)ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 91
5.4.3.2.4 The fixing of the glass in the wall shall ensure that the glass cannot slip out of the fixings during
all shock conditions encountered in both directions of travel, inclusive of operation of safety devices.
5.4.3.2.5 The glass panels shall have markings giving the following information:
a) name of the supplier and trademark;
b) type of glass;
c) thickness (e.g. 8/8/0,76 mm).
5.4.3.2.6 The car roof shall satisfy the requirements of 5.4.7.
5.4.3.3 Car walls with glass placed lower than 1,10 m from the floor shall have a handrail at a height
between 0,90 m and 1,10 m. This handrail shall be fastened independently from the glass.
5.4.4 Car door, floor, wall, ceiling and decorative materials
The supporting structure of the car body shall be made of non-flammable materials.
The materials selected for car floor, wall, and ceiling and door finishes shall meet the requirements of
EN 13501-1 as listed:
— flooring: Cfl-s2;
— wall and car door: C-s2, d1;
— ceiling: C-s2, d0.
Excluded from the above requirements are:
a) Paint finishes, laminates up to 0,30 mm on the walls, ceiling and car doors
a)b) and fixtures such as operating devices, lighting and indicators are excluded from the above
requirements.
Mirrors or other glass finishes, where used within the car, shall comply with mode B or C according to
ISO 29584:2015, Annex E, if broken.
In countries where EN 13501-1 is not adopted, relevant national requirements for reaction to fire should
apply.
5.4.5 Apron
5.4.5.1 Each car sill shall be fitted with an apron, which extends at least to the full width of the clear
landing entrance, which it faces. This vertical section shall be extended downwards by a chamfer whose angle
with the horizontal plane shall be at least 60°. The projection of this chamfer of the horizontal plane shall be
not less than 20 mm.
Commented [IJ89]: China comment to assist
translation
Commented [IJ90]: Changed by ISOISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
92 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Any projections on the face of the apron, such as fixings, shall not exceed 5 mm. Projections and recesses
exceeding 2 mm shall be chamfered at least 75° to the horizontal.
5.4.5.2 The height of the vertical portion shall be at least 0,75 m.
5.4.5.3 When a force of 300 N, being evenly distributed over an area of 5 cm2 in round or square section,
is applied at right angles from the landing side to the apron at any point along the lower edge of the vertical
section, the apron shall resist without:
a) permanent deformation greater than 1 mm;
b) elastic deformation greater than 35 mm.
5.4.6 Emergency trap doors and emergency doors
5.4.6.1 Where an emergency trap door is fitted to the car roof (see 0.4.2), it shall have minimum clear
opening dimensions of 0,40 m × 0,50 m.
NOTE When space allows, a trap door of 0,50 m × 0,70 m is preferable.
5.4.6.2 Emergency doors may be used in the case of adjacent cars, provided, however, that the horizontal
distance between cars does not exceed 1 m (see 5.2.3.3).
In this case, each car shall be provided with a means of determining the position of the adjacent car to which
persons can be rescued in order to allow it to be brought to a level where rescue can take place.
In the event of rescue, where the distance between car emergency doors is greater than 0,35 m, a
portable/movable bridge or a bridge integrated into the car, with handrails and a minimum width of 0,50 m
but with sufficient clearance to fit in the opening of the emergency door, shall be provided.
The bridge shall be designed to support a minimum force of 2 500 N.
If the bridge is portable/movable it shall be stored in the building where the rescue is to take place. The use
of the bridge shall be described in the instruction manual.
If emergency doors exist, they shall measure at least 1,80 m high and 0,40 m wide.
5.4.6.3 If emergency trap doors or doors are installed, they shall conform to the following:
5.4.6.3.1 Emergency trap doors and doors shall be provided with a means for manual locking.
5.4.6.3.1.1 Emergency trap doors shall be opened from outside the car without a key and from inside the
car with a key suited to the triangle defined in 5.3.9.3.
Emergency trap doors shall not open towards the inside of the car.
Emergency trap doors in the open position shall not project beyond the edge of the car.
5.4.6.3.1.2 Emergency doors shall be opened from outside the car without a key and from inside the car
using a key suited to the triangle defined in 5.3.9.3.
Emergency doors shall not open towards the outside of the car.
Commented [IJ91]: Correction identified by ChinaISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 93
Emergency doors shall not be located in the path of a counterweight or a balancing weight or in front of a
fixed obstacle (except for beams separating the cars) preventing passage from one car to another.
5.4.6.3.2 The locking called for in 5.4.6.3.1 shall be proved by means of an electric safety device in
conformity with 5.11.2.
In case of emergency doors, this device shall also stop the adjacent lift when unlocked.
Restoring the lift to service shall only be possible after deliberate relocking.
5.4.7 Car roof
5.4.7.1 In addition to 5.4.3, the car roof shall fulfil the following requirements:
a) the car roof shall have sufficient strength to support the maximum number of persons, as indicated in
5.2.5.7.1.
However, the car roof shall resist a minimum force of 2 000 N at any position on an area of
0,30 m × 0,30 m without permanent deformation.
b) the surface of the car roof where a person needs to work or move between working areas shall be non
slip.
NOTE For guidance, see ISO 14122-2:2016, 4.2.4.6.
5.4.7.2 The following protection shall be provided:
a) the car roof shall be provided with a toe board a minimum of 0,10 m high, positioned either:
1) on the outer edge of the car roof; or
2) between the outer edge and the position of the balustrade, where a balustrade (5.4.7.4) is provided;
b) where the free distance in a horizontal plane, beyond and perpendicular to the outer edge of the car roof
to the wall of the well exceeds 0,30 m, a balustrade shall be provided to the dimensions given in 5.4.7.4.
The free distances shall be measured to the wall of the well, allowing a larger distance in recesses, the width
or height of which is less than 0,30 m.
5.4.7.3 Where lift component(s) located between the outer edge of the car roof and the wall of the well
can prevent the risk of falling (see Figures 15 22 and 1623), the protection shall fulfil the following conditions
simultaneously:
a) where the distance between the outer edge of the car roof and the well wall is greater than 0,30 m, it
shall not be possible to place a horizontal circle with a diameter greater than 0,30 m between the outer
edge of the car roof and the relevant component(s), between components or between the end of the
balustrade and the component(s);ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
94 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
b) when a force of 300 N is applied horizontally at right angles to any point to the component, it shall not
cause the component to deflect to a point where a) is no longer fulfilled;
c) the component shall extend in height above the car roof to form the same level of protection as defined
in 5.4.7.4 throughout the travel of the car.
Dimensions in millimetres
Key
1 lift well wall
2 lift car roof edge
3 ropes, belts
4 guide rails
5 balustrade
Figure 15 22 — Example of components providing protection from falling (Electric lifts)
Dimensions in millimetresISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 95
Key
1 lift well wall
2 lift car roof edge
3 ram
4 guide rails
5 balustrade
Figure 16 23 — Example of components providing protection from falling (Hydraulic lifts)
5.4.7.4 Balustrades shall fulfil the following requirements:
a) they shall consist of a handrail and an intermediate bar at half the height of the balustrade;
b) considering the free distance in a horizontal plane beyond the inner edge of the handrail of the
balustrade and the well wall (see Figure 1724), its height shall be at least:
1) 0,70 m where the distance is up to 0,50 m;
2) 1,10 m where the distance exceeds 0,50 m;
c) the balustrade shall be located at a maximum distance of 0,15 m from the edges of the car roof;
d) the horizontal distance between the outer edge of the handrail and any part in the well (counterweight
or balancing weight, switches, rails, brackets, etc.) shall be at least 0,10 m.
When a force of 1 000 N is applied horizontally at right angles to any point at the top of the balustrade, it
shall resist without elastic deformation greater than 50 mm.
Dimensions in millimetres
a) No balustrade required but a toe-board 100 mm minimum highISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
96 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
b) Balustrade required, 700 mm minimum height and a toe-board 100 mm minimum height
c) Balustrade required, 1 100 mm minimum height and a toe-board 100 mm minimum height
Figure 17 25 — Car roof balustrade — Height
5.4.7.5 Any glass used for the car roof shall be laminated.
5.4.7.6 Pulleys and/or sprockets fixed to the car shall have protection according to 5.5.7.
5.4.8 Equipment on top of the car
The following shall be installed on top of the car:ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 97
a) control device in conformity with 5.12.1.5 (inspection operation) operable within 0,30 m horizontally
from a refuge space (5.2.5.7.1);
b) stopping device in conformity with 5.12.1.11, in an easily accessible position and no more than 1 m from
the entry point for inspection or maintenance personnel.
This device may be the one located next to the inspection operation control if this is not placed more
than 1 m from the access point;
c) socket outlet in conformity with 5.10.7.2.
5.4.9 Ventilation
5.4.9.1 Cars shall be provided with ventilation apertures in the upper and lower parts of the car.
5.4.9.2 The effective area of ventilation apertures situated in the upper part of the car shall be at least
1 % of the available car area, and the same also applies for the apertures in the lower part of the car.
The gaps round the car doors may be taken into account in the calculation of the area of ventilation holes, up
to 50 % of the required effective area.
5.4.9.3 Ventilation apertures shall be built or arranged in such a way that it is not possible to pass a
straight rigid rod 10 mm in diameter through the car walls from the inside.
5.4.10 Lighting
5.4.10.1 The car shall be provided with electrical lighting that is permanently installed ensuring a light
intensity of at least 100 lux on the control devices and at 1 m above the floor at any point not less than
100 mm from any wall.
NOTE Depending on the configuration of the car, the handrail, tip-up seat, etc., can generate shadow that can be
ignored.
The light meter should be oriented towards the strongest light source when taking lux level readings.
5.4.10.2 There shall be at least two lamps connected in parallel.
NOTE In this context, lamp is understood to mean the individual light source, e.g. bulb, fluorescent tube, etc.
5.4.10.3 The car shall be continuously illuminated except when the car is parked and the doors are closed.
5.4.10.4 There shall be emergency lights with an automatically rechargeable emergency supply, which is
capable of ensuring a lighting intensity of at least 5 lux for 1 h:
a) at each alarm initiation device in the car and on the car roof;
b) in the centre of the car, 1 m above the floor;
Commented [IJ92]: See N1538ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
98 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
c) in the centre of the car roof, 1 m above the floor.
This lighting shall come on automatically upon failure of the normal lighting supply.
5.4.11 Counterweight and balancing weight
General
The use of a balancing weight is defined in 5.9.2.1.1. for positive drive lifts and in 5.9.3.1.3 for hydraulic lifts.
5.4.11.2 If the counterweight or the balancing weight incorporates filler weights, necessary measures
shall be taken to prevent their displacement. To this effect, they shall be mounted in a frame and secured
within it.
5.4.11.3 Pulleys and/or sprockets fixed to the counterweight or to the balancing weight shall have
protection according to 5.5.7.
5.5 Suspension means, compensation means and related protection means
The following environmental conditions shall be considered for the design of the components:
Temperature and Humidity:
− for transport/storage: -10° to 60 °C, 95% non-condensing
− for operation: + 0° to 40 °C, 95% non-condensing
If applicable additional environmental factors shall be considered to maintain the function and lifetime
of the suspension means as specified by the manufacturer, e.g.
− in case of application in firefighting lifts, water in case of special applications in dusty environments,
possible additional contaminations
− in case of transparent shaft enclosure, any additional UV resistance
In case of humid environment, additional hydrolysis resistance
5.4.125.5.1 Suspension means and related sheaves/drums/sprockets
5.5.1.1 Cars, counterweights or balancing weights shall be suspended from one of the following
suspension means:
a) non-coated steel wire ropes in combination with steel/cast iron traction sheaves or drums or pulleys of
hydraulic lifts;
b) non-coated steel wire ropes in combination with elastomeric coated traction sheave grooves;
c) elastomeric coated steel wire ropes in combination with metallic traction sheaves;
d) elastomeric coated traction belts in combination with metallic traction sheaves;
e) elastomeric coated timing belts in combination with metallic sprockets;
f) steel chains with parallel links (Gale type) in combination with metallic sprockets; or
Commented [IJ93]: See N1537ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 99
roller chains in combination with metallic sprockets.
5.5.1.2 Material and construction of ropes and belts
steel wire ropes, or steel chains with parallel links (Galle type) or roller chains.
5.5.1.2.1 Non-coated The ropes applied with steel/cast iron traction sheaves or drums shall correspond
to the following requirements:
a) the nominal diameter of the ropes shall be at least 8 4 mm;
b) the tensile strength of the wires and the other characteristics (construction, extension, ovality, flexibility,
tests, etc.) shall be as specified in EN 12385-5, or ISO 4344. or
c) the characteristics, excluding diameter tolerances, may deviate from EN 12385-5; in this case following
requirements have to be applied:
1) ropes with diameter d ≥ 6 mm shall have a wire rope core (IWRC);
2) ropes with diameter 4 mm ≤ d < 6 mm shall have a wire rope core (IWRC) or wire strand core (WSC);
3) the number of outer strands shall be at least 6;
4) traction sheave grooves shall be hardened if the tensile strength of outer wires exceeds 1770
N/mm².
5.5.1.2.2 Non-coated ropes applied with elastomeric coated traction sheave grooves shall
correspond to the following requirements:
a) the nominal diameter of the ropes shall be 4 mm ≤ d ≤ 8 mm;
b) if the tensile strength of the wires and/or other characteristics (construction, extension, ovality,
flexibility, tests, etc.), excluding diameter tolerances, are not in compliance with EN 12385-5 following
requirements have to be applied:
1) ropes with diameter 6 mm ≤ d ≤ 8 mm shall have a wire rope core (IWRC);
2) ropes with diameter 4 mm ≤ d < 6 mm shall have a wire rope core (IWRC) or wire strand core (WSC);
3) the number of outer stands shall be at least 6;
5.5.1.2.3 Elastomeric coated steel wire ropes shall correspond to the following requirements:
a) all load bearing members shall be made from steel wires;
b) the tensile strength of the steel wires shall be as specified by the manufacturer;
Commented [IJ94]: Added by ISOISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
100 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
c) steel wires shall have a Zinc coating or an equivalent protection against corrosion ; the mass of the
coating shall be as specified by the manufacturer;
d) the load bearing member shall have a minimum diameter of 4 mm; the wires shall have a minimum of
0,2 mm;
e) elastomeric coating material shall be as specified by the manufacturer;
f) the elastomeric coated rope construction shall be as specified by the manufacturer ; only the steel wire
rope shall be considered as load bearing member of the elastomeric coated rope;
g) the elastomeric coating shall protect the elastomeric coated rope from environmental influences and
shall prevent any direct contact of the steel wire rope to the traction sheave and deflection pulley(s);
h) the tolerance of the outside diameter including coating shall be ± 2% when loaded at 0 to 10 % MBF;
i) the above requirements shall be verified according to EN 81-50, 5.13.1;
5.5.1.2.4 Elastomeric coated traction belts shall correspond to the following requirements:
a) requirements according to 5.5.1.2.3 a) to c);
b) the load bearing members shall have a minimum diameter of 1,3 mm in a non-tensioned condition and
be made from wires with a minimum diameter of 0,15 mm;
c) the load bearing members shall be arranged in such a way that their combination of lay directions
ensures low rotation behaviour;
d) only the steel ropes or strands shall be considered as load bearing members of the belt;
e) the elastomeric coating shall protect the load bearing members from environmental influences and shall
prevent any direct contact of the load bearing member to the traction sheave and deflection pulley(s) ;
f) when the belt is loaded up to 10% of the minimum breaking force of the belt, the following tolerances
apply:
− ± 5% of nominal width, and
− ± 5% of nominal thickness.
5.5.1.2.5 Elastomeric coated timing belts shall correspond to the following requirements:
a) requirements according to 5.5.1.2.4 a) to f);
b) the number of teeth shall be at least 9, when the belt is in wrap contact with the sprocket pulley;
c) the elastomeric coated timing belt and the sprocket pulley(s)shall be selected to match to application
specifications;ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 101
Note: typical profile systems are shown in ISO13050:2014 or ISO 17396:2014 ;
5.5.1.3 The minimum number of suspension means of ropes or chains shall be two.
For hydraulic lifts this shall be a minimum of two per indirect acting jack, and two for the connection between
car and any balancing weight.
NOTE Where reeving is used, the number to take into account is that of the ropes or chains, and not the falls.
5.5.1.4 Suspension meansRopes or chains shall be independent.
5.5.1.5 Elastomeric coated traction sheaves shall comply with the following requirements:
a) the traction sheave body shall be made of steel or cast iron;
b) the elastomeric coating shall be secured by positive mechanical connection or adhesively bonded to the
sheave body; the maximum thickness of the elastomeric coating shall be 50% of the steel wire rope diameter;
c) the groove shape of the coating shall be semicircular without undercut;
d) the difference of the running radius for all grooves shall not exceed 0,1% at any point of the
circumference;
e) the design shall prevent steel wire ropes from jumping out of traction sheave grooves;
f) the geometry of the metallic sheave body shall be designed to ensure the traction requirements
according EN81-20:2018, 5.5.3 in case of coating loss;
g) any hazardous rotation of the coating layer on the sheave body shall be prevented, even in case of any
bonding failure;
h) the elastomeric coating and its mechanical or securely adhesive bonding to the sheave body shall be as
specified by the manufacturer and shall be verified to meet the requirements according to EN 81-50, 5.13.2.
5.5.1.6 Traction sheaves for elastomeric coated suspension means shall comply with the following
requirements:
a) the traction sheave body shall be made from steel, cast iron or aluminium;
b) the geometry of the traction sheave shall be designed to prevent the suspension means running off the
sheave in lateral direction;
c) the surface roughness of the contact surface between sheave and suspension means shall be specified
by the manufacturer;ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
102 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.5.2 Sheave, pulley, drum and rope/load bearing member diameter ratios, rope/chain and their
terminations
terminations
5.5.2.1 For coated suspension means, the diameter of the load bearing member is defined by the diameter
of the circular metallic load bearing member used in the element.
For non-coated steel wire ropes this diameter is equivalent to the nominal steel wire rope diameter.
The minimum ratio between the pitch diameter of sheaves, pulleys, drums or sprocket wheels and the
nominal diameter of the load bearing member shall be according Table 10
Table 10: Minimum diameter ratio D/d
Minimum diameter ratio for
suspension means
D/d
Steel wire ropes acc. EN12385-5 with safety
factor calculation according EN81-50:2018,5.12
and discard based on ISO4344
40
Steel wire ropes with lifetime testing 30
Steel wire ropes with coated traction sheave 40
Elastomeric coated belts 40
Elastomeric coated ropes 24
The ratio between the pitch diameter of sheaves, pulleys or drums and the nominal diameter of the
suspension ropes shall be at least 40, regardless of the number of strands of the suspension ropes.
5.5.2.2 Safety factor of the suspension meansThe safety factor of the suspension means shall not be
less than:
5.5.2.2.1 The safety factor of the non-coated suspension means shall not be less than:
a) 12 in the case of traction drive with three ropes or more;
b) 16 in the case of traction drive with two ropes;
c) 12 in the case of drum drive and hydraulic lifts with ropes;
d) 10 in the case of chains.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 103
In addition, the safety factor of suspension ropes for traction lifts shall not be less than that calculated
according to ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.12.
The safety factor is the ratio between the minimum breaking load of one rope, in newtons, and the maximum
force in this rope, in newtons, when the car is stationary at the lowest landing, with its rated load.
For positive and hydraulic drives, the safety factor of balancing weight ropes or chains shall be calculated as
above, in relation to the rope/chain force due to the weight of the balancing weight.
5.5.2.2.2 The safety factor of elastomeric coated suspension means shall not be less than:
a) 12 in case of the residual breaking force (RBF) is equal or higher than 60% of the minimum breaking force
(MBF) and traction drive with three suspension means or more;
b) 12 in case of the residual breaking force (RBF) is equal or higher than 80% of the minimum breaking force
(MBF) and traction drive with two suspension means;
c) 16 in case of the residual breaking force (RBF) is equal or higher than 60% of the minimum breaking force
(MBF) and traction drive with two suspension means.
The residual breaking force (RBF) is the force the suspension means can withstand at the end of the specified
lifetime. It is specified in percentage of the initial minimum breaking force (MBF).
5.5.2.2.3 The safety factor of non-coated alternative suspension means shall not be less than 5.5.2.2.1 a)
and 5.5.2.2.1 b).
5.5.2.2.4 Fatigue lifetime
5.5.2.2.4.1 General provisions
For non-coated ropes with D/d < 40, or d < 6 mm, or running on elastomeric coated grooves and for
elastomeric coated ropes and belts the methods for fatigue lifetime testing and monitoring according to Table
11 shall be followed.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
104 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Table 11: Methods for fatigue lifetime testing and monitoring
Bending test
to prove
fatigue
lifetime limit
EN 81-50,
5.13.5
Bending
counter
5.5.2.2.4.2,
5.5.2.2.4.3
Suspension
means
physical
strength
monitoring *
5.5.2.2.4.2,
5.5.2.2.4.4
Diameter
reduction
check with
special gauge
5.5.2.2.4.5
Visual
inspection
with
discarding
criteria acc.
ISO4344
Visual
inspection
with
discarding
criteria acc.
EN 81-50,
5.14
Steel wire ropes
acc. EN12385-5
6mm≤d<8mm
D/d≥40
X
Steel wire ropes
6mm≤d<8mm
30≤D/d<40
X X X
Steel wire ropes
4mm≤d<6mm
D/d≥30
X X X X
Steel wire ropes
4mm≤d<6mm
Coated traction
sheave; D/d≥40
X X X
Elastomeric
coated
suspension
means, RBL
≥80% MBL
X X X
Elastomeric
coated
suspension
means, RBL
≥80% MBL
X X X
Elastomeric
coated
suspension
X X X
Formatted Table
Formatted: Dutch (Netherlands)
Formatted: English (United States)
Formatted: English (United States)ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 105
means, RBL 60%
to 80% MBL
5.5.2.2.4.2 General discarding monitoring device operational requirements
Bending fatigue counters or strength monitoring systems shall comply with the following requirements:
a) When the monitoring means becomes inoperative or indicates discard condition has been reached, the
lift shall stop at the next requested landing and open the doors. After 20 seconds, the doors shall be closed
and further normal operation shall be prevented and door open button shall remain active.
b) If the lift is in firefighting operation, inspection operation, earthquake or evacuation operation mode at
the moment the discard condition was reached, this mode shall continue until it is terminated. Then further
normal operation shall be prevented.
c) Once the lift has been taken out of normal operation because the discard condition was reached, it shall
only be allowed to move the car under inspection or rescue operations or emergency electrical operation.
d) An indicator shall provide notification when the monitoring means has taken the lift out of normal
operation.
e) The monitoring means shall maintain critical data for verification of discard status through power loss
conditions.
f) The critical data shall not be lost in case of device failure
g) The monitoring means shall be provided with a device for resetting after replacement of the suspension
means; the resetting device shall be accessible to authorized persons only .
h) The monitoring means may be a part of the control system or a separate monitoring device.
5.5.2.2.4.3 Bending fatigue counter
Bending fatigue counter, when provided, shall be based on one of following options:
a) Every start shall be counted as a full trip
b) Every direction change shall be counted as a full trip
c) For every section of the suspension means simple bending/reverse bending is counted ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
106 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
When the maximum number of bends (simple and reverse) is reached, the monitoring means shall indicate
the discard condition. Releveling trips can be excluded.
NOTE: Full trip is understood as a trip from the lowest floor to the highest floor
Simple Bending:
Bending sequence for one simple bend (Nsim = 1) of an alternative suspension or compensation means
straight – bend – straight = Nsim = 1 or
bend – straight – bend = Nsim = 1
Reverse Bending:
Bending sequence for one reverse bend (Nrev = 1) of an alternative suspension or compensation means.
bend – straight – reverse bend = Nrev = 1 or = Nrev = 1
The maximum allowed number of trips for the lift application shall be
Nlift = N / 1,5, or
Nlift = N – 600 000,
whichever is smaller, where
N = 1 / ((nSB/NSB) + (nRB/NRB))
Nlift maximum number of allowed trips for the lift application
N calculated number of trips
nSB number of simple bends experienced by the most stressed suspension means section during one full trip
(lowest landing to top landing) of the lift
nRB number reverse bends experienced by the most stressed suspension means section during one full trip
(lowest landing to top landing) of the lift
NSB tested number of simple bends according to EN 81-50, 5.13.5
NRB tested number of reverse bends according to EN 81-50, 5.13.5
Formatted: English (United States)
Formatted: English (United States)ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 107
If different sheaves are used in the lift system, the sheave with the smallest D/d ratio shall be considered
unless individual NSB and NSR values for each D/d ratio are known.
For timing belts and elastomeric coated belts regardless of the distance mentioned in EN81-50:2018, 5.12.2.3
between the sheaves and also for travelling sheaves, reverse bend shall always be considered, unless the belt
is twisted to prevent a reverse bending.
5.5.2.2.4.4 Suspension means physical strength monitoring
The physical strength monitoring systems, where provided, shall be applied to each suspension member or
the entire suspension system of the lift.
The monitoring system shall:
a) Measure physical parameter(s) of the installed elastomeric coated suspension means that correlates to
strength degradation as the coated suspension means fatigues.
b) Based on the physical measurement(s), calculate the RBL for each coated suspension means or the
suspension system.
c) The device shall ensure the determination of the residual breaking force (RBF) with a statistical
confidence level of not less than 95%.
d) Calculate the 95% confidence factor considering all error conditions applicable to the monitoring
methodology.
e) Continuously measure the entire suspension means or for those methods that rely on car position the
system shall keep a record of all suspension sections and their respective degradation.
f) The monitoring system determines, that the suspension means have degraded to an RBL of 60% MBL
shall be able to identify the reduction of the breaking force in the weakest section.
g) Remove the lift from service when the monitoring system determines, that the suspension means have
degraded to the applicable RBL according to table 11.
To correlate the measured physical parameter(s) to residual strength, the coated suspension means shall be
fatigued according to the method described in EN 81-50, 5.13.5. The number of coated suspension means
required for testing shall be sufficient to support the 95% confidence factor required.
5.5.2.2.4.5 Diameter reduction of non-coated steel wire ropes d<6mm
The gauge applied to measure the diameter reduction shall be verified with a test according to EN
81-50, 5.13.5. The tests shall prove that at a diameter reduction of 6% related to the nominal diameter the
residual breaking force (RBF) is not less than 80% of the minimum breaking force (MBF).ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
108 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.5.2.3 The junction between the suspension means rope and its the rope termination, designed for its
specific application of the suspension means and shall beaccording to 5.5.2.3.1, shall be able to resist at least
80 % of the minimum breaking load of the suspension meansrope.
5.5.2.3.1 The ends of the non-coated ropes shall be fixed to the car, counterweight or balancing weight, or
suspension points of the dead parts of reeved ropes by means of self-tightening wedge type sockets, (e.g.
according to EN 13411-6 or EN 13411-7), ferrule secured eyes (e.g. according to EN 13411-3), or swage
terminals (e.g. according to EN 13411-8).
NOTE Steel wire rRope terminations according to EN 13411-3, EN 13411-6, EN 13411-7 and EN 13411-8 can be
assumed to achieve at least 80 % of the minimum braking load of the rope.
5.5.2.3.2 The ends of elastomeric coated ropes and traction belts shall be fixed with terminations according
to the following requirements:
a) terminations shall be made of metal and of self-tightening wedge style sockets and shall be able to resist
at least 80% of the minimum breaking load of the suspension member;
b) the socket shall comply with requirements specified in EN13411-6:2008, 5 or EN 13411-7:2006, 5 with
the following deviations:
1) the clamping length between the socket body and the wedge, being in contact with the live portion
of the suspension means, shall be defined by the manufacturer of the termination, if necessary based on
the data provided by the manufacturer of the elastomeric coated ropes and belts;
2) the temperature properties of the material shall consider the environmental conditions defined in
5.5;
c) to allow checking the correct matching of the interacting component parts, the socket body and the
wedge shall be marked with:
1) the type designation of the elastomeric coated rope/belt intended for application with the
termination;
2) the highest permissible minimum breaking force (MBF) of the elastomeric coated rope/belt shall be
marked permanently on the socket;
d) for belt terminations and coated ropes not applying a U-bolt wire rope grip the wedge shall be protected
against falling out of the socket in case of a slack suspension situation.
5.5.2.3.3 The ends of elastomeric coated timing belts shall be fixed with terminations either according to
5.5.2.3.2 or shall be clamped with positive secured terminations according to the following requirements:
a) at least 9 teeth shall be clamped;
b) the termination shall be capable to carry at least 80% of minimum breaking load;
c) the fatigue cycles shall be verified according to EN 81-50, 5.13.3;ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 109
5.5.2.3.24 The fixing of the ropes on drums shall be carried out using a system of blocking with wedges, or
using at least two clamps.
5.5.2.4 The ends of each chain shall be fixed to the car, counterweight or balancing weight, or suspension
points of the dead parts of reeved chains. The junction between the chain and the chain termination shall be
able to resist at least 80 % of the minimum breaking load of the chain.
5.4.135.5.3 Suspension meansRope traction/transmission
NOTE Examples of design considerations are given in ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.11.
5.5.3.1 Rope traction shall be such that the following three conditions are fulfilled:
a) the car shall be maintained at floor level without slip when loaded to 125 %, as per 5.4.2.1 or 5.4.2.2;
b) it shall be ensured that any emergency braking causes the car, whether empty or with rated load, to
decelerate to a speed which is lower than or equal to the speed for which the buffers are designed,
including reduced stroke buffer;
c) it shall not be possible to raise the empty car, or the counterweight, to a dangerous position if either the
car or the counterweight is stalled; either:
1) the ropes shall slip on the traction sheave; or
2) the machine shall be stopped by an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2.
NOTE Examples of design considerations are given in ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.11.
5.5.3.2 The traction of non-coated steel wire ropes with elastomeric coated traction sheaves shall be
calculated according to EN 81-50, 5.11.2 using friction factors which shall be evaluated according to EN 81-
50, 5.13.6.1.
5.5.3.3 The traction of elastomeric coated ropes and traction belts shall be calculated according to EN 81-
50, 5.11.2, excluding stalled condition, using friction factors which shall be evaluated according to EN 81-50,
5.13.6.1. The verification of slip and emergency stop resistance shall be verified by testing according EN 81-
50, 5.13.8.
5.5.3.4 The power transmission between the timing belt and the sprocket shall be such that the following
3 conditions are fulfilled:
a) the car shall be maintained at floor level without slip when loaded to 125 % as per 5.4.2.1 or 5.4.2.2;
b) it shall be ensured that any emergency braking causes the car, whether empty or with rated load, to
decelerate to a speed which is lower or equal than the speed for which the buffers are designed, including
reduced stroke buffer;
Formatted: NoteISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
110 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
c) lifting of the car or counterweight shall be prevented by stopping the lift machine by an electric safety
device in conformity with 5.11.2.
Sprocket tooth contact shall be evaluated according to EN 81-50, 5.13.6.3
NOTE Some lifting of the car or counterweight is acceptable, provided there is no risk of crushing at the extremes
of travel, or falling back of the car, or counterweight causing impact forces on the means of suspension, and excessive
retardation of the car.
5.5.3.5 For elastomeric coated suspension means lifting of the car or counterweight shall be prevented by
stopping the lift machine by an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2.
5.4.145.5.4 Winding up of ropes for positive drive lifts
5.5.4.1 The drum, which can be used in the conditions laid down in 5.9.2.1.1 b), shall be helically grooved
and the grooves shall be suited to the ropes used.
5.5.4.2 When the car rests on its fully compressed buffers, one and a half turns of rope shall remain in
the grooves of the drum.
5.5.4.3 There shall only be one layer of rope wound on the drum.
5.5.4.4 The angle of deflection (fleet angle) of the ropes in relation to the grooves shall not exceed 4.
5.4.155.5.5 Distribution of load between the suspension means ropes or the chains
5.5.5.1 An automatic device shall be provided for equalizing the tension of meanssuspension ropes or
chains, at least at one of their ends.
5.5.5.1.1 For or elastomeric coated timing beltschains engaging with sprockets, the ends fixed to the car
as well as the ends fixed to the balancing/counter weight shall be provided with such equalization devices.
5.5.5.1.2 For chains or elastomeric coated timing belts in the case of multiple return sprockets on the same
shaft, these sprockets shall be able to rotate independently.
5.5.5.2 If springs are used to equalize the tension, they shall work in compression.
5.5.5.3 Protection in the case of abnormal extension, slack rope or slack suspension means chain shall
be provided as follows:
a) in the case of two rope or two chain suspension of the car, an electric safety device in conformity with
5.11.2 shall cause the machine to stop in case of abnormal relative extension of one suspension
memberrope or chain;
b) for positive drive lifts and hydraulic lifts, if the risk of slack suspension means rope (or chain) exists, an
electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2 shall cause the machine to stop when slack occurs.
After stopping, normal operation shall be prevented.
Formatted: English (United States)
Formatted: English (United States)ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 111
For hydraulic lifts with two or more jacks, this requirement applies for each suspension set.
5.5.5.4 The devices for adjusting the length of suspension means ropes or chains shall be made in such a
way that these devices cannot work themselves loose after adjustment.
5.4.165.5.6 Compensation means
5.5.6.1 Compensation for the weight of the suspension meansropes in order to ensure adequate
traction or hoisting motor power shall be provided in accordance with the following conditions:
a) compensation ropes shall comply with requirements in 5.5.1, 5.5.2 and 5.5.5 excluding requirements on
sheave diameter and safety factor;
b) for rated speeds not exceeding 3,0 m/s, means such as chains, ropes or belts may be used;
c) for rated speeds exceeding 3,0 m/s, compensation ropes or belts shall be provided;
d) for lifts whose rated speed exceeds 3,5 m/s there shall be, in addition, an anti-rebound device;
The operation of the anti-rebound device shall initiate the stopping of the lift machine by means of an
electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2;
e) for rated speeds exceeding 1,75 m/s, compensation means without tensioning shall be guided at the
vicinity of the loop.
5.5.6.2 Whenever compensation ropes are used, the following shall apply:
a) compensating ropes shall be as specified in EN 12385-5 or ISO 4344;
b) tensioning pulleys shall be used;
c) the ratio between the pitch diameter of the tensioning pulleys and the nominal diameter of the load
bearing member compensating ropes shall be at least 30;
d) tensioning pulleys shall have protection according to 5.5.7;
e) the tension shall be provided by gravity;
f) the tension shall be checked by an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2.
5.5.6.3 Compensation means, e.g. ropes, chains, belts and their terminations, shall be capable of
withstanding, with a safety factor of 5, any static forces to which the means is subjected.
The maximum suspended weight of compensation means, with car or counterweight at the top of its travel,
and one-half total weight of tension sheave assembly, where used, shall be included.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
112 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.4.175.5.7 Protection for sheaves, pulleys and sprockets
5.5.7.1 For sheaves, pulleys and sprockets, overspeed governors, tension weight pulleys, provisions shall
be made according to Table 10 12 to avoid:
a) body injury;
b) the ropes/ belts/chains leaving the pulleys/sprockets, if slack;
c) the introduction of objects between ropes/ belts/chains and pulleys/sprockets.
Table 10 12 — Protection for sheaves, pulleys and sprockets
Location of sheaves, pulleys and sprockets
Risk according to 5.5.7.1
a b c
At the car
on the roof x x x
under the floor x x
On the counterweight/balancing weight x x
In machine and pulley rooms xa x xb
In the well
Headroom
above car x²) x
beside car x x
Between pit and headroom x xb
Pit x²) x x
Jack
Extending upwards xa x
Extending downwards x xb
With mechanical synchronizing
means x x x
x The risk shall be taken into account.
a Protection shall be nip guards as a minimum, preventing accidental access to areas where ropes/
belts/chains enter or leave the sheaves, pulleys or sprockets (See Figure 1825).
b Required only if the ropes/belts/chains are entering the traction sheave or the pulley/sprocket
horizontally or at any angle above the horizontal, up to a maximum of 90°.
Commented [IJ95]: See N1538
Commented [IJ96]: See N1538ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 113
Key
1 pulley
2 rope, belt
3 nip guard
Figure 18 25 — Example of nip guard
5.5.7.2 The devices used shall be constructed so that the rotating parts are visible, and do not hinder
examination and maintenance operation. If they are perforated, the gaps shall comply with ISO 13857:2008,
Table 4.
The dismantling shall be necessary only in the following cases:
a) replacement of a rope/belt/chain;
b) replacement of a pulley/sprocket;
c) re-cutting of the grooves.
The devices for preventing the ropes/belts/chains from leaving the grooves or contact surface of pulleys or
sprockets shall include one retainer at maximum 15° from near the points where the ropes/belts/chains
enter and leave the pulleys/sprockets according to 5.4.2.2.1 b) 4), and at least one intermediate retainer if
more than 60° of the angle of wrap is arranged below the horizontal axis of the pulley and the total angle of
wrap is more than 120° (see Figure 1926).
In addition pulleys for flat belts shall be provided with axial retainers to prevent leaving of the pulley.
Where the angle of wrap is equal to or less than 30o only one retainer is required positioned centrally
between the entry and exit point of the rope/belt/chain onto the pulley/sprocket.
Commented [IJ97]: See N17xxISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
114 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Key
1 in conformance with 5.5.7.2
2 not in conformance with 5.5.7.2
Figure 19 26 — Examples of arrangements of rope retainers
5.4.185.5.8 Traction sheaves, pulleys and sprockets in the well
Traction sheaves, pulleys and sprockets may be installed in the well above the lowest landing level under the
following conditions:
a) there shall be retaining devices to prevent diverter pulleys/sprockets from falling in the event of a
mechanical failure. These devices shall be able to support the weight of the pulley/sprockets and the
suspended loads;
b) if traction sheaves, pulleys/sprockets are placed in the vertical projection of the car, then clearances in
the headroom shall be according to 5.2.5.7.
5.5.9 Marking
Suspension/compensation means shall be marked directly on the means in case of coated means or on a tag
in case of non-coated means with following information
− Manufacturer identification, e.g. trademark, address
− Product identification, e.g. ident number, type name
− Traceability information, e.g. batch number, production date
− Minimum breaking load [kN]
− Number of the certificate according to EN 81-50, 5.13.9, if required, or of the certificate based on EN
12385-5.
Any tag shall be fixed to the end termination after installation of the suspension/compensation means.
Termination socket and wedge shall be marked according 5.5.2.3.2 c).
Traction sheave, sprocket or traction drive shall be marked with following information:
− Manufacturer identification, e.g. trademark, address
− Product identification, e.g. ident number, type name
− The designation and type of applicable suspension means
− Hardness and roughness information if required according EN 81-50, 5.13.9.
2ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 115
This marking can be done via directly marking on sheave, sprocket or a permanently-installed data tag
delivered with the traction sheave, sprocket or traction drive.
5.55.6Precautions against free fall, excessive speed, unintended car movement and
creeping of the car
5.5.15.6.1 General provisions
5.6.1.1 Devices, or combinations of devices and their actuation shall be provided to prevent the car from:
a) free fall;
b) excessive speed, either downwards, or up and down in the case of traction lifts;
c) unintended movement, with open doors;
d) in the case of hydraulic lifts, creeping from a landing level.
5.6.1.2 For traction and positive drive lifts, the protection means in Table 11 13 shall be provided.
Table 11 13 — Protection means for traction and positive drive lifts
Hazardous situation Protection means Tripping means
Free fall and excessive speed in down
direction of car
Safety gear
(5.6.2.1)
Overspeed governor (5.6.2.2.1)
Free fall of counterweight or balancing
weight in the case of 5.2.5.4
Safety gear
(5.6.2.1)
Overspeed governor (5.6.2.2.1), or for
rated speeds not exceeding 1 m/s:
— tripping by breakage of suspension
means (5.6.2.2.2); or
— tripping by safety rope (5.6.2.2.3).
Excessive speed in up direction
(traction lifts only)
Ascending car overspeed
protection means
(5.6.6)
Included in 5.6.6
Unintended car movement with open
doors
Protection against
unintended car
movement
(5.6.7)
Included in 5.6.7ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
116 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.6.1.3 For hydraulic lifts, devices, or combinations of devices and their actuation, shall be provided in
accordance with Table 1214. In addition, protection against unintended movement according to 5.6.7 shall
be provided.
Table 12 14 — Protection means for hydraulic lifts
Type of
lifts
Alternative combinations
to be selected
Precautions against creeping
in addition to re-levelling (5.12.1.1.4)
Tripping of safety
gear
(5.6.2.1)
by downward
movement of the
car
(5.6.2.2.4)
Pawl device
(5.6.5)
Electrical
anti-creep
system
(5.12.1.10)
Precautions
against free
fall or
descent with
excessive
speed
Direct
acting
lifts
Safety gear (5.6.2.1),
tripped by overspeed governor
(5.6.2.2.1)
X X X
Rupture valve (5.6.3) X X
Restrictor (5.6.4) X
Indirect
acting
lifts
Safety gear (5.6.2.1),
tripped by overspeed governor
(5.6.2.2.1)
X X X
Rupture valve (5.6.3)
plus safety gear (5.6.2.1)
tripped by breakage of suspension
means (5.6.2.2.2)
or by safety rope (5.6.2.2.3)
X X X
Restrictor (5.6.4)
plus safety gear (5.6.2.1)
tripped by breakage of suspension
means (5.6.2.2.2)
or by safety rope (5.6.2.2.3)
X X
5.5.25.6.2 Safety gear and its tripping means
Safety gear
5.5.2.1.15.6.2.1.1 General provisions
5.6.2.1.1.1 The safety gear shall be capable of operating in the downward direction and stopping a car
carrying the rated load, or a counterweight or balancing weight at the tripping speed of the overspeed
Commented [IJ98]: Already changed by ISO
Formatted: No bullets or numberingISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 117
governor, or if the suspension devices break, by gripping the guide rails, and of holding the car,
counterweight or balancing weight there.
A safety gear which has the additional function of operating in the upward direction may be used in
accordance with 5.6.6.
5.6.2.1.1.2 The safety gear is regarded as a safety component and shall be verified according to the
requirements in ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.3.
5.6.2.1.1.3 A data plate shall be fixed on safety gear, indicating:
a) the name of the manufacturer of the safety gear;
b) the type examination certificate number;
c) the type of safety gear;
d) if adjustable, the safety gear shall be marked with:
1) the permissible load range; or
2) the adjustment parameter, if the relationship with the load range is specified in the instruction
manual.
5.5.2.1.25.6.2.1.2 Conditions of use for different types of safety gear
5.6.2.1.2.1 The car safety gear:
a) shall be of the progressive type; or
b) may be of the instantaneous type, if the rated speed of the lift does not exceed 0,63 m/s.
For hydraulic lifts, instantaneous type safety gears other than of the captive roller type (which are not tripped
by an overspeed governor) shall only be used if the tripping speed of the rupture valve, or the maximum
speed of the restrictor (or one-way restrictor), does not exceed 0,80 m/s.
5.6.2.1.2.2 If the car or counterweight or balancing weight carries several safety gears, they shall all be
of the progressive type.
5.6.2.1.2.3 The safety gear of the counterweight or balancing weight shall be of the progressive type, if
the rated speed exceeds 1,0 m/s. Otherwise, the safety gear may be of the instantaneous type.
5.5.2.1.35.6.2.1.3 Retardation
For progressive safety gear, the average retardation in the case of free fall of the car with rated load, or the
counterweight or the balancing weight, shall lie between 0,2 gn and 1 gn.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
118 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.5.2.1.45.6.2.1.4 Release
5.6.2.1.4.1 The release and automatic reset of a safety gear on the car, counterweight or balancing weight
shall only be possible by raising the car, counterweight or balancing weight.
5.6.2.1.4.2 The release of the safety gear shall be possible at all load conditions up to the rated load:
a) by means defined for emergency operations (5.9.2.3 or 5.9.3.9); or
b) in application of procedures available on site (7.2.2).
5.6.2.1.4.3 After release of the safety gear, it shall require the intervention of a competent maintenance
person competent in maintenance procedures to return the lift to service.
NOTE The activation of the main switch is not sufficient by itself to allow the lift to be returned to service.
5.5.2.1.55.6.2.1.5 Electrical checking
When the car safety gear is engaged, an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2, mounted on the car,
shall initiate the stopping of the machine before or at the moment of safety gear operation.
5.5.2.1.65.6.2.1.6 Constructional conditions
5.6.2.1.6.1 Jaws or blocks of safety gears shall not be used as guide shoes.
5.6.2.1.6.2 If the safety gear is adjustable, the final setting shall be sealed in such a way to prevent re
adjustment without breaking the seal.
5.6.2.1.6.3 Accidental tripping of the safety gear shall be prevented as far as possible, e.g. by sufficient
clearance to guide rails to allow horizontal movements of guide shoes.
5.6.2.1.6.4 Safety gears shall not be tripped by devices, which operate electrically, hydraulically or
pneumatically.
5.6.2.1.6.5 When a safety gear is tripped, either by the breakage of the suspension means or by a safety
rope, it shall be it shall be considered that assumed that the safety gear is tripped at a speed corresponding
to the tripping speed of an appropriate overspeed governor.
Means of tripping the safety gear
5.5.2.2.15.6.2.2.1 Tripping by overspeed governor
5.6.2.2.1.1 General provisions
The following shall be satisfied:
a) tripping of the overspeed governor for the safety gear shall occur at a speed at least equal to 115 % of
the rated speed, and less than:
Commented [IJ99]: See N1538
Commented [IJ100]: See N1537 and WG1 CommentsISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 119
1) 0,8 m/s for instantaneous safety gears, except for the captive roller type; or
2) 1,0 m/s for safety gears of the captive roller type; or
3) 1,50 m/s for progressive safety gear used for rated speeds not exceeding 1,0 m/s; or
4) for progressive safety gear for rated speeds exceeding 1,0 m/s [see Formula (6)]:
⋅ + 0,25 1,25 v v (6)
where v is expressed in metres per second.
For lifts where the rated speed exceeds 1,0 m/s, it is recommended to choose a tripping speed as close
as possible to the value required in 4).
For lifts with low rated speed, it is recommended to choose a tripping speed as close as possible to the
lower limit indicated in a);
b) overspeed governors using only traction to produce the tripping force shall have grooves which:
— have been submitted to an additional hardening process; or
— have an undercut in accordance with ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.11.2.3.1;
c) the direction of rotation, corresponding to the operation of the safety gear, shall be marked on the
overspeed governor;
d) the tensile force in the overspeed governor rope produced by the governor, when tripped, shall be at
least the greater of the following two values:
— twice that necessary to engage the safety gear; or
— 300 N.
5.6.2.2.1.2 Response time
In order to ensure tripping of the overspeed governor before a dangerous speed can be reached
(see ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.3.2.3.1), the maximum distance between tripping points on the governor shall not
exceed 250 mm related to the movement of the governor rope.
5.6.2.2.1.3 Overspeed governor ropes
The rope of an overspeed governor shall satisfy the following conditions:
a) the overspeed governor shall be driven by a wire rope as specified in EN 12385-5 or ISO 4344;
Formatted: Font color: Blue
Commented [IJ101]: Already corrected by ISOISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
120 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
b) the minimum breaking load of the rope shall be related by a safety factor of at least 8 to the tensile force
produced in the rope of the overspeed governor when tripped, taking into account a friction factor µmax
equal to 0,2 for traction type overspeed governor;
c) the ratio between the pitch diameter of the pulleys for the overspeed governor rope and the nominal
rope diameter shall be at least 30;
d) the overspeed governor rope shall be tensioned by a pulley with a tensioning weight. This pulley or its
tensioning weight shall be guided;
e) the overspeed governor may be a part of the tensioning device provided that its tripping values are not
altered by the movement of the tensioning device;
f) during the engagement of the safety gear, the overspeed governor rope and its terminations shall remain
intact, even in the case of a braking distance greater than normal;
g) the overspeed governor rope shall be easily detachable from the safety gear.
5.6.2.2.1.4 Accessibility
The overspeed governor shall meet the following conditions:
a) the overspeed governor shall be accessible and reachable for inspection and maintenance;
b) if located in the well, the overspeed governor shall be accessible and reachable from outside the well;
c) the requirement in b) does not apply if the following three conditions are fulfilled:
1) the tripping of the overspeed governor according to 5.6.2.2.1.5 is effected by means of a remote
control, except cableless, from outside the well, whereby an involuntary tripping is not effected and
the actuation device is not accessible to unauthorized persons;
2) the overspeed governor is accessible from the roof of the car or from the pit for inspection and
maintenance; and
3) the overspeed governor returns after tripping automatically into the normal position, as the car,
counterweight or balancing weight is moved in the upward direction.
However, the electrical parts may return into the normal position by remote control from the outside of the
well. This shall not influence the normal function of the overspeed governor.
5.6.2.2.1.5 Possibility of tripping the overspeed governor
During checks or tests, it shall be possible to operate the safety gear at a lower speed than that indicated
in 5.6.2.2.1.1 a), by tripping the overspeed governor in a safe way.
If the overspeed governor is adjustable, the final setting shall be sealed in such a way to prevent re
adjustment without breaking the seal.
5.6.2.2.1.6 Electrical checkingISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 121
The following shall be met:
a) the overspeed governor or another device shall, by means of an electric safety device in conformity with
5.11.2, initiate the stopping of the lift machine before the car speed, either up or down, reaches the
tripping speed of the governor.
However, for rated speeds not exceeding 1,0 m/s, this device may operate at the latest at the moment
when the tripping speed of the governor is reached;
b) if, after release of the safety gear (5.6.2.1.4), the overspeed governor does not automatically reset itself,
an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2 shall prevent the starting of the lift while the
overspeed governor is not in the reset position. This device shall, however, be made inoperative in the
case provided for in 5.12.1.6.1 d) 2);
c) the breakage or excessive rope stretch of the governor rope shall cause the motor to stop by means of
an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2.
5.6.2.2.1.7 The overspeed governor is regarded as a safety component and shall be verified according to
the requirements in ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.4.
5.6.2.2.1.8 A data plate shall be fixed on the overspeed governor, indicating:
a) the name of the manufacturer of the overspeed governor;
b) the type examination certificate number;
c) the type of the overspeed governor;
d) the actual tripping speed for which it has been adjusted.
5.5.2.2.25.6.2.2.2 Tripping by breakage of suspension means
When the safety gear is tripped by the breakage of the suspension means, the following applies:
a) the tensile force exerted by the actuating mechanism shall be at least the greater of the following two
values:
1) twice that necessary to engage the safety gear; or
2) 300 N;
b) when springs are used for the tripping of the safety gear, they shall be of the guided compression type;
c) it shall be possible for a test of the safety gear, and its actuating mechanism, to be made without the need
to enter the well during the test;
Commented [IJ102]: See N1537
Agreed to delete last sentenceISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
122 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
To this end, a means shall be provided so that it is possible, while the car/counterweight is descending
(under normal operation), to activate the safety gear by a loss of tension in the suspension rope.
Where the means provided is mechanical, the force required to operate it shall not exceed 400 N.
After these tests, it shall be checked that no distortion or deterioration which could impair the use of the
lift has occurred.
NOTE It is acceptable for the equipment to operate the means to be stored within the well and moved outside when
a test is performed.
5.5.2.2.35.6.2.2.3 Tripping by safety rope
When the safety gear is tripped by a safety rope, the following applies:
a) the tensile force exerted by the safety rope shall be at least the greater of the following two values:
1) twice that necessary to engage the safety gear; or
2) 300 N;
b) the safety rope shall be in conformity with 5.6.2.2.1.3;
c) the rope shall be tensioned by gravity or by springs that do not affect the safe function, if broken;
d) during the engagement of the safety gear, the safety rope and its terminations shall remain intact, even
in the case of a braking distance greater than normal;
e) the breakage or slackening of the safety rope shall cause the machine to stop by means of an electric
safety device (5.11.2);
f) pulleys used for carrying the safety rope shall be mounted independently of any shaft or pulley assembly
that carries the suspension ropes or chains;
g) protection devices shall be provided in accordance with 5.5.7.1.
5.5.2.2.45.6.2.2.4 Tripping by downward movement of the car
5.5.2.2.4.15.6.2.2.4.1 Tripping by rope
Tripping by rope of the safety gear shall be actuated under the following conditions:
a) after a normal stop, a rope which satisfies 5.6.2.2.1.3, attached to the safety gear, shall be blocked with a
force defined in 5.6.2.2.3 a) (for example, the overspeed governor rope);
b) the rope blocking mechanism shall be released during normal movement of the car;
c) the rope blocking mechanism shall be actuated by guided compression spring(s) and/or by gravity;
Commented [IJ103]: WG1 comment
Commented [IJ104]: WG1 CommentISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 123
d) emergency rescue operation shall be possible in all circumstances;
e) an electric device which complies with the requirements of as per 5.11.2.2, associated with the rope
blocking mechanism shall cause stopping of the machine at the latest at the moment of blocking of the
rope, and shall prevent any further normal downward movement of the car;
f) precautions shall be taken to avoid involuntary tripping of the safety gear by the rope in case of
disconnection of the electric power supply during a downward movement of the car;
g) the design of the system of rope and rope blocking mechanism shall be such that no damage is possible
during the engagement of the safety gear;
h) the design of the system of rope and rope blocking mechanism shall be such that no damage is possible
by an upward movement of the car.
5.5.2.2.4.25.6.2.2.4.2 Tripping by lever
Tripping by lever of the safety gear shall be actuated under the following conditions:
a) after the normal stopping of the car, a lever attached to the safety gear shall be extended into a position
to engage with fixed stops, which are located at each landing;
b) the lever shall be retracted during the normal movement of the car;
c) the movement of the lever to the extended position shall be effected by guided compression spring(s)
and/or by gravity;
d) emergency operation shall be possible in all circumstances;
e) precautions shall be taken to avoid involuntary tripping of the safety gear by the lever, in case of the
disconnection of the electric power supply during a downward movement of the car;
f) the design of the lever and stops system shall be such that no damage is possible:
1) during the engagement of the safety gear, even in the case of longer braking distances;
2) by an upward movement of the car;
g) an electric device shall prevent any normal movement of the car when the tripping lever is not in its
extended position after normal stopping, the car doors shall be closed and the lift shall be taken out of
operation;
h) an electric safety device, in conformity with 5.11.2, shall prevent any normal down movement of the car
when the tripping lever is not in the retracted position.
Commented [IJ105]: See N1537ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
124 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.5.35.6.3 Rupture valve
5.6.3.1 The rupture valve shall be capable of stopping the car in downward movement, and of
maintaining it stationary. The rupture valve shall be tripped at the latest when the speed reaches a value
equal to rated speed downwards, vd, plus 0,30 m/s.
The rupture valve shall be selected so that the average retardation, a, lies between 0,2 gn and 1 gn.
Retardation of more than 2,5 gn shall not last longer than 0,04 s.
The average retardation, a, can be evaluated by Formula (7):
⋅ =
⋅ ⋅⋅
max
6 d
Q r a Ant
(7)
where
A is the area of jack where pressure is acting, expressed in square centimetres;
n is the number of parallel acting jacks with one rupture valve;
Qmax is the maximum flow, expressed in litres per minute;
r is the reeving factor;
td is the braking time, expressed in seconds.
5.6.3.2 The rupture valve shall be accessible for adjustment and inspection directly from the car roof, or
from the pit.
5.6.3.3 The rupture valve shall be:
a) integral with the cylinder;
b) directly and rigidly flange-mounted;
c) placed close to the cylinder and connected to it by means of short rigid pipes, having welded, flanged or
threaded connections; or
d) connected directly to the cylinder by threading.
The rupture valve shall be provided with a thread ending with a shoulder. The shoulder shall butt up against
the cylinder.
Other types of connections, such as compression fittings or flared fittings, are not permitted between the
cylinder and the rupture valve.
5.6.3.4 On lifts with several jacks, operating in parallel, one common rupture valve may be used.
Otherwise, the rupture valves shall be interconnected to cause simultaneous closing, in order to prevent the
floor of the car from inclining by more than 5 % from its normal position.
5.6.3.5 The rupture valve shall be calculated as the cylinder.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 125
5.6.3.6 If the closing speed of the rupture valve is controlled by a restricting device, a filter shall be
located as near as possible before this device.
5.6.3.7 There shall be, in the machinery space, a means which can be manually operated from outside of
the well, allowing to reach the tripping flow of the rupture valve without overloading the car. The means
shall be safeguarded against unintentional operation. It shall not neutralize the safety devices adjacent to the
jack.
5.6.3.8 The rupture valve is regarded as a safety component and shall be verified according to the
requirements in ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.9.
5.6.3.9 A data plate shall be fixed on the rupture valve, indicating:
a) the name of the manufacturer of the rupture valve;
b) the type examination certificate number;
c) the tripping flow for which it has been adjusted.
5.5.45.6.4 Restrictors
5.6.4.1 In the case of a major leakage in the hydraulic system, the restrictor shall prevent the speed of
the car with rated load in downward movement exceeding the rated speed downwards, vd, by more than
0,30 m/s.
5.6.4.2 The restrictor shall be accessible for inspection directly from the car roof or from the pit.
5.6.4.3 The restrictor shall be:
a) integral with the cylinder;
b) directly and rigidly flange-mounted;
c) placed close to the cylinder and connected to it by means of short rigid pipes, having welded, flanged or
threaded connections; or
d) connected directly to the cylinder by threading.
The restrictor shall be provided with a thread ending with a shoulder. This shall butt up against the cylinder.
Other types of connections such as compression fittings or flared fittings are not permitted between the
cylinder and the restrictor.
5.6.4.4 The restrictor shall be calculated as the cylinder.
5.6.4.5 In the machinery space, there shall be a means which can be manually operated from outside of
the well, allowing to reach the tripping flow of restrictor without overloading the car. The means shall be ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
126 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
safeguarded against unintentional operation. In no case shall it neutralize the safety devices adjacent to the
jack.
5.6.4.6 Only the one-way restrictor where mechanical moving parts are used is regarded as a safety
component and shall be verified according to the requirements in ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.9.
5.6.4.7 A data plate shall be fixed on the one-way restrictor where mechanical moving parts are used
(5.6.4.6), indicating:
a) the name of the manufacturer of the one-way restrictor;
b) the type examination certificate number;
c) the tripping flow for which it has been adjusted.
5.5.55.6.5 Pawl device
5.6.5.1 The pawl device shall operate only in the downward direction, and be capable of stopping the
car, with a load according to Table 6 (5.4.2.1), and maintaining it stationary on fixed stops:
a) for lifts provided with a restrictor or one-way restrictor: from a speed of vd + 0,30 m/s; or
b) for all other lifts: from a speed equal to 115 % of the downwards rated speed, vd.
5.6.5.2 At least one electrically retractable pawl shall be provided, designed in its extended position to
stop the downward moving car against fixed supports.
5.6.5.3 For each landing, supports shall be provided and arranged at two levels:
a) to prevent the car from sinking below the landing level by more than 0,12 m; and
b) to stop the car at the lower end of the unlocking zone.
5.6.5.4 The movement of the pawl(s) to the extended position shall be effected by guided compression
spring(s) and/or gravity.
5.6.5.5 The supply to the electric retraction device shall be interrupted when the machine is stopped.
5.6.5.6 The design of the pawl(s) and supports shall be such that, whatever the position of the pawl, the
car cannot be stopped or any damage caused during the upward movement.
5.6.5.7 A buffering system shall be incorporated in the pawl device (or in the fixed supports).
5.6.5.7.1 Buffers shall be of the following types:
a) energy accumulation; or
b) energy dissipation.
Commented [IJ106]: China comment
The clause cannot be clearly understood. Some experts
think: the real meaning of 5.6.5.3 should be “for each
landing supports shall be provided arranged at closer
level from the landing between a) and b)
Q1: is the understanding correct
Q2: what is the real meaning of 5.6.5.3
Answer 1
No, the requirement is for two stops in the position
shown.
5.6.5.3 a) is intended to hold the car at the floor level.
The 0,12m corresponds to the maximum allowed travel
of the lift whilst compressing the buffer as required by
5.6.5.7.2.
If there is then a cause which prevents this from
engaging with the pawl device, a second stop shall be
engaged as positioned according to 5.6.5.3 b)
However, there is some incosistancy with the
requirement in case of an unlocking zone which is ≤
0,12m
This will be reviewed by WG1 at its meeting on the 7th
JuneISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 127
5.6.5.7.2 The requirements of 5.8.2 apply by analogy.
In addition, the buffer shall maintain the car stationary at a distance not exceeding 0,12 m below any
landingloading level when carrying the rated load.
5.6.5.8 When several pawls are provided, precautions shall be taken to ensure that all pawls engage on
their respective supports, even in the case of disconnection of the electrical power supply during a downward
movement of the car.
5.6.5.9 An electric safety device which complies with the requirements of 5.11.2 shall prevent any
downward movement of the car when a pawl is not in the retracted position.
5.6.5.9.1 The pawl device shall be checked electrically in the extended position when the car stops.
5.6.5.9.2 If the pawl device is not in the extended position:
a) an electric device, which complies with the requirements of 5.11.2.2, shall prevent the opening of the
doors and any normal movement of the car;
b) the pawl device shall be fully retracted and the car shall be sent to the lowest level served by the lift; and
c) the doors shall open to allow persons to leave the car and the lift shall be taken out of operation.
Return to normal operation shall require the intervention of a competent maintenance person competent in
maintenance procedures.
5.6.5.10 If energy dissipation buffers [5.6.5.7.1 b)] are used, an electric safety device in conformity with
5.11.2 shall immediately initiate stopping of the machine if the car is travelling downwards and prevent
starting of the machine in downward motion, when the buffer is not in its normal extended position. The
power supply shall be interrupted according to 5.9.3.4.3.
5.5.65.6.6 Ascending car overspeed protection means
5.6.6.1 The means, comprising speed monitoring and speed reducing elements, shall detect overspeed
of the ascending car (see 5.6.6.10) and cause the car to stop, or at least reduce its speed to that for which the
counterweight buffer is designed. The means shall be active in:
a) normal operation;
b) manual rescue operation, unless there is a direct visual observation of the machine or the speed is limited
by other means to less than 115 % of the rated speed.
c) automatic rescue operation
Commented [IJ107]: See N1537
Commented [IJ108]: See N1538
Formatted: Body Text
Commented [IJ109]: See N1544ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
128 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.6.6.2 The means shall be capable of performing as required in 5.6.6.1 without assistance from any lift
component that controls the speed or retardation, or stops the car during normal operation, unless there is
built-in redundancy and correct operation is self-monitored.
In the case of using the machine brake, self-monitoring can include verification of correct lifting or dropping
of the mechanism or verification of the braking force. If a failure is detected, the next normal start of the lift
shall be prevented.
Self-monitoring is subject to type examination.
A mechanical linkage to the car, whether or not such linkage is used for any other purpose, may be used to
assist in this performance.
5.6.6.3 The means shall not allow a retardation of the empty car in excess of 1 gn during the stopping
phase.
5.6.6.4 The means shall act on:
a) the car;
b) the counterweight;
c) the rope system according to EN 12385-5 (suspension or compensationcompensating);
d) the traction sheave; or
e) the same shaft as the traction sheave, provided that the shaft is only statically supported in two points.
5.6.6.5 The means shall operate an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2 if it is engaged.
5.6.6.6 The release of the means shall not require access of a person enteringto the well.
5.6.6.7 After the release of the means, the return of the lift to normal operation shall require the
intervention of a competent maintenance person competent in maintenance procedures.
5.6.6.8 After its release, the means shall be in a condition to operate.
5.6.6.9 If the means requires external energy to operate, the absence of energy shall cause the lift to stop
and keep it stopped. This does not apply for guided compression springs.
5.6.6.10 The speed monitoring element of the lift, which causes the ascending car overspeed protection
means to actuate, shall be, either:
a) an overspeed governor conforming to the requirements of 5.6.2.2.1; or
b) a device conforming to;
1) 5.6.2.2.1.1 a) or 5.6.2.2.1.6 regarding the tripping speed;
Commented [IJ110]: To be aligned with 5.6.7.10
Commented [IJ111]: See N1538ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 129
2) 5.6.2.2.1.2 regarding the response time;
3) 5.6.2.2.1.4 regarding accessibility;
4) 5.6.2.2.1.5 regarding the possibility of tripping;
5) 5.6.2.2.1.6 b) regarding the electrical checking;
and where equivalence to 5.6.2.2.1.3 a), 5.6.2.2.1.3 b), 5.6.2.2.1.3 e), 5.6.2.2.1.5 (for sealing) and 5.6.2.2.1.6 c)
regarding those aspects is assured at the same time.
5.6.6.11 The ascending car overspeed protection means is regarded as a safety component and shall be
verified according to the requirements in ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.7.
5.6.6.12 A data plate shall be fixed on the ascending car overspeed protection means, indicating:
a) the name of the manufacturer;
b) the type examination certificate number;
c) the actual tripping speed for which it has been adjusted;
d) the type of ascending car overspeed protection means.
5.5.75.6.7 Protection against unintended car movement
5.6.7.1 Lifts shall be provided with a means to prevent or stop unintended car movement away from the
landing, with the landing door not in the locked position and the car door not in the closed position, as a
result of any single failure of the lift machine or drive control system on which the safe movement of the car
depends.
Excluded are failures of the:
1) suspension meansropes or chains;
2) the traction sheave, drum, or sprockets of the machine;
3) flexible hoses;
4) steel piping; and
5) cylinder.
A failure of the traction sheave includes a sudden loss of traction.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
130 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
No detection of the unintended car movement needs to be provided in lifts without levelling, re-levelling and
preliminary operations with doors open according to 5.12.1.4, if the stopping element is a machine brake
complying with 5.6.7.3 and 5.6.7.4.
Any slip due to the traction conditions at unintended movement stopping shall be taken into account for
calculation and or verification of the stopping distance.
5.6.7.2 The means shall detect unintended movement of the car, cause the car to stop, and keep it
stopped.
5.6.7.3 The means shall be capable of performing as required without assistance from any lift component
that , controls the speed or retardation, stops the car or keeps it stopped during normal operation, unless
there is built-in redundancy and correct operation is self-monitored.
NOTE Machine brakes according to 5.9.2.2.2 is considered to have built-in redundancy.
In the case of using the machine brake, self-monitoring can include verification of correct lifting or dropping
of the mechanism or verification of the braking force.
In the case of using two electrically commanded hydraulic valves operating in series for slowing and stopping
in normal operation, self-monitoring implies separate verification of correct opening or closing of each valve
under the empty car static pressure.
If a failure is detected, car and landing doors shall be closed and the normal start of the lift shall be prevented.
Self-monitoring is subject to type examination.
5.6.7.4 The stopping element of the means shall act on:
a) the car;
b) the counterweight;
c) the rope system according to EN 12385-5 (suspension or compensationcompensating);
d) the traction sheave;
e) the same shaft as the traction sheave, provided that the shaft is only statically supported in two points;
or
f) the hydraulic system (including the motor/pump in up direction by isolation of the electrical supply).
The stopping element of the means, or the means keeping the car stopped may be the same as those used for:
— preventing overspeed in down direction;
— preventing ascending car overspeed (5.6.6).
The stopping elements of the means may be different for the downward direction and for the upward
direction.
5.6.7.5 The means shall stop the car in a distance under the following conditions (see Figure 2027):
Commented [IJ112]: Re-worded by ISO editorISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 131
a) the stopping distance shall not exceed 1,20 m from the landing where the unintended car movement has
been detected;
b) the vertical distance between the landing sill and the lowest part of the car apron shall not exceed
200 mm;
c) in case of enclosures according to 5.2.5.2.3, the distance between the car sill and the lowest part of the
well wall facing the car entrance shall not exceed 200 mm;
d) the vertical distance from the car sill to the landing door lintel, or from the landing sill to the car door
lintel shall not be less than 1,0 m.
These values shall be obtained with any load in the car, up to 100 % of the rated load, moving away from a
standstill position at landing level.
Dimensions in millimetres
Key
1 car
2 well
3 landing
4 car apron
5 car entrance
Figure 20 27 — Unintended car movement — Downwards and upwards movementISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
132 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.6.7.6 During the stopping phase, the stopping element of the means shall not allow a retardation of the
car in excess of:
— 1 gn for unintended movements in the upward direction with an empty car;
— the values accepted for devices protecting against free fall in the downward direction.
5.6.7.7 The unintended movement of the car shall be detected by an electric safety device in conformity
with 5.11.2 at the latest when the car leaves the unlocking zone (5.3.8.1).
5.6.7.8 The means shall operate an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2 if it is engaged.
NOTE This can be common to the switching device of 5.6.7.7.
5.6.7.9 When the means has been activated or the self-monitoring has indicated a failure of the stopping
element of the means, its release, or the reset of the lift, shall require the intervention of a competent
maintenance person competent in maintenance procedures.
5.6.7.10 The release of the means shall not require persons to enter the well in order to access to the car
or the counterweight or balancing weight.
5.6.7.11 After its release, the means shall be in condition to operate.
5.6.7.12 If the means requires external energy to operate, the absence of energy shall cause the lift to stop
and keep it stopped. This does not apply for guided compression springs.
5.6.7.13 The unintended car movement with open doors protection means is regarded as a safety
component and shall be verified according to the requirements in ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.8.
5.6.7.14 A data plate shall be fixed on the unintended movement protection means, either for the complete
system or subsystems in accordance with ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.8.1, indicating:
a) the name of the manufacturer of the unintended movement protection means;
b) the type examination certificate number;
c) the type of unintended movement protection means.
5.65.7Guide rails
5.6.15.7.1 Guiding of the car, counterweight or balancing weight
5.7.1.1 The car, counterweight or balancing weight shall each be guided by at least two rigid steel guide
rails.
5.7.1.2 The guide rails shall be made of drawn steel, or the rubbing surfaces shall be machined.
Commented [IJ113]: See N1538
Commented [IJ114]: See N1538
Commented [IJ115]: As aligned with 5.6.6.6ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 133
5.7.1.3 Guide rails for counterweights or balancing weights without safety gear may be made of formed
metal sheet. They shall be protected against corrosion.
5.7.1.4 The fixing of the guide rails to their brackets and to the building shall permit compensation, either
automatically or by simple adjustment, of effects due to normal settling of the building or shrinkage of
concrete.
A rotation of the attachments by which the guide rails can be released shall be prevented.
5.7.1.5 For guide rail fixings containing non-metallic elements, the failure of these elements shall be
taken into account for calculation of permissible deflections.
5.6.25.7.2 Permissible stresses and deflections
General provisions
5.7.2.1.1 The guide rails, their joints and attachments shall withstand the loads and forces imposed on
them in order to ensure a safe operation of the lift.
The aspects of safe operation of the lift concerning guide rails are:
a) guidance of the car, counterweight or balancing weight shall be assured;
b) deflections shall be limited to such an extent that, due to them:
1) unintended unlocking of the doors shall not occur;
2) operation of the safety devices shall not be affected; and
3) collision of moving parts with other parts shall not be possible.
5.7.2.1.2 The combination of deflections of guide rails and deflections of brackets, play in the guide shoes,
and straightness of the guide rails and deflection of the building structure shall be taken into account in
order to ensure safe operation of the lift. See 0.4.2 negotiations and E.2.
Load cases
The following load cases shall be considered:
— normal operation — running;
— normal operation — loading and unloading;
— safety device operation.
NOTE 1 For each load case, a combination of forces can act on the guide rails (see 5.7.2.3.1).
Commented [IJ116]: See N1556ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
134 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
NOTE 2 Depending on the fixation of the guide rails (standing or hanging), the worst case is considered relevant for
the safety device providing the force to the rail.
Forces on guide rails
5.7.2.3.1 The following forces on guide rails shall be taken into account for calculation of permissible
stresses and deflections of guide rails:
a) horizontal forces from guide shoes due to:
1) masses of the car and its rated load, compensation means, travelling cables, etc. or the
counterweight/balancing weight, taking into consideration their suspension points and dynamic
impact factors; and
2) wind loads in case of lifts outside a building with partially enclosed well;
b) vertical forces from:
1) braking forces of safety devices gears and pawl devices fixed on guide rails;
2) auxiliary parts fixed on the guide rail;
3) weight of guide rail, and
4) push through forces of rail clips;
c) torques due to auxiliary equipment including dynamic impact factors.
5.7.2.3.2 The acting point, P, of the masses of the empty car and components supported by the car, such as
ram, part of travelling cable, compensation means compensating ropes/chains (if any) shall be the mass
centre of gravity of them.
5.7.2.3.3 The guiding forces of a counterweight, Mcwt, or balancing weight, Mbwt, shall be evaluated taking
into account:
— the acting point of the mass;
— the suspension; and
— the forces due to compensation means compensating ropes/chains (if any), tensioned or not.
On a counterweight or balancing weight, centrally guided and suspended, an eccentricity of the acting point
of the mass from the centre of gravity of the horizontal cross area of the counterweight or balancing weight
of at least 5 % of the width and 10 % of the depth shall be taken into consideration.
5.7.2.3.4 In load cases “normal use” and “safety device operation”, the rated load, Q, of the car shall be
evenly distributed over those three quarters of the car area being in the most unfavourable position.
Commented [IJ117]: See N1555
Formatted: LeftISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 135
However, if different load distribution conditions are intended after negotiations (0.4.2), additional
calculations shall be made on the basis of this condition, and the worst case shall be considered.
The braking force of safety devices shall be equally distributed on guide rails.
NOTE It is assumed that the safety devices operate simultaneously on the guide rails.
5.7.2.3.5 The vertical force, Fv, of the car, counterweight or balancing weight resulting in compression or
tension force shall be evaluated accordingly by using Formulae (8) to (12):
𝐹𝐹𝑣𝑣 =
𝑘𝑘1∙𝑔𝑔𝑛𝑛∙(𝑃𝑃+𝑄𝑄)
𝑛𝑛 + 𝑁𝑁 (8)
Where N is:
Car, Counterweight or Balancing
weight rails resting on the pit floor
𝑁𝑁 = (𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 ∙ 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 ) + (𝑛𝑛
𝑛𝑛 ∙ 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 ) (9)
Car, Counterweight or Balancing
weight rails freely hanging
(no fixing point)
𝑁𝑁 =
1
3 ∙ (�𝑀𝑀𝑔𝑔 ∙ 𝑔𝑔𝑛𝑛� + (𝑛𝑛
𝑏𝑏 ∙ 𝐹𝐹𝑟𝑟)) (10)
For travel heights not exceeding 40 m
and for buildings older than 10 years
(𝑛𝑛
𝑛𝑛 ∙ 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 ) = 0 (11)
NOTE Fp depends on the way the guide rail is supported, the number of fixations, brackets and clip design. For small travels the
effect of the settling of the building (not made of timber) is small and can be absorbed by the elasticity
of the brackets. In this case the use of non-sliding clips is of common practice.
In the case of guides which are fixed in top of the well (hanging guides) the calculations shall include the
tension from the hanging guide mass and safety gear application, and the forces which might be applied from
other safety devices (such as upwards overspeed protection), and the push through forces from building
shrinkage, some of which might be positive and/or negative.
( ) ( )
⋅ ⋅+
= + ⋅+ p
1
v g
n
n
k g PQ M g n F F for the car (8)
( )
⋅ ⋅ = + ⋅+ 1 cw
p
t
v g n
n
k gM M g n F F for the counterweight (9)
( )
⋅ ⋅ = + ⋅+ 1 bw
p
t
v g n
n
k gM M g n F F for the balancing weight (10)ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
136 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
= ⋅ p b r F n F in case of guide rails supported on the pit or hanging (fixed at the top of the well) (11)
= ⋅ p b r
1
3 F n F in case of freely hanging guide rails (no fixing point) (12)
where
Fp is the push through forces of all brackets at one guide rail (due to normal settling of the
building or shrinkage of concrete), in newtons;
Fr is the push through force of all clips per bracket, in newtons;
gn is the standard acceleration of free fall (9,81 m/s2);
k1 is the impact factor according to Table 14 16 (k1 = 0 in the case of no safety device acting on
guide rail);
Mg is the mass of one line of guide rails, in kilograms;
n is the number of guide rails lines;
nb is the number of brackets for a guide rail line;
P are the masses of the empty car and components supported by the car, i.e. part of the travelling
cable, compensation means compensating ropes/chains (if any), etc., in kilograms;
Q is the rated load, in kilograms.
NOTE Fp depends on the way the guide rail is supported, the number of fixations, brackets and clip design. For
small travels, the effect of the settling of the building (not made of timber) is small and can be absorbed by the elasticity
of the brackets. In this case, the use of non-sliding clips is common practice.
For travel heights not exceeding 40 m the force, Fp, may be ignored in the formula. The design shall allow for
adequate clearances above and/or below the guide rails depending on the fixation to allow for the shrinkage
of the building.
5.7.2.3.6 While loading or unloading a car, a vertical force on the sill, Fs, is assumed to act centrally on the
sill of the car entrance. The amount of the force applied on the sill shall be as Formulae (13) to (15):
= ⋅⋅ S 0,4 n F gQ for passenger lifts (1312)
= ⋅⋅ S 0,6 n F gQ for goods passenger lifts (1413)
= ⋅⋅ S 0,85 n F gQ for goods passenger lifts in the case of heavy handling devices,
if the weight of the device is not included in the rated load (1514)
NOTE 0,85 is based on the assumption of 0,6 · Q and half of the weight of the forklift truck, which — due to
experience — is not bigger than half the rated load: 0,6 + 0,5 · 0,5 = 0,85.
When applying the force on the sill, the car shall be regarded as empty. For cars with more than one entrance,
the force on the sill needs to be applied at the most unfavourable entrance only.
Commented [IJ118]: See N1555 and 1557ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 137
When the car is at the landing and the guide shoes (top and bottom of car) are positioned within 10 % of the
distance between the vertical guide rail brackets, the bending due to sill forces may be ignored.
5.7.2.3.7 Forces and torques per guide rail due to auxiliary equipment fixed to the guide rail, Maux, shall be
considered, except for overspeed governors and their associated parts, switches or positioning equipment.
If the machine or suspension means rope suspensions are fixed to the guide rails, additional load cases
according to the Table 13 shall be considered.
5.7.2.3.8 Windloads, WL, shall be considered with lifts outside a building with incomplete well enclosure,
and determined by negotiation with the building designer (0.4.2).
5.6.35.7.3 Combination of loads and forces
The loads and forces and the load cases to be taken into consideration are shown in Table 1315.
Table 13 15 — Loads and forces to be taken into consideration in the different load cases
Load cases Loads and
forces
P Q Mcwt/
Mbwt
Fs Fp Mg Maux WL
Normal
operation
Running x x x xa x x x
Loading +
unloading x x xa x x x
Safety device
operation
x x x xa x x
a See 5.7.2.3.5.
NOTE Load and forces may not act simultaneously.
5.6.45.7.4 Impact factors
Safety device operation
The impact factor due to safety device operation, k1, (see Table 1416) depends on the type of safety device.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
138 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Normal operation
In the load case “normal operation, running”, the vertical moving masses of the car, P + Q, and
counterweight/balancing weight, Mcwt/Mbwt, shall be multiplied by the impact factor, k2, (see Table 1416) to
take into consideration hard braking due to electric safety device actuation or by an accidental interruption
of the power supply.
Auxiliary parts fixed to the guide rail and/or other operational scenarios
The forces applied to the guide rails of the car, counterweight or balancing weight shall be multiplied with
the impact factor, k3, (see Table 1416) to take into account the possible car, counterweight or balancing
weight bounce when the car, counterweight/balancing weight is stopped by a safety device.
Values of impact factors
The values of the impact factors are given in Table 1416.
Table 14 16 — Impact factors
Impact at Impact
factor Value
Operation of instantaneous safety gear, not of the captive roller
type
k1
5
Operation of instantaneous safety gear, of the captive roller type or
pawl device with energy accumulation type buffer or energy
accumulation type buffer
3
Operation of progressive safety gear or pawl device with energy
dissipation type buffer or energy dissipation type buffer 2
Rupture valve 2
Ascending car overspeed protection and unintended movement protection
acting on the guide rail (....) a
Running k2 1,2
Auxiliary parts fixed to the guide rail and other operational
scenarios k3 (....)a
Formatted Table
Commented [IJ119]: See N1555ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 139
a The value is determined by the manufacturer depending on the actual installation in consideration
of static and dynamic conditions of the lift.
Permissible stresses
The permissible stresses shall be determined by Formula (1615):
σ = perm m
t
R
S
(1615)
where
σperm is the permissible stress, in newtons per square millimetre;
Rm is the tensile strength, in newtons per square millimetre;
St is the safety factor.
The safety factor shall be taken from Table 1517.
Table 15 17 — Safety factors for guide rails
Load cases Elongation (A5) Safety factor
Normal operation and loading/unloading
A5 > 12 % 2,25
8 % ≤ A5 ≤ 12 % 3,75
Safety device operation
A5 > 12 % 1,8
8 % ≤ A5 ≤ 12 % 3,0
The strength values shall be taken from the manufacturer.
Materials with elongations less than 8 % are regarded as too brittle and shall not be used.
Permissible deflections
For T-profile guide rails and their fixings (brackets, separation beams), the maximum calculated permissible
deflections, δperm, are:
Commented [IJ120]: See N1555
Formatted: Font color: Auto, Complex Script Font: 12
Formatted: No bullets or numberingISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
140 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
a) δperm = 5 mm in both directions for car, counterweight or balancing weight guide rails on which safety
gears are operating;
b) δperm = 10 mm in both directions for guide rails of counterweight or balancing weight without safety
gears.
Any deflection of building structure shall be taken into account in respect of guide rail displacement. See 0.4.2
negotiations and E.2.
Calculation
Guide rails shall be calculated according to:
a) ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.10;
b) EN 1993-1-1. In countries where EN 1993-1-1 is not adopted, relevant national requirements shall
apply; or
c) Finite Element Method (FEM).
5.75.8Buffers
5.7.15.8.1 Car and counterweight buffers
5.8.1.1 Lifts shall be provided with buffers at the bottom limit of travel of the car and counterweight.
In the case of buffer(s) fixed to the car or the counterweight, the impact area(s) of the buffer(s) on the pit
floor shall be made obvious by an obstacle(s) (pedestal) of a height not less than 300 mm.
An obstacle is not required for buffer(s) fixed to the counterweight where a screen according to 5.2.5.5.1 is
extended to not more than 50 mm above the pit floor.
5.8.1.2 In addition to the requirements of 5.8.1.1, positive drive lifts shall be provided with buffers on
the car top to function at the upper limit of travel.
5.8.1.3 For hydraulic lifts, when the buffer(s) of a pawl device is (are) used to limit the travel of the car
at the bottom, the pedestal according to 5.8.1.1 is also required, unless the fixed stops of the pawl device are
mounted on the car guide rails, and the car is not able to pass with pawl(s) retracted.
5.8.1.4 For hydraulic lifts, when buffers are fully compressed, the ram shall not hit the base of the
cylinder.
This does not apply to devices ensuring re-synchronisation of telescopic cylinders, where at least one stage
shall not hit its down travel mechanical limit.
5.8.1.5 Energy accumulation type buffers, with linear and non-linear characteristics, shall only be used
if the rated speed of the lift does not exceed 1 m/s.
5.8.1.6 Energy dissipation type buffers can be used regardless of the rated speed of the lift.
Commented [IJ121]: See N1556ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 141
5.8.1.7 The energy accumulation type buffers with non-linear characteristics and energy dissipation
type buffers are regarded as safety components and shall be verified according to the requirements in
ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.5.
5.8.1.8 On the buffers other than those with linear characteristics (5.8.2.1.1), there shall be a data plate
showing:
a) the name of the manufacturer of the buffer;
b) the type examination certificate number;
c) the type of the buffer;
d) the type and designation of the liquid, in the case of hydraulic buffers.
5.7.25.8.2 Stroke of car and counterweight buffers
Energy accumulation type buffers
5.7.2.1.15.8.2.1.1 Buffers with linear characteristics
5.8.2.1.1.1 The total possible stroke of the buffers shall be at least equal to twice the gravity stopping
distance corresponding to 115 % of the rated speed: (0,135 v2)3. The stroke is expressed in metres.
However, the stroke shall not be less than 65 mm.
5.8.2.1.1.2 Buffers shall be designed to cover the stroke defined in 5.8.2.1.1.1 under a static load of
between 2,5 times and 4 times the sum of the mass of the car and its rated load (or the mass of the
counterweight).
5.7.2.1.25.8.2.1.2 Buffers with non-linear characteristics
5.8.2.1.2.1 Energy accumulation type buffers with non-linear characteristics shall fulfil the following
requirements when hitting the buffer(s) with the mass of the car and its rated load or of the counterweight,
in case of free fall with a speed of 115 % of the rated speed:
a) the retardation according to ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.5.3.2.6.1 a) shall not be more than 1 gn;
3 ⋅
= ⋅
⋅
2
2 (1,15 ) 2
0,134 8
2 n
v v
g
, rounded to: 0,135 · v2.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
142 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
b) the retardation of more than 2,5 gn shall not be longer than 0,04 s;
c) the return speed of the car or the counterweight shall not exceed 1 m/s;
d) there shall be no permanent deformation after actuation;
e) the maximum peak retardation shall not exceed 6 gn.
5.8.2.1.2.2 The term “fully compressed”, mentioned in Table 2 means a compression of 90 % of the
installed buffer height, without considering fixation elements of the buffer, which can limit the compression
to a lower value.
Energy dissipation type buffers
5.8.2.2.1 The total possible stroke of the buffers shall be at least equal to the gravity stopping distance
corresponding to 115 % of the rated speed: 0,067 4 v2. The stroke is expressed in metres.
5.8.2.2.2 When the slowdown of lift at the ends of its travel is monitored according to 5.12.1.3, for rated
speeds above 2,50 m/s, the speed at which the car (or the counterweight) comes into contact with the buffers
may be used instead of 115 % of the rated speed, when calculating the buffer stroke according to 5.8.2.2.1.
However, the stroke shall not be less than 0,42 m.
5.8.2.2.3 Energy dissipation type buffers shall fulfil the following requirements:
a) hitting the buffer with the mass of the car with its rated load, in case of free fall with a speed of 115 % of
the rated speed or the reduced speed according to 5.8.2.2.2, the average retardation shall not be more
than 1 gn;
b) retardation of more than 2,5 gn shall not be longer than 0,04 s;
c) there shall be no permanent deformation after actuation.
5.8.2.2.4 The normal operation of the lift shall depend on the return of the buffers to their normal extended
position after operation. The device for checking this shall be an electric safety device in conformity with
5.11.2.
5.8.2.2.5 Buffers, if hydraulic, shall be constructed so that the fluid level can easily be checked.
5.85.9Lift machinery and associated equipment
5.8.15.9.1 General provision
5.9.1.1 Each lift shall have at least one machine of its own.
5.9.1.2 Effective protection shall be provided for accessible rotating parts of machinery, in particular:
a) keys and screws in the shafts;ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 143
b) tapes, chains, belts;
c) gears, sprockets and pulleys;
d) projecting motor shafts.
Exception is made for traction sheaves with protections according to 5.5.7, hand winding wheels, brake
drums and any similar smooth, round parts. Such parts shall be painted yellow, at least in part.
5.8.25.9.2 Lift machine for traction lifts and positive drive lifts
General provisions
5.9.2.1.1 The following two methods of drive are permissible by:
a) traction (use of sheaves and ropes/belts);
b) positive drive, i.e. either:
1) use of a drum and ropes; or
2) use of sprockets and chains.
c) Elastomeric coated timing belts
The rated speed shall not exceed 0,63 m/s. Counterweights shall not be used. The use of a balancing weight
is permitted.
The calculations of the driving elements shall take into account the possibility of the counterweight or the
car resting on its buffers.
5.9.2.1.2 Use may be made of belts for coupling the motor or motors to the component on which the
electro-mechanical brake (5.9.2.2.1.2) operates. In this case, a minimum of two belts shall be used.
Braking system
5.8.2.2.15.9.2.2.1 General provisions
5.9.2.2.1.1 The lift shall be provided with a braking system which operates automatically in the event of
loss of:
a) the main power supply to the drive control system;
b) the supply to control circuits.
5.9.2.2.1.2 The braking system shall have an electro-mechanical brake (friction type), but may, in
addition, have other braking means (e.g. electric).
Commented [IJ122]: See N1544ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
144 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.8.2.2.25.9.2.2.2 Electro-mechanical brake
5.8.2.2.2.15.9.2.2.2.1 This brake on its own shall be capable of stopping the machine when the car is
travelling downward at the rated speed and with the rated load plus 25 %. In these conditions, the average
retardation of the car shall not exceed that resulting from operation of the safety gear or stopping on the
buffer.
The brake opening shall be done either:
a) by electromagnets, or
b) by hydraulic cylinders.
All the mechanical components of the brake which take part in the application of the braking action on the
braking surface and in the release of the brake shall be installed at least in two sets. If one of the brake sets
is not working due to failure of a component, a sufficient braking effort to decelerate, stop and hold the car
travelling downwards at the rated speed and with the rated load in the car, and upwards with an empty car,
shall continue to be exercised.
Any electromagnet solenoid plunger, cylinder, valve and hydraulic filter is considered to be a mechanical
part, any electromagnet solenoid coil is not.
In case of hydraulic brake release the following applies:
a) The operation of each brake set shall be performed by independent cylinders, valves and pressure release
circuits. Valves shall be energized by means according to 5.9.2.2.2.3. Valves shall release pressure from the
cylinders when de-energized.
b) The hydraulic pressure source may be installed as a single set.
c) Hydraulic filters shall be used to prevent harmful contaminations effecting operation of cylinders and
valves.
d) Hydraulic filters shall not cause the failure of the brake to release.
e) The correct lifting or dropping of the brake shall be monitored. If a failure is detected, the next normal
start of the lift shall be prevented.
f) The hydraulic equipment shall be protected to prevent leaking oil penetrating the braking surface.
5.9.2.2.2.2 The component on which the brake operates shall be coupled to the traction sheave or drum
or sprocket by direct and positive mechanical means.
5.9.2.2.2.3 To hold off, the brake shall require a continuous flow of current, except as permitted by
5.9.2.2.2.7.
The following shall be met:
a) the interruption of this current, initiated by an electric safety device as required in 5.11.2.41.7, shall be
made by one of the following means:
Commented [IJ123]: See N1573ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 145
1) Safety circuit satisfying 5.11.2.3, ortwo independent electromechanical devices according to
5.10.3.1, whether or not integral with those which cause interruption of the current feeding the lift
machine;
If, while the lift is stationary, one of the electromechanical devices has not opened the brake circuit, any
further movement of the car shall be prevented. Stuck-at failure of this monitoring function shall
have the same result;
2) SIL-rated circuit according to 5.11.2.4 fulfilling SIL 3 requirements, with a hardware fault tolerance
of at least 1 and PFH ≤ 2,5*10-8, or
3) directly by the electrical safety device, provided it is suitably rated electrically.
electrical circuit satisfying 5.11.2.3.
This means is regarded as a safety component and shall be verified according to the requirements in
ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.6;
b) when the motor of the lift is likely to function as a generator, it shall not be possible for the electric device
operating the brake to be fed directly by the motor;
c) braking shall become effective without supplementary delay after opening of the brake release circuit;
NOTE A passive acting electrical component that reduces sparking (e.g. diode, capacitor or varistors) is not
considered as a means of delay.
d) operation of an overload and/or over current protective device (if any) for the electro-mechanical brake
shall initiate the simultaneous de-energization of the machine;
e) current shall not be applied to the brake until the motor has been powered except during manual or
automatic rescue operation.
.f) where the electromechanical brake is part of the means to stop the car according to 5.6.6 or 5.6.7, a
separate switching element additionally to a) shall be used to control the brake current during normal
operation.
5.9.2.2.2.4 The brake shoe or pad pressure shall be exerted by guided compression springs or weights.
5.9.2.2.2.5 Band brakes shall not be used.
5.9.2.2.2.6 Brake linings shall be incombustible.
5.9.2.2.2.7 The machine shall be capable of having the brake released by a continuous manual operation
which is protected against involuntary action. The operation can be mechanical (e.g. lever) or electrical,
powered by an automatically rechargeable emergency supply.
Commented [IJ124]: See N1722
Formatted: Indent: Before: 0 cm
Commented [IJ125]: See N1544
Commented [IJ126]: See N1722
Commented [IJ127]: See N1722ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
146 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
In case of hydraulically opened brakes, the brake release shall be either mechanical (e.g. by lever), or by a
hand pump. In case of a hand pump, the valve used to release the brakes shall require continuous manual
operation to release the brakes. Removal of the manual force shall immediately cause the brakes to engage.
These valves shall be operated either mechanically or electrically powered by an automatically rechargeable
emergency supply.
The emergency supply shall be sufficient to move the car to a landing, taking into consideration other
equipment connected to this supply and the time taken to respond to emergency situations.
A failure of the release of the manual operation shall not cause a failure of the braking function. Additionally
for electrical operation if one fault combined with a second fault can lead to a dangerous situation, normal
operation of the lift shall be prevented after occurrence of the first fault.
It shall be possible to test each brake set independently from outside of the well.
5.9.2.2.2.8 Information for use and corresponding warnings, particularly for reduced stroke buffer, shall
be fixed on, or near, means to operate the machine brake manually.
5.9.2.2.2.9
With the car loaded from (see Formula 17);
0% of rated load to (q - 0,1) Q and from (q + 0,1) Q to 100% of rated load
(1817)
where
q is the balance factor indicating the amount of counterbalance of the rated load by the
counterweight;
Q is the rated load.
It shall be possible to move the car to an adjacent floor by either:
a) natural movement due to gravity; or
b) manual operation consisting of:
1) mechanical means, present on site; or
2) electrical means, powered by supply independent from the mains, present on site.
Emergency operation
5.9.2.3.1 Where a means of emergency operation is required [see 5.9.2.2.2.9 b)], it shall consist of either:
a) a mechanical means, where the manual effort to move the car to a landing does not exceed 150 N, which
complies with the following:
1) if the means for moving the car can be driven by the lift moving, then it shall be a smooth, spokeless
wheel;
Commented [IJ128]: See N1573
Commented [IJ129]: See N1722
Commented [IJ130]: See N1538
Commented [IJ131]: Already corrected by ISOISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 147
2) if the means is removable, it shall be located in an easily accessible place in the machinery space. It
shall be suitably marked if there is any risk of confusion as to the machine for which it is intended;
3) if the means is removable or can be disengaged from the machine, an electric safety device in
conformity with 5.11.2 shall be actuated, at the latest when the means is about to be coupled with
the machine; or
b) an electrical means which complies with the following:
1) the power supply shall be able to move the car with any load to an adjacent landing within 1 h after
a breakdown;
2) the speed shall be not greater than 0,30 m/s.
5.9.2.3.2 It shall be possible to check easily whether the car is in an unlocking zone. See also 5.2.6.6.2 c).
5.9.2.3.3 If the manual effort to move the car in the upwards direction with its rated load is greater than
400 N, or if no mechanical means defined in 5.9.2.3.1 a) is provided, a means of emergency electrical
operation shall be provided in accordance with 5.12.1.6.
5.9.2.3.4 The means to actuate the emergency operation shall be located:
— in the machine room (5.2.6.3);
— in the machinery cabinet (5.2.6.5.1); or
— on the emergency and tests panel(s) (5.2.6.6).
5.9.2.3.5 If a hand winding wheel is provided for emergency operation, the direction of movement of the
car shall be clearly indicated on the machine, close to the hand winding wheel.
If the wheel is not removable, the indication may be on the wheel itself.
Speed
The speed of the car, half loaded, in upwards and downwards motion, in mid-travel, excluding all acceleration
and retardation periods, shall not exceed the rated speed by more than 5 %, when the supply is at its rated
frequency, and the motor voltage is equal to the rated voltage of the equipment.
NOTE It is good practice that, in the above conditions, the speed is not lower than a value 8 % below the rated
speed.
This tolerance is also applicable for the speed in the case of:
a) levelling [5.12.1.4 c)];
b) re-levelling [5.12.1.4 d)];ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
148 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
c) inspection operation [5.12.1.5.2.1 e) and 5.12.1.5.2.1 f)];
d) emergency electrical operation [5.12.1.6.1 f)].
Removing the power which can cause rotation of the motor
5.8.2.5.15.9.2.5.1 General
The removal of power which can cause rotation of the motor, initiated by an electric safety device, as required
by 5.11.2.41.7, shall be controlled as detailed below.
5.8.2.5.25.9.2.5.2 Motors supplied directly from A.C. or D.C. mains by contactors
The supply shall be interrupted by two independent contactors, the contacts of which shall be in series in the
supply circuit. If, while the lift is stationary, one of the contactors has not opened the main contacts, further
movement of the car shall be prevented at the latest at the next change in the direction of motion.
Stuck-at failure of this monitoring function shall have the same result.
5.8.2.5.35.9.2.5.3 Drive using a “Ward-Leonard” system
5.8.2.5.3.15.9.2.5.3.1 Excitation of the generator supplied by classical elements
Two independent contactors shall interrupt:
a) the motor generator loop;
b) the excitation of the generator; or
c) one the loop and the other the excitation of the generator.
If, while the lift is stationary, one of the contactors has not opened the main contacts, further movement of
the car shall be prevented, at the latest at the next change in direction of motion. Stuck-at failure of this
monitoring function shall have the same result.
In cases b) and c), effective precautions shall be taken to prevent the rotation of the motor in the case of a
residual field, if any, in the generator (e.g. suicide circuit).
5.8.2.5.3.25.9.2.5.3.2 Excitation of the generator supplied and controlled by static elements
One of the following methods shall be used:
a) the same methods as specified in 5.9.2.5.3.1;
b) a system consisting of:
1) a contactor interrupting the excitation of the generator or the motor generator loop.
The coil of the contactor shall be released at least before each change in direction of motion. If the
contactor does not release, any further movement of the lift shall be prevented. Stuck-at failure of
this monitoring function shall have the same result;ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 149
2) a control device blocking the flow of energy in the static elements; and
3) a monitoring device to verify the blocking of the flow of energy each time the lift is stationary.
If, during a normal stopping period, the blocking by the static elements is not effective, the
monitoring device shall cause the contactor to release and any further movement of the lift shall be
prevented.
Effective precautions shall be taken to prevent the rotation of the motor in the case of a residual field, if any,
in the generator (e.g. suicide circuit).
5.8.2.5.45.9.2.5.4 A.C. or D.C. motor supplied and controlled by static elements
One of the following methods shall be used:
a) two independent contactors interrupting the current to the motor.
If, while the lift is stationary, one of the contactors has not opened the main contacts, any further
movement shall be prevented, at the latest at the next change in direction of motion. Stuck-at failure of
this monitoring function shall have the same result;
b) a system consisting of:
1) a contactor interrupting the current at all poles.
The coil of the contactor shall be released at least before each change in direction. If the contactor
does not release, any further movement of the lift shall be prevented. Stuck-at failure of this
monitoring function shall have the same result;
2) a control device blocking the flow of energy in the static elements; and
3) a monitoring device to verify the blocking of the flow of energy each time the lift is stationary.
If, during a normal stopping period, the blocking of the flow of energy by the static elements is not
effective, the monitoring device shall cause the contactor to release and any further movement of
the lift shall be prevented;
c) electrical circuit satisfying 5.11.2.3.
This means is regarded as a safety component and shall be verified according to the requirements in
ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.6;
d) d) an adjustable speed electrical power drive system with a safe torque off (STO) function according to
IEC 61800-5-2:20072017, 4.2.3.2 fulfilling SIL3 requirements, with a hardware fault tolerance of at least
1 and PFH ≤ 2,5*10-8, with a hardware fault tolerance of at least 1.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
150 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
e) SIL-rated circuit according to 5.11.2.4 fulfilling SIL 3 requirements, with a hardware fault tolerance of
at least 1 and PFH ≤ 2,5*10-8
Control devices and monitoring devices
Control devices according to 5.9.2.5.3.2 b) 2) or 5.9.2.5.4 b) 2), and monitoring devices according to
5.9.2.5.3.2 b) 3) or 5.9.2.5.4 b) 3) need not be safety circuits according to 5.11.2.3 or 5.11.2.4 .
These devices shall only be used provided that the requirements of 5.11.1 are met to achieve comparability
to 5.9.2.5.4 a).
Motor run time limiter
5.9.2.7.1 Traction drive lifts shall have a motor run time limiter causing the de-energizing of the machine,
and keep it de-energized, if:
a) the machine does not rotate when a start is initiated;
b) the car/counterweight is stopped in downwards movement by an obstacle which causes the suspension
meansropes to slip on the traction sheave.
5.9.2.7.2 The motor run time limiter shall function in a time which does not exceed the smaller of the
following two values:
a) 45 s;
b) time to travel the longest interfloor distance at the intended motor running speed plus 10 seconds with
a minimum of 20 s if the intended travel for travelling the full travel in normal operation, plus 10 s, with
a minimum of 20 s if the full travel time is less than 10 s.
5.9.2.7.3 The return to normal operation shall only be possible by manual resetting by a competent
maintenance person competent in maintenance procedures. On restoration of the power after a supply
disconnection, maintaining the machine in the stopped position is not necessary.
5.9.2.7.4 The motor run time limiter shall not affect the movement of the car under either the inspection
operation or the emergency electrical operation.
5.8.35.9.3 Lift machine for hydraulic lifts
General provision
5.9.3.1.1 The two following methods of drive are permissible:
a) direct acting;
b) indirect acting.
Commented [IJ132]: See N1722
Commented [IJ133]: See N1544
Commented [IJ134]: See N1538ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 151
5.9.3.1.2 In the case of multiple jacks, all the jacks shall be hydraulically connected in parallel so that they
all are lifting with the same pressure.
The structure of the car, car sling, guide rails and car guide shoes/rollers shall keep the car floor orientation
and synchronize the movement of the rams, in any of the applicable loading conditions mentioned in 5.7.2.2.
In order to equalize pressure within the cylinders, the pipe work from the manifold to each jack should be
approximately equal in length and have similar characteristics, such as the number and type of bends in the
pipe work.
5.9.3.1.3 The mass of the balancing weight, if any, shall be calculated such that in case of rupture of the
suspension gear (car/balancing weight), the pressure in the hydraulic system does not exceed two times the
full load pressure.
In the case of several balancing weights, the rupture of only one suspension gear shall be taken into
consideration for the calculation.
Jack
5.8.3.2.15.9.3.2.1 Calculations of cylinder and ram
5.8.3.2.1.15.9.3.2.1.1 Pressure calculations
The following shall be satisfied:
a) the cylinder and the ram shall be designed such that, under the forces resulting from a pressure equal to
2,3 times the full load pressure, a safety factor of at least 1,7, referred to the proof stress, RP0,2, is assured;
b) for the calculation of the elements of telescopic jacks with hydraulic synchronizing means, the full load
pressure shall be replaced by the highest pressure which occurs in an element due to the hydraulic
synchronizing means.
It shall be taken into account that abnormally high pressure conditions can arise during installation, due
to incorrect adjustment of the hydraulic synchronizing means;
c) in the thickness calculations, a value shall be added of 1,0 mm for cylinder walls and cylinder bases, and
0,5 mm for walls of hollow rams for single and telescopic jacks.
The dimensions and tolerances of the tubes used for the manufacture of the jack shall be according to
the applicable standard of the EN 10305 series;
d) the calculations shall be carried out according to ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.13.
5.8.3.2.1.25.9.3.2.1.2 Buckling calculations
Jacks under compressive loads shall fulfil the following requirements:ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
152 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
a) they shall be designed such that, in their fully extended position and under the forces resulting from a
pressure equal to 1,4 times full load pressure, a safety factor of at least two against buckling is assured;
b) the calculations shall be carried out according to ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.13;
c) as a deviation from 5.9.3.2.1.2 b), more complex calculation methods may be used provided that at least
the same safety factor is assured.
5.8.3.2.1.35.9.3.2.1.3 Tensile stress calculations
Jacks under tensile loads shall be designed such that, under the forces resulting from a pressure equal to
1,4 times the full load pressure, a safety factor of at least 2, referred to the proof stress, RP0,2, is assured.
5.8.3.2.25.9.3.2.2 Connection car/ram (cylinder)
5.9.3.2.2.1 In case of a direct acting lift, the connection between the car and the ram (cylinder) shall be
flexible.
5.9.3.2.2.2 The connection between the car and the ram (cylinder) shall be constructed to support the
weight of the ram (cylinder) and the additional dynamic forces. The connection means shall be secured.
5.9.3.2.2.3 In case of a ram made with more than one section, the connections between the sections shall
be constructed to support the weight of the suspended ram sections and the additional dynamic forces.
5.9.3.2.2.4 In the case of indirect acting lifts, the head of the ram (cylinder) shall be guided.
This requirement does not apply for pulling jacks, provided that the pulling arrangement prevents bending
forces on the ram.
5.9.3.2.2.5 In the case of indirect acting lifts, no parts of the ram head guiding system shall be
incorporated within the vertical projection of the car roof.
5.8.3.2.35.9.3.2.3 Limitation of the ram stroke
5.9.3.2.3.1 Means shall be provided to stop the ram with buffered effect in such a position that the
requirements of 5.2.5.7.1 and 5.2.5.7.2 can be satisfied.
5.9.3.2.3.2 This limitation of stroke shall be either:
a) by means of a cushioned stop; or
b) effected by shutting off the hydraulic supply to the jack by means of a mechanical linkage between the
jack and a hydraulic valve: breakage or stretch of such a linkage shall not result in the retardation of the
car exceeding the value specified in 5.9.3.2.4.2.
5.8.3.2.45.9.3.2.4 Cushioned stop
5.9.3.2.4.1 This stop shall either:ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 153
a) be an integral part of the jack; or
b) consist of one or more devices external to the jack situated outside the car projection, the resultant force
of which is exerted on the centre line of the jack.
5.9.3.2.4.2 The design of the cushioned stop shall be such that the average retardation of the car does
not exceed 1 gn and that, in case of an indirect acting lift, the retardation does not result in slack rope or chain.
5.9.3.2.4.3 In cases 5.9.3.2.3.2 b) and 5.9.3.2.4.1 b), a stop shall be provided inside the jack to prevent the
ram from leaving the cylinder.
In the case of 5.9.3.2.3.2 b), this stop shall be positioned such that the requirements of 5.2.5.7.1 and 5.2.5.7.2
are also satisfied.
5.8.3.2.55.9.3.2.5 Means of protection
5.9.3.2.5.1 If a jack extends into the ground, it shall be installed in a protective tube, sealed at its bottom
end. If it extends into other spaces, it shall be suitably protected.
5.9.3.2.5.2 Leak and scrape fluid from the cylinder head shall be collected.
5.9.3.2.5.3 The jack shall be provided with an air venting device.
5.8.3.2.65.9.3.2.6 Telescopic jacks
The following requirements apply additionally:
5.9.3.2.6.1 Stops shall be provided between successive sections to prevent the rams from leaving their
respective cylinders.
5.9.3.2.6.2 In the case of a jack below the car of a direct acting lift, when the car rests on its fully
compressed buffers, the clear distance:
a) between the successive guiding yokes shall be at least 0,30 m; and
b) between the highest guiding yoke and the lowest parts of the car, within a horizontal distance of 0,30 m
from the vertical projection of the yoke [parts mentioned in 5.2.5.8.2 ba) excluded] shall be at least
0,30 m.
NOTE See also 5.2.5.8.2 d).
5.9.3.2.6.3 The length of the bearing of each section of a telescopic jack without external guidance shall
be at least 2 times the diameter of the respective ram.
5.9.3.2.6.4 These jacks shall be provided with mechanical or hydraulic synchronizing means.
Commented [IJ135]: See N1537ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
154 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.9.3.2.6.5 When jacks with hydraulic synchronizing means are used, an electric device shall be provided
to prevent a start for a normal journey when the pressure exceeds the full load pressure by more than 20 %.
5.9.3.2.6.6 When ropes or chains are used as synchronizing means, the following requirements apply:
a) there shall be at least two independent ropes or chains;
b) the requirements of 5.5.7.1 apply;
c) the safety factor shall be at least:
1) 12 for ropes;
2) 10 for chains.
The safety factor is the ratio between the minimum breaking load in newtons of one rope (or chain)
and the maximum force in this rope (or chain).
For the calculation of the maximum force, the following shall be taken into consideration:
— the force resulting from the full load pressure;
— the number of ropes (or chains).
A device shall be provided which prevents the speed of the car in downward movement exceeding the rated
speed downward, vd, by more than 0,30 m/s in the event of failure of the synchronizing means.
Piping
5.8.3.3.15.9.3.3.1 General
5.9.3.3.1.1 Piping and fittings which are subject to pressure (connections, valves, etc.) shall be:
a) appropriate to the hydraulic fluid used;
b) designed and installed in such a way as to avoid any abnormal stress due to fixing, torsion or vibration;
c) protected against damage, in particular of mechanical origin.
5.9.3.3.1.2 Pipes and fittings shall be appropriately fixed and accessible for inspection.
If pipes (either rigid or flexible) pass through walls or floor, they shall be protected by means of ferrules, the
dimensions of which allow the dismantling of the pipes for inspection, if necessary.
No coupling shall be sited inside a ferrule.
NOTE National regulations can require identification and fire protection of hydraulic piping routed through the
building.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 155
5.8.3.3.25.9.3.3.2 Rigid pipes
5.9.3.3.2.1 Rigid pipes and fittings between cylinder and non-return valve or down direction valve(s)
shall be designed such that, under the forces resulting from a pressure equal to 2,3 times the full load
pressure, a safety factor of at least 1,7 referred to the proof stress, RP0,2, is assured.
The calculations shall be carried out according to ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.13.1.1.
The dimensions and tolerances of the tubes used for the manufacture of the rigid pipes shall be according to
the applicable standard of the EN 10305 series.
In countries where the EN 10305 series of standards are not adopted, relevant national requirements shall
apply.
In the thickness calculations, a value shall be added of 1,0 mm for the connection between the cylinder and
the rupture valve, if any, and 0,5 mm for the other rigid pipes.
5.9.3.3.2.2 When telescopic jacks with more than 2 stages and hydraulic synchronizing means are used,
an additional safety factor of 1,3 shall be taken into account for the calculation of the pipes and fittings
between the rupture valve and the non-return valve or the down direction valve(s).
Pipes and fittings, if any, between the cylinder and the rupture valve shall be calculated on the same pressure
basis as the cylinder.
5.8.3.3.35.9.3.3.3 Flexible hoses
5.9.3.3.3.1 The flexible hose between cylinder and non-return valve or down direction valve shall be
selected with a safety factor of at least 8, relating full load pressure and bursting pressure.
5.9.3.3.3.2 The flexible hose and its couplings between cylinder and non-return valve or down direction
valve shall withstand without damage a pressure of five times the full load pressure. This test shall be carried
out by the manufacturer of the hose assembly.
5.9.3.3.3.3 The flexible hose shall be marked in an indelible manner with:
a) the name of the manufacturer or the trademark;
b) the test pressure;
c) the date of the test.
5.9.3.3.3.4 The flexible hose shall be fixed with a bending radius not less than that indicated by the hose
manufacturer.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
156 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Stopping the machine and checking its stopped condition
5.8.3.4.15.9.3.4.1 General
A stop of the machine initiated by an electric safety device, as required by 5.11.2.41.7, shall be controlled as
detailed below.
5.8.3.4.25.9.3.4.2 Upwards motion
For upwards motion, either:
a) the supply to the electric motor shall be interrupted by at least two independent contactors, the main
contacts of which shall be in series in the motor supply circuit;
b) the supply to the electric motor shall be interrupted by one contactor, and the supply to the bypass valves
(in accordance with 5.9.3.5.4.2) shall be interrupted by at least two independent electromechanical
devices connected in series in the supply circuit of these valves;
In this case, the temperature monitoring device of the motor and/or the oil (5.9.3.11, 5.10.4.3, 5.10.4.4)
needs to act on a switching device other than this contactor in order to stop the machine;
c) the electric motor shall be stopped by an electrical circuit satisfying 5.11.2.3. This means is regarded as
a safety component and shall be verified according to the requirements in ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.6; or
d) the electric motor shall be stopped by an adjustable speed electrical power drive system with a safe
torque off (STO) function according to IEC 61800-5-2:2007, 4.2.2.2, fulfilling SIL3 requirements with a
hardware fault tolerance of at least 1.
5.8.3.4.35.9.3.4.3 Downwards motion
For downwards motion, the supply to the down direction valve(s) shall be interrupted by one of the following
means:
a) by at least two independent electromechanical devices according to 5.10.3.1, connected in series;
b) directly by the electric safety device, provided it is suitable rated electrically; or
bc) electrical safety circuit satisfying according to 5.11.2.3, or
c) SIL-rated circuit according to 5.11.2.4 fulfilling SIL 3 requirements.
This means is regarded as a safety component and shall be verified according to the requirements in
ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.6.
5.8.3.4.45.9.3.4.4 Checking of the stopped condition
If, while the lift is stationary, one of the contactors [5.9.3.4.2 a) or 5.9.3.4.2 b)] has not opened the main
contacts or if one of the electromechanical devices [5.9.3.4.2 b) or 5.9.3.4.3 a)] has not opened, a further start
shall be prevented, at the latest at the next change in the direction of motion. A stuck-at of this monitoring
function shall have the same result.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 157
Hydraulic control and safety devices
5.8.3.5.15.9.3.5.1 Shut-off valve
5.9.3.5.1.1 A shut-off valve shall be provided. It shall be installed in the circuit which connects the
cylinder(s) to the non-return valve and the down direction valve(s).
5.9.3.5.1.2 It shall be located close to the other valves on the lift machine.
5.8.3.5.25.9.3.5.2 Non-return valve
5.9.3.5.2.1 A non-return valve shall be provided. It shall be installed in the circuit between the pump(s)
and the shut-off valve.
5.9.3.5.2.2 The non-return valve shall be capable of holding the car with the rated load at any point when
the supply pressure drops below the minimum operating pressure.
5.9.3.5.2.3 The closing of the non-return valve shall be effected by the hydraulic pressure from the jack
and by at least one guided compression spring and/or by gravity.
5.8.3.5.35.9.3.5.3 Pressure relief valve
5.9.3.5.3.1 A pressure relief valve shall be provided. It shall be connected to the circuit between the
pump(s) and the non-return valve. It shall not be possible to bypass the pressure relief valve with the
exclusion of the hand pump(s). The hydraulic fluid shall be returned to the tank.
5.9.3.5.3.2 The pressure relief valve shall be adjusted to limit the pressure to 140 % of the full load
pressure.
5.9.3.5.3.3 If necessary, due to high internal losses (head loss, friction), the pressure relief valve may be
set to a greater value but not exceeding 170 % of the full load pressure. In this case, for the calculations of
the hydraulic equipment (including jack), a fictitious full load pressure shall be used, equal to Formula (19):
1,4
s p (19)
where ps is the selected pressure setting.
In the buckling calculation, the over pressure factor of 1,4 shall then be replaced by a factor corresponding
to the increased setting of the pressure relief valve.
5.8.3.5.45.9.3.5.4 Direction valves
5.8.3.5.4.15.9.3.5.4.1 Down direction valves
Down direction valves shall be held open electrically. Their closing shall be effected by the hydraulic pressure
from the jack and by at least one guided compression spring per valve.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
158 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.8.3.5.4.25.9.3.5.4.2 Up direction valves
If the stopping of the machine is effected in accordance with 5.9.3.4.2 b), only bypass valves shall be used for
this. They shall be closed electrically. Their opening shall be effected by the hydraulic pressure from the jack
and by at least one guided compression spring per valve.
5.8.3.5.55.9.3.5.5 Filters
Filters or similar devices shall be installed in the circuit between:
a) the tank and the pump(s); and
b) the shut-off valve, the non-return valve(s) and the down direction valve(s).
The filter, or similar device, between the shut-off valve, the non-return valve(s) and the down direction valve
shall be accessible for inspection and maintenance.
Checking the pressure
5.9.3.6.1 A pressure gauge shall be provided for indication of system pressure. It shall be connected to the
circuit between the non-return valve or the down direction valve(s) and the shut-off valve.
Where a second non-return valve is used for uncontrolled movement protection (see 5.6.7) then the pressure
gauge shall be installed between that valve and the down direction valve(s) or the shut-off valve.
5.9.3.6.2 A gauge shut-off valve shall be provided between the main circuit and the connection for the
pressure gauge.
5.9.3.6.3 The connection shall be provided with an internal thread of either M 20 × 1,5 or G 1/2”.
Tank
The tank shall be designed and constructed so that it is easy:
a) to check the level of the hydraulic fluid in the tank;
b) to fill and drain.
The characteristics of the hydraulic fluid shall be indicated on the tank.
Speed
5.9.3.8.1 The rated speed upwards, vm, and downwards, vd, shall not be greater than 1,0 m/s [see 1.3 b)].
5.9.3.8.2 The speed of the empty car upwards shall not exceed the rated speed upwards by more than 8 %.
The speed of the car with rated load downwards shall not exceed the rated speed downwards by more than
8 %. In each case, this relates to the normal operating temperature of the hydraulic fluid.
For a journey in the upward direction, it is assumed that the supply is at its rated frequency and that the
motor voltage is equal to the rated voltage of the equipment.
Commented [IJ136]: See N1538ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 159
Emergency operation
5.8.3.9.15.9.3.9.1 Moving the car downwards
5.9.3.9.1.1 The lift shall be provided with a manually operated emergency lowering valve allowing the
car to be lowered to a level where the passengers can leave the car, even in the case of a power failure. It shall
be located in the relevant machinery space:
— machine room (5.2.6.3);
— machinery cabinet (5.2.6.5.1);
— on the emergency and tests panel(s) (5.2.6.6).
5.9.3.9.1.2 The speed of the car shall not exceed 0,30 m/s.
5.9.3.9.1.3 The operation of this valve shall require a continual manual force.
5.9.3.9.1.4 This valve shall be protected against involuntary action.
5.9.3.9.1.5 The emergency lowering valve shall not cause further sinking of the ram when the pressure
falls below a value predetermined by the manufacturer.
In the case of indirect acting lifts where slack rope/chain can occur, manual operation of the valve shall not
cause the sinking of the ram beyond that causing the slack rope/chain.
5.9.3.9.1.6 There shall be a plate near the manually operated valve for emergency downward movement,
stating: "Caution — Emergency lowering".
5.8.3.9.25.9.3.9.2 Moving the car upwards
5.9.3.9.2.1 A hand pump which causes the car to move in the upwards direction shall be permanently
available for every hydraulic lift.
The hand pump shall be stored in the building where the lift is installed and shall be accessible only to
authorized persons. Provisions for the connection of the pump shall be available at every lift machine.
Where not permanently installed, clear indications on where the hand pump is located and how to properly
connect it shall be available to maintenance and rescue operators.
5.9.3.9.2.2 The hand pump shall be connected to the circuit between the non-return valve or down
direction valve(s) and the shut-off valve.
5.9.3.9.2.3 The hand pump shall be equipped with a pressure relief valve limiting the pressure to
2,3 times the full load pressure.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
160 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.9.3.9.2.4 There shall be a plate near the hand pump for emergency upward movement, stating:
“Caution — Emergency lifting”.
5.8.3.9.35.9.3.9.3 Checking of the car position
If the lift serves more than two levels, it shall be possible to check whether the car is in an unlocking zone by
a means independent of the power supply, from the relevant machinery space:
a) the machine room (5.2.6.3);
b) the machinery cabinet (5.2.6.5.1); or
c) the emergency and test panel(s) (5.2.6.6) where the devices for emergency operations are fitted
(5.9.3.9.1 and 5.9.3.9.2).
This requirement is not applicable to lifts which are fitted with a mechanical anti-creep device.
Motor run time limiter
5.9.3.10.1 Hydraulic lifts shall have a motor run time limiter causing the de-energizing of the motor and
keeping it de-energized if the motor does not rotate when a start is initiated, or the car does not move.
5.9.3.10.2 The motor run time limiter shall function in a time which does not exceed the smaller of the
following two values:
a) 45 s;
b) the time for travelling the full travel in normal operation with rated load, plus 10 s, with a minimum of
20 s if the full travel time is less than 10 s.
5.9.3.10.3 The return-to-normal operation shall only be possible by manual resetting. On restoration of the
power after a supply disconnection, maintaining the machine in the stopped position is not necessary.
5.9.3.10.4 The motor run time limiter, even if tripped, shall not prevent the inspection operation (5.12.1.5)
and the electrical anti-creep system (5.12.1.10).
Protection against overheating of the hydraulic fluid
A temperature detecting device shall be provided. This device shall stop the machine and keep it stopped in
accordance with 5.10.4.4.
5.95.10 Electric installations and appliances
5.9.15.10.1 General provisions
Limits of application
5.10.1.1.1 The requirements of this document relating to the installation and the constituent components
of the electrical equipment apply to:ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 161
a) the main switch of the power circuit and dependent circuits;
b) the supply disconnecting device switch for the car lighting circuit and dependent circuits;
c) the well lighting and dependent circuits.
d) the supply disconnecting device for any other incoming source of supply d) the supply disconnecting
device for any other incoming source of supply
The lift shall be considered as a whole, in the same way as a machine, with its built-in electrical equipment.
NOTE The national requirements relating to electricity supply circuits apply as far as the input terminals of the
switches. They apply to the whole lighting and socket outlet circuits of the machine room and the pulley room.
5.10.1.1.2 The electrical equipment of the lift shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60204-1:2018, as
referenced in Clause 5.
When no precise information is given, the electrical components and devices shall be:
a) suitable for their intended use;
b) in conformity with relevant IEC standards;
c) applied in accordance with the supplier’s instructions.
5.10.1.1.3 The electromagnetic compatibility shall comply with the requirements of ISO 22199:20xx and
ISO 22200.
Control equipment according to 5.9.2.2.2.3 a) 2), 5.9.2.5.4 c), 5.9.2.5.4 d), 5.9.3.4.2 c), 5.9.3.4.2 d) and 5.9.3.4.3
c) shall comply with the safety circuit immunity requirements of ISO 22200:20xx.
5.10.1.1.4 Electrical actuators shall be selected, mounted, and identified in accordance with relevant parts
of EN 61310IEC 61310-3.
5.10.1.1.5 All control gear (see IEC 60204-1:20062018, 3.101.13) shall be mounted so as to facilitate its
operation and maintenance from the front. Where access is required for regular maintenance or adjustment,
the relevant devices shall be located between 0,40 m and 2,0 m above the working area. It is recommended
that terminals be at least 0,20 m above the working area and be placed so that conductors and cables can
easily be connected to them. These requirements are not applicable to control gear on the car roof.
5.10.1.1.6 Heat-emitting components (for example heat sinks, power resistors) shall be located so that the
temperature of each component in the vicinity remains within the permitted limit.
Under normal operation, the temperature of directly accessible equipment shall not exceed the limits given
in IEC 60364-4-42:2010, Table 42.1.
Commented [IJ137]: See N1544
Commented [IJ138]:
Formatted: Font: 12 pt
Commented [IJ139]: See N1541ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
162 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Protection against electric shock
5.9.1.2.15.10.1.2.1 General
The protective measures shall comply with the provisions defined by IEC 60364-4-41: 20xx.
Enclosures that do not otherwise clearly show that they contain electrical equipment that can give rise to a
risk of electric shock, shall be marked with graphical symbol IEC 60417-5036, Dangerous voltage:
The warning sign shall be plainly visible on the enclosure door or cover.
5.9.1.2.25.10.1.2.2 Basic protection (protection against direct contact)
In addition to the requirements of 5.10.1.2.1, the following applies:
a) in the lift well, machinery spaces and pulley rooms, protection of the electrical equipment against direct
contact shall be provided by means of casings providing a degree of protection of at least IP2X;
b) when equipment is accessible to non-authorized persons, a minimum degree of protection against direct
contact corresponding to IP2XD (IEC 60529: 20xx) shall be applied;
c) when enclosures containing hazardous live parts are opened for rescue operations, access to hazardous
voltage shall be prevented by minimum degree of protection of IPXXB (IEC 60529: 20xx);
d) for other enclosures containing hazardous live parts, EN 50274:20xx applies. In countries where EN
50274:20xx is not adopted, relevant national requirements shall apply.
5.9.1.2.35.10.1.2.3 Additional protection
Additional protection by means of a residual current protective device (RCD) with a rated residual operating
current not exceeding 30 mA shall be provided for:
a) socket outlets depending on the circuit(s) according to 5.10.1.1.1 b) and 5.10.1.1.1 c);
b) control circuits for landing controls and indicators and the safety chain with voltage higher than 50 V AC;
and
c) circuits on the lift car with voltage higher than 50 V AC.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 163
5.9.1.2.45.10.1.2.4 Protection against residual voltages
The provisions of IEC 60204-1:20062018, 6.2.4 apply.
Insulation resistance of the electrical installation (IEC 60364-6)
5.10.1.3.1 The insulation resistance shall be measured between all live conductor and earth except for PELV
and SELV circuits rated 100 VA or less.
Minimum values of insulation resistance shall be taken from Table 1618.
Table 16 18 — Insulation resistance
Nominal circuit voltage
V
Test voltage (D.C.)
V
Insulation resistance
MΩ
SELVa and PELVb
>100 VA
250 ≥0,5
≤500
including FELVc 500 ≥1,0
>500 1 000 ≥1,0
a SELV: safety extra-low voltage.
b PELV: protective extra-low voltage.
c FELV: functional extra-low voltage.
5.10.1.3.2 The mean value (in direct current) or the r.m.s. value (in alternating current) of the voltage
between conductors, or between conductors and earth, shall not exceed 250 V for control and safety circuits.
5.9.25.10.2 Incoming supply conductor terminations
The provisions of IEC 60204-1:20062018, 5.1 and 5.2 apply.
5.9.35.10.3 Contactors, contactor relays, components of safety circuits
Contactors and contactor relays
5.10.3.1.1 The main contactors, i.e. those necessary to stop the machine as per 5.9.2.5 and 5.9.3.4, shall
comply with IEC 60947-4-1: 2019 and shall be selected according the appropriate utilization category.
The main contactors with their associated short-circuit protective devices shall have type "1" coordination
in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1:20092019, 8.2.5.1.
Main contactors directly controlling motors shall, in addition, allow 10 % of starting operations to be made
as inching/jogging, i.e. 90 % AC-3 + 10 % AC-4.
These contactors shall have mirror contact(s) according to IEC 60947-4-1:20092019, Annex F, in order to
ensure the functionality according to 5.9.2.5.2, 5.9.2.5.3.1, 5.9.2.5.3.2 b) 1), 5.9.2.5.4 a) and b) 1), 5.9.3.4.2 a)
and b) and 5.9.3.4.3 a), i.e. detect the non-opening of a main contact.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
164 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.10.3.1.2 If contactor relays are used to operate the main contactors, those contactor relays shall comply
with IEC 60947-5-1:2017.
If relays are used to operate the main contactors, those relays shall comply with IEC 61810-1:2015.
They shall be selected according to the following utilisation categories:
a) AC-15 for controlling A.C. contactors;
b) DC-13 for controlling D.C. contactors.
5.10.3.1.3 For the main contactors referred to in 5.10.3.1.1, the contactor relays and relays referred to in
5.10.3.1.2 and the electrical devices interrupting the current to the brake according 5.9.2.2.2.3, it is necessary
for the measures taken to comply with 5.11.1.2 f), g), h), i), that:
a) auxiliary contacts of main contactors are mechanically linked contact elements according to IEC 60947-
5-1:20032017, Annex L;
b) contactor relays comply with IEC 60947-5-1:20032017, Annex L;
c) relays comply with IEC 61810-3:2015, in order to ensure that any make contact(s) and any break
contact(s) cannot be in closed position simultaneously.
Components of safety circuits
5.10.3.2.1 When contactor relays or relays as per 5.10.3.1.2 are used, the requirements of 5.10.3.1.3 apply.
5.10.3.2.2 Devices used in safety circuits or connected after electric safety devices with regard to creepage
distances and clearances with respect to the nominal voltage of the circuit where they are used (see
IEC 60664-1), shall meet the requirements of:
a) pollution degree 3;
b) overvoltage category III.
c) baisic insulation.
If the protection of the device is IP5X (IEC 60529: 20xx) or better, pollution degree 2 may be used.
For the electrical separation of other circuits, IEC 60664-1:20xx applies in the same way as above with
respect to the r.m.s. working voltage between adjacent circuits.
For protection against electric shock, see 5.10.1.2.
For failure exclusion on printed circuit boards, requirements as mentioned in ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.15, Table 3
(3.6) are applicable.
Commented [IJ140]: See N1722
Commented [IJ141]: See N1722ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 165
5.9.45.10.4 Protection of electrical equipment
5.10.4.1 For the protection of electrical equipment, IEC 60204-1:20062018, 7.1 to 7.4 applies.
5.10.4.2 Protection of motors against overheating shall be provided for each motor.
NOTE According to IEC 60204-1:20062018, 7.3.1, motors below 0,5 kW does not need to be provided with
overheat protection. This exception, however, does not apply in this document.
5.10.4.3 If the design temperature of electrical equipment provided with temperature monitoring devices
is exceeded, then the car shall stop at a landing so that the passengers can leave the car. An automatic return
to-normal operation of the lift shall only occur after sufficient cooling down.
5.10.4.4 If the design temperature of the hydraulic machine motor and/or oil provided with a
temperature monitoring device is exceeded, then the car shall stop directly and return to the bottom landing
so that the passengers can leave the car. An automatic return-to-normal operation of the lift shall only occur
after sufficient cooling down.
5.9.55.10.5 Main switches
5.10.5.1 For each lift, a main switch capable of breaking the supply to the lift on all the live conductors
shall be provided. This switch shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60204-1:20062018, 5.3.2 a) to d)
and 5.3.3.
5.10.5.1.1 This switch shall not cut the circuits feeding:
a) the car’s lighting and ventilation;
b) the socket outlet on the car roof;
c) the lighting of machinery spaces and pulley rooms;
d) the socket outlet in the machinery spaces, pulley rooms and in the pit;
e) the lighting of the well.
5.10.5.1.2 This switch shall be located:
a) in the machine room, where it exists;
b) where no machine room exists, in the control cabinet, except if this cabinet is mounted in the well, or
c) at the emergency and tests panel(s) (5.2.6.6) when the control cabinet is mounted in the well. If the
emergency panel is separate from the test panel, the switch shall be at the emergency panel.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
166 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
If the main switch is not directly accessible from the control cabinet(s), the drive control system or the lift
machine, device(s) according to IEC 60204-1:20062018, 5.5 shall be provided at these locations.
5.10.5.2 The control mechanism for the main switch shall be directly accessible from the entrance(s) to
the machine room. If the machine room is common to several lifts, the control mechanism of the main
switches shall allow the lift concerned to be identified easily.
If the machinery space has several points of access, or if the same lift has several machinery spaces each with
its own point(s) of access, a contactor may be used, which shall be controlled by:
— a safety contact, in conformity with 5.11.2; or
— a device according to IEC 60204-1:2006, 5.5 and 5.6, inserted in the supply circuit to the coil of the
contactor.
The contactor shall have a breaking capacity sufficient to interrupt the current of the largest motor when
stalled together with the sum of the normal running currents of all other motors and/or loads.
The re-engagement of the contactor shall not be carried out or made possible except by means of the device
which caused its release. The contactor shall be used in conjunction with a manually controlled isolating
switch according to IEC 60204-1:20062018, 5.5 and 5.6.
5.10.5.3 Each incoming source of supply to the lift shall have a supply disconnecting device according to
IEC 60204-1:20062018, 5.3 located close to the main switch.
In the case of a group of lifts, if, after the opening of the main switch for one lift, parts of the operating circuits
remain live, these circuits shall be capable of being separately isolated without breaking the supply to all the
lifts in the group. This requirement does not apply to PELV and SELV circuits.
5.10.5.4 Any capacitors to correct the power factor shall be connected before the main switch of the power
circuit.
If there is a risk of over-voltage, when, for example, the motors are connected by very long cables, the switch
of the power circuit shall also interrupt the connection to the capacitors.
5.10.5.5 While the main switch has disconnected the supply to the lift, any automatic operated movement
of the lift including automatic rescue operation (e.g. automatic battery powered operation) shall be
prevented with electric safety devices in conformity with 5.11.2.
5.10.5.6 A supply disconnecting device according to EN 60204-1:2017 clause 5.3.2 is required:
a) for any on-board power supply which is supplying circuits having nominal voltages exceeding 25 VAC or
60 VDC
b) for any on-board power supply which is supplying devices which can cause movement of the lift or doors.
5.9.65.10.6 Electric wiring
Conductors and cables
Conductors and cables shall be selected according to IEC 60204-1:20062018, 12.1, 12.2, 12.3 and 12.4.
Commented [IJ142]: See N1544
Commented [IJ143]: See N1544ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 167
Travelling cables shall be in conformity with EN 50214, IEC 60227-6 or IEC 60245-5, excluding insulation
material type requirements. In countries where EN 50214 is not adopted, relevant national requirements
shall apply.
Cross-sectional area of conductors
To ensure adequate mechanical strength, the cross-sectional area of conductors shall not be less than as
shown in IEC 60204-1:20062018, Table 5.
Wiring practices
5.9.6.3.15.10.6.3.1 General
The general requirements of IEC 60204-1:20062018, 13.1.1, 13.1.2 and 13.1.3 apply.
5.10.6.3.2 Conductors and cables shall be installed in conduits or trunkings or equivalent mechanical
protection.
Double insulated conductors and cables can be installed without conduits or trunkings if they are located as
to avoid accidental damage, e.g. by moving parts.
5.10.6.3.3 The requirement of 5.10.6.3.2 need not apply to:
a) conductors or cables not connected to electric safety devices, provided that:
1) they are not subject to a rated output of more than 100 VA; and
2) they are part of SELV or PELV circuits;
b) the wiring of operating or distribution devices in cabinets or on panels between, either:
1) different pieces of electric equipment, or
2) these pieces of equipment and the connection terminals.
5.10.6.3.4 If connections, connection terminals and connectors are not located in protective enclosure, their
IP2X (IEC 60529) protection shall be maintained when connected and disconnected, and they shall be
properly fixed to prevent unintended disconnection.
5.10.6.3.5 If, after opening of the main switch or switches of a lift, some connection terminals remain live,
and if the voltage exceeds 25 VAC or 60 VDC, a permanent warning label according to IEC 60204-
1:20062017, Clause 16, shall be appropriately placed in proximity to the main switch or switches, and a
corresponding statement shall be included in the maintenance manual.
Furthermore, for circuits connected to such live terminals, the requirements of labelling, separation or
identification by colour shall be fulfilled as given in IEC 60204-1:20062018, 5.3.5.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
168 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
5.10.6.3.6 Connection terminals whose accidental interconnection could lead to a dangerous malfunction
of the lift shall be clearly separated, unless their method of construction obviates this risk.
5.10.6.3.7 In order to ensure continuity of mechanical protection, the protective sheathing of conductors
and cables shall fully enter the casings of switches and appliances, or shall terminate in a suitably constructed
gland.
However, if there is a risk of mechanical damage due to movement of parts or sharp edges of the frame itself,
the conductors connected to the electric safety device shall be protected mechanically.
NOTE Enclosed frames of landing and car doors are regarded as appliance casings.
Connectors
Plug socket combinations shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60204-1:20062018, 13.4.5, except c),
d) and i).
Connectors and devices of the plug-in type placed in the circuits of electric safety devices shall be designed
so that it shall not be possible to insert them in a position which leads to a dangerous situation.
5.9.75.10.7 Lighting and socket outlets
5.10.7.1 The electric lighting supplies to the car, well, machinery spaces and pulley rooms, and emergency
and test panel(s) (5.2.6.6), shall be independent of the supply to the machine, either through another circuit,
or through connection to the machine supply circuit on the supply side of the main switch (or switches) laid
down in 5.10.5.
5.10.7.2 The supply to socket outlets required on the car roof, in the machinery spaces, in pulley rooms
and in the pit, shall be taken from the circuits referred to in 5.10.7.1.
These socket outlets shall be of type 2 P + PE, supplied directly.
The use of the above socket outlets does not imply that the supply cable has a cross-sectional area
corresponding to the rated current of the socket outlet. The cross-sectional area of the conductors may be
smaller, provided that the conductors are correctly protected against excess currents.
5.9.85.10.8 Control of the supply for lighting and socket outlets
5.10.8.1 A switch shall control the supply to the circuit for lighting and socket outlets of the car. If the
machine room contains several lift machines, it is necessary to have one switch per car. This switch shall be
located close to the corresponding main power switch.
5.10.8.2 In the machinery spaces, other than those in the well, a switch controlling the supply for lighting
shall be located near its access(es). See also 5.2.1.4.2.
Well lighting switches (or equivalent) shall be located both in the pit and close to the main switch, so that the
well light can be operated from either location.
In case additional lamps are installed on the car roof, they shall be connected to the car light circuit and
switched from the car roof. The switch(es) shall be in an easily accessible position, not more than 1 m from
the entry point(s), for inspection or maintenance personnel.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 169
5.10.8.3 Each circuit controlled by the switches laid down in 5.10.8.1 and 5.10.8.2 shall have its own over
current protection devices.
5.9.95.10.9 Protective earthing
The requirements of IEC 60364-4-41:2007, 411.3.1.1 apply.
5.9.105.10.10 Electrical identification
All control devices, and electrical components shall be plainly identified with the same reference designation
as shown in the electrical diagrams.
The necessary fuse specifications, such as value and type, shall be marked on the fuse or on/near the fuse
holders.
In the case of the use of multiple wire connectors, only the connector, and not the wires, needs to be marked.
5.105.11 Protection against electric faults; failure analysis; electric safety devices
5.10.15.11.1 Protection against electric faults; failure analysis
General
If any single fault listed in 5.11.1.2 in the electric equipment of a lift cannot be excluded under conditions
described in 5.11.1.3 and/or ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.15, it shall not, on its own, be the cause of a dangerous
malfunction of the lift.
For safety circuits, see 5.11.2.3.
5.11.1.2 Faults envisaged:
a) absence of voltage;
b) voltage drop;
c) loss of continuity of a conductor;
d) insulation fault in relation to the metalwork or the earth;
e) short circuit or open circuit, change of value or function in an electrical component, e.g. resistor,
capacitor, transistor, lamp, etc.;
f) non-attraction or incomplete attraction of the moving armature of a contactor or relay;
g) non-separation of the moving armature of a contactor or relay;
h) non-opening of a contact;
i) non-closing of a contact;
Commented [IJ144]: See N1722ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
170 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
j) phase reversal.
k) short circuit between adjacent conductors of travelling cable.
5.11.1.3 The non-opening of a contact need not be considered in the case of safety contacts conforming to
the requirements of 5.11.2.2.
5.11.1.4 An earth fault in a circuit in which there is an electric safety device, or in a circuit controlling the
brake according to 5.9.2.2.2.3, or in a circuit controlling the down valve according to 5.9.3.4.3, shall:
a) either cause the immediate stopping of the machine; or
b) prevent restarting of the machine after the first normal stop, if the first earth fault alone is not dangerous.
Return to service shall only be possible by manual resetting.
5.10.25.11.2 Electric safety devices
General provisions
5.11.2.1.1 During the operation of one of the electric safety devices, as listed in Annex A, the movement of
the machine shall be prevented, or it shall be caused to stop immediately, as indicated in 5.11.2.41.7.
The electric safety devices shall consist of:
a) either one or more safety contacts satisfying 5.11.2.2; or
b) safety circuits satisfying 5.11.2.3, or
c) SIL-rated circuit(s) satisfying 5.11.2.4
, consisting of one, or a combination, of the following:
1) either one or more safety contacts satisfying 5.11.2.2;
2) contacts not satisfying the requirements of 5.11.2.2;
3) components in accordance with ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.15;
4) programmable electronic systems in safety related applications in accordance with 5.11.2.6.
5.11.2.1.2 Apart from exceptions permitted in this document (see 5.12.1.4, 5.12.1.5, 5.12.1.6 and 5.12.1.8),
no electric equipment shall be connected in parallel with an electric safety device.
Connections to different points of the electric safety chain are only permitted for gathering information. The
devices used for that purpose shall fulfil the requirements for safety circuits according to 5.11.2.3.2 and
5.11.2.3.3.
Commented [IJ145]: See N1722
Commented [IJ146]: See N1722ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 171
5.11.2.1.3 The effects of internal or external induction or capacity shall not cause failure of electric safety
devices in accordance with ISO 22200.
5.11.2.1.4 An output signal emanating from an electric safety device shall not be altered by an extraneous
signal emanating from another electric device placed further down the same circuit, which would result in a
dangerous condition.
5.11.2.1.5 In safety circuits comprising two or more parallel channels, all information other than that
required for parity checks shall be taken from one channel only.
5.11.2.1.65 Circuits which record, or delay, signals shall not, even in event of fault, prevent or appreciably
delay the stopping of the machine through the functioning of an electric safety device, i.e. the stopping shall
occur in the shortest time compatible with the system.
5.11.2.1.76 The construction and arrangement of the internal power supply units shall be such as to prevent
the appearance of false signals at outputs of electric safety devices due to the effects of switching.
5.11.2.1.7 Operation of electric safety devices
An electric safety device when operated shall initiate within 0,1s stopping of the machine and prevent its
setting in motion.
The electric safety devices shall act directly on the equipment controlling the supply to the machine in
accordance with the requirements of 5.9.2.2.2.3 a), 5.9.2.5 and 5.9.3.4.
If relays or contactor relays according to 5.10.3.1.3 are used to control the equipment controlling the supply
to the machine, the monitoring of these relays or contactor relays shall be done as defined in 5.9.2.2.2.3 a),
5.9.2.5 and 5.9.3.4.4.
5.11.2.1.8 Actuation of electric safety devices
The components actuating the electric safety devices shall be built so that they are able to function properly
under the mechanical stresses resulting from continuous normal operation. Mechanical failures which can
impact the safety function shall be considered.
Examples of such failures are:
a) slip on traction or friction on a system used for car speed or position sensing;
b) breakage or slack in tape, chain, rope or similar on a system used for car speed or position sensing;
c) smoke, dirt or similar on a system used for car speed or position sensing.
If the devices for actuating electric safety devices are through the nature of their installation accessible to
persons, they shall be so built that these electric safety devices cannot be rendered inoperative by simple
means.
Commented [IJ147]: See N1541
Commented [IJ148]: See N1722
Commented [IJ149]: AH06 to confirm if this text still
needed
Commented [IJ150]: See N1722ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
172 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
NOTE A magnet or a bridge piece is not considered a simple means.
In the case of redundancy-type safety circuits, it shall be ensured by mechanical or geometric arrangements
of the sensors that a mechanical fault shall not cause loss of redundancy.
For electromechanical and magnetic sensors of safety circuits, the requirements of EN 81-50:2019, 5.6.3.1.2
a) and 5.6.3.1.2 b) and 5.6.3.2 apply.
Safety contacts
5.10.2.2.15.11.2.2.1General
Safety contacts shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60947-5-1:20032017, Annex K, with a minimum
protection degree of IP4X (IEC 60529) and a mechanical durability suitable for its purpose (at least 106
operating cycles). Alternatively, they shall fulfil the following requirements:
5.11.2.2.2 The operation of a safety contact shall be by positive separation of the circuit-breaking devices.
This separation shall occur even if the contacts have welded together.
The design of a safety contact shall be such as to minimize the risk of a short-circuit resulting from component
failure.
NOTE Positive opening is achieved when all the contact-breaking elements are brought to their open position and
when, for a significant part of the travel, there are no resilient members (e.g. springs) between the moving contacts and
the part of the actuator to which the actuating force is applied.
5.11.2.2.3 The safety contacts shall be provided for a rated insulation voltage of 250 V if the enclosure
provides a degree of protection of at least IP4X (IEC 60529), or 500 V if the degree of protection of the
enclosure is less than IP4X (IEC 60529).
The safety contacts shall belong to the following categories as defined in IEC 60947-5-1:2003:
a) AC-15 for safety contacts in A.C. circuits;
b) DC-13 for safety contacts in D.C. circuits.
5.11.2.2.4 If the degree of protection is equal or less than IP4X (IEC 60529), the clearances shall be at least
3 mm, the creepage distances at least 4 mm and the distances for breaking contacts at least 4 mm after
separation. If the protection is better than IP4X (IEC 60529), the creepage distance may be reduced to 3 mm.
5.11.2.2.5 In the case of multiple breaks, the distance after separation between the contacts shall be at least
2 mm.
5.11.2.2.6 Abrasion of conductive material shall not lead to short-circuiting of contacts.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 173
Safety circuits
5.10.2.3.15.11.2.3.1General
Fault analysis of safety circuits shall take into account failures in the whole safety circuit, including sensors,
signal transmission paths, power supplies, safety logic and safety output.
5.11.2.3.2 Safety circuits shall comply with the requirements of 5.11.1 regarding the appearance of a fault.
For all components of safety circuits, an over-dimensioning should be considered for the relevant parameters
at normal operating conditions.
Justification for operating any hardware elements at their limits shall be documented.
5.11.2.3.3 Furthermore, as illustrated by Figure 2128, the following requirements shall apply:
a) if one fault combined with a second fault can lead to a dangerous situation, the lift shall be stopped at the
latest at the next operating sequence in which the first faulty element should participate.
All further operation of the lift shall be impossible as long as this fault persists.
The possibility of the second fault occurring after the first, and before the lift has been stopped by the
sequence mentioned above, is not considered;
b) if two faults, which by themselves do not lead to a dangerous situation, can lead to a dangerous situation
when combined with a third fault, the lift shall be stopped at the latest at the next operating sequence in
which one of the faulty elements should participate.
The possibility of the third fault leading to a dangerous situation before the lift has been stopped by the
sequence mentioned above is not considered;
c) if a combination of more than three faults is possible, then the safety circuit shall be designed with
multiple channels and a monitoring circuit checking the equal status of the channels.
If a different status is detected, the lift shall be stopped.
In case of two channels, the function of the monitoring circuit shall be checked at the latest prior to a re
start of the lift and, in case of failure, re-starting shall not be possible;
d) on restoration of the power supply after it has been disconnected, maintenance of the lift in the stopped
position is not necessary, provided that during the next sequence stopping is re-imposed in the cases
covered by 5.11.2.3.3 a), b) and c);
e) in redundancy-type circuits, measures shall be taken to limit as far as possible the risk of defects
occurring simultaneously in more than one circuit, arising from a single cause.
Commented [IJ151]: See N1722ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
174 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Figure 21 28 — Diagram for assessing safety circuitsISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 175
5.11.2.3.4 Safety circuits containing electronic components are regarded as safety components and shall be
verified according to the requirements in ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.6, except when all logic and failure detection
decision are made exclusively with electromechanical components. In this case sensors of safety circuits may
be mechanical, magnetic, electronic or programmable electronic.
5.11.2.3.5 A data plate shall be fixed on safety circuits containing electronic components, indicating:
a) the name of the manufacturer of the safety component;
b) the type examination certificate number;
c) the type of electric safety device.
SIL-rated circuits
5.11.2.4.1 General
SIL-rated circuits shall comply with the design rules as defined in EN 81-50:2019, 5.16 and shall have
minimum safety integrity level as defined in Table A.1.
5.11.2.4.2 SIL-rated circuits shall comply with the requirements of 5.11.1 relative to the appearance of a
fault.
Fault analysis shall take into account failures in total circuit including sensors, signal transmission paths,
power supplies, safety logic and safety output.
For all components of SIL-rated circuits, an over-dimensioning should be considered for the relevant
parameters at normal operating conditions.
Justification for operating any hardware elements at their limits shall be documented.
5.11.2.4.3 For SIL-rated circuit a proof test interval at least 20 years shall be considered.
The mission time shall not be longer than the proof test interval.
For SIL-rated circuit, applied as electric safety device listed in table A1, high demand as well as low demand
mode of operation shall be considered and the calculated PFDavg and PFH values shall comply with
respective limits given in Table 19.
SIL PFDavg PFH
1 < 5*10-2 < 5*10-6
Commented [IJ152]: See N1722ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
176 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
2 < 5*10-3 < 5*10-7
3 < 5*10-4 < 5*10-8
Table 19
NOTE: For clarification of terms high demand, low demand, proof test, PFDavg and PFH see EN 81-50 Annex B or EN 61508.
5.11.2.4.4 Measures to prevent on-site modification of the program code shall be provided.
5.11.2.4.5 If a SIL-rated circuit and a non-safety related circuit share the same printed circuit board (PCB),
the requirements of 5.10.3.2 shall apply for the separation of the two circuits.
If a SIL-rated circuit and a non-safety related circuit share the same hardware, the requirements for the SIL
rated circuit shall be met.
5.11.2.4.6 It shall be possible to identify the failure state of the SIL-rated circuit, either by a built-in system
or by an external tool. If this external tool is a special tool, it shall be available on the site.
5.11.2.4.7 Parametrization
5.11.2.4.7.1 General provisions
SIL-rated circuits are permitted to have parameters to enable the system to be matched to its application.
Parameters shall be prevented from unintentional modification.
Parameters shall have defined value ranges.
For documentation see 7.2 and 7.3.
5.11.2.4.7.2 Additional requirements for SW driven parametrization
Change of parameter shall only be possible if parametrization is enabled manually by competent
maintenance person present on site.
Means for activation and deactivation of parameterization shall fulfil at least the SIL of the safety function to
be parametrized.
When parametrization is enabled the SIL-rated circuit shall be in a safe state.
Deactivation of parametrization shall only be possible by manual action by competent maintenance person
present on site.
Unintentional deactivation of parametrization shall be prevented.
Power interruption and restoration shall be considered as unintentional actions.
5.11.2.4.8 SIL-rated circuits are regarded as safety components and shall be verified according to the
requirements in EN 81-50:2014, 5.6.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 177
5.11.2.4.9 On SIL-rated circuits a data plate shall be fixed indicating:
a) the name of the manufacturer of the safety component;
b) the type examination certificate number;
c) the type of SIL-rated circuit.
d) date of manufacturing
e) maximum mission time
Operation of electric safety devices
An electric safety device, when operated, shall immediately initiate the stopping of the machine and prevent
it from setting into motion.
The electric safety devices shall act directly on the equipment controlling the supply to the machine, in
accordance with the requirements of 5.9.2.2.2.3 a), 5.9.2.5 and 5.9.3.4.
If relays or contactor relays according to 5.10.3.1.3 are used to control the equipment controlling the supply
to the machine, the monitoring of these relays or contactor relays shall be done as defined in 5.9.2.2.2.3 a),
5.9.2.5 and 5.9.3.4.4.
Actuation of electric safety devices
The components actuating the electric safety devices shall be built so that they are able to function properly
under the mechanical stresses resulting from continuous normal operation. Mechanical failures which can
impact the safety function shall be considered.
Examples of such failures are:
a) slip on traction or friction, on a system used for car speed or position sensing;
b) breakage or slack in tape, chain, rope or similar, on a system used for car speed or position sensing;
c) smoke, dirt or similar, on a system used for car speed or position sensing.
If the devices for actuating electric safety devices are, through the nature of their installation, accessible to
persons, they shall be built so that these electric safety devices cannot be rendered inoperative by simple
means.
NOTE A magnet or a bridge piece is not considered a simple means.
In the case of redundancy-type safety circuits, it shall be ensured by mechanical or geometric arrangements
of the transmitter elements that a mechanical fault shall not cause loss of redundancy.
For transmitter elements of safety circuits, the requirements of ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.6.3.1.1 apply.
Commented [IJ153]: See N1722ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
178 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Programmable electronic systems in safety related applications (PESSRAL)
Table A.1 gives the minimum safety integrity level for each electric safety device.
Safety circuits, including programmable electronic systems designed in accordance with 5.11.2.6, cover the
requirements of 5.11.2.3.3.
PESSRAL shall comply with the design rules for relevant safety integrity levels (SIL) as listed in ISO 8100-
2:2019, 5.16.
To avoid unsafe modification, measures to prevent unauthorized access to the program code and safety
related data of PESSRAL shall be provided, e.g. using EPROM, access code, etc.
If a PESSRAL and a non-safety-related system share the same printed circuit board (PCB), the requirements
of 5.10.3.2 shall apply for the separation of the two systems.
If a PESSRAL and a non-safety-related system share the same hardware, the requirements for PESSRAL shall
be met.
It shall be possible to identify the failure state of the PESSRAL, either by a built-in system or by an external
tool. If this external tool is a special tool, it shall be available on the site.
5.115.12 Controls — Final limit switches — Priorities
5.11.15.12.1 Control of lift operations
Control of normal operation
5.12.1.1.1 This control shall be carried out through buttons or similar devices, such as touch control,
magnetic cards, etc. These shall be placed in boxes, such that no live parts are accessible to the user.
The colour yellow shall not be used for other control devices than the alarm initiation device.
5.12.1.1.2 The control devices shall be clearly identified by reference to their function, see also EN 81-
70:2003, 5.4 or ISO 4190-5.
5.12.1.1.3 Visible notices or signals shall enable persons in the car to know at which landing the lift has
stopped.
5.12.1.1.4 The stopping accuracy of the car shall be ±10 mm. If, during loading and unloading phases for
example, the levelling accuracy of ±20 mm is exceeded, it shall be corrected to ±10 mm.
Load control
5.12.1.2.1 The lift shall be fitted with a device to prevent normal starting, including re-levelling, in the event
of overload in the car. In the case of hydraulic lifts, the device shall not prevent re-levelling.
5.12.1.2.2 The overload shall be detected at the latest when the rated load is exceeded by 10 %, with a
minimum of 75 kg.
5.12.1.2.3 In the event of overload:ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 179
a) users shall be informed by an audible and a visible signal in the car;
b) automatic power-operated doors shall be brought into the fully open position;
c) manually operated doors shall remain unlocked;
d) any preliminary operation in accordance with 5.12.1.4 shall be nullified.
Monitoring the normal slowdown of the machine in case of reduced buffer
stroke
In the case of 5.8.2.2.2, electric safety devices in conformity with 5.11.2 shall check that the slowdown is
effective before arrival at terminal landings.
If the slowdown is not effective, the machine brake shall cause the car speed to be reduced in such a way that
if the car or the counterweight comes into contact with the buffers, the striking speed shall not exceed that
for which the buffers were designed.
Control of levelling, re-levelling and preliminary operation with doors not
closed and locked
Movement of the car with landing and car doors not closed and locked is permitted for levelling, re-levelling
and preliminary operation on condition that:
a) the movement is limited to the unlocking zone (5.3.8.1) by an electric safety device in conformity with
5.11.2. During preliminary operations, the car shall be kept within 20 mm from the landing (see
5.12.1.1.4 and 5.4.2.2.1);
b) during levelling operations, the means for making the electric safety devices of doors inoperative shall
only function after the stopping signal for this landing has been given;
c) the speed of levelling does not exceed 0,80 m/s. In addition, on lifts with manually controlled landing
doors, it shall be checked that:
1) for machines whose maximum speed of rotation is determined by the fixed frequency of the supply, only
the control circuit for the low speed movement has been energized;
2) for other machines, the speed at the moment the unlocking zone is reached does not exceed 0,80 m/s;
d) the speed of re-levelling does not exceed 0,30 m/s.
Control of inspection operation
5.11.1.5.15.12.1.5.1Design requirements
5.12.1.5.1.1 To facilitate inspection and maintenance, a readily operable inspection control station shall
be permanently installed:
Commented [IJ154]: See N1541ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
180 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
a) on the car roof (5.4.8 a);
b) in the pit (5.2.1.5.1 b);
c) in the car in the case of 5.2.6.4.3.4;
d) on a platform in the case of 5.2.6.4.5.6.
5.12.1.5.1.2 The inspection control station shall consist of:
a) a switch (inspection operation switch) which shall satisfy the requirements for electric safety devices
(5.11.2).
This switch, which shall be bi-stable, shall be protected against involuntary operation;
b) direction push buttons “UP” and “DOWN” protected against accidental operation with the direction of
movement clearly indicated;
c) a push button "RUN" protected against accidental operation;
d) a stopping device in conformity with 5.12.1.11.
The control station may also incorporate special switches, protected against accidental operation, for
controlling the mechanism of doors from the car roof.
5.12.1.5.1.3 The inspection control station shall have a minimum degree of protection of IPXXD
(EN 60529).
Rotary control switches shall have a means of prevention of rotation of the stationary member. Friction alone
shall not be considered sufficient.
5.11.1.5.25.12.1.5.2Functional requirements:
5.11.1.5.2.15.12.1.5.2.1 Inspection operation switch
The inspection operation switch, when in the inspection position, shall satisfy the following conditions for
functioning simultaneously:
a) neutralize the normal operation controls;
b) neutralize emergency electrical operation (5.12.1.6);
c) levelling and re-levelling (5.12.1.4) shall be disabled;
d) any automatic movement of power-operated doors shall be prevented. Power-operated closing of the
door(s) shall depend on:
1) the operation of a direction push button for car movement; orISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 181
2) additional switches protected against accidental operation for controlling the mechanism of doors.
e) the car speed shall not exceed 0,63 m/s;
f) the car speed shall not exceed 0,30 m/s when the vertical distance above any standing area on car roof
(see 5.2.5.7.3) or in pit is 2,0 m or less;
g) the limits of normal car travel shall not be overrun, i.e. not exceed the stopping positions in normal
operation;
h) the operation of the lift shall remain dependent on the safety devices;
i) if more than one inspection control station is switched to “INSPECTION" :
1) the car shall be prevented from moving, or
2) movement of the car is only possible by operation of the run button and the same direction push button on the respective
inspection control stations simultaneously.in case of 5.2.6.4.3.4 the inspection operation switch in the car shall render
inoperative the electric safety device according to 5.2.6.4.3.3 e);
if more than one inspection control station is switched to “INSPECTION", it shall not be possible to move the
car from any of them, unless the same push buttons on the inspection control stations are operated
simultaneously;
j) j) in case of 5.2.6.4.3.4, the inspection operation switch in the car shall render inoperative the electric
safety device according to 5.2.6.4.3.3 e).
i)k)neutralise the automatic rescue operation
5.11.1.5.2.25.12.1.5.2.2 Return-to-normal operation of the lift
The return-to-normal operation of the lift shall only be effected by switching the inspection operation
switch(es) back to normal.
Additionally, return-to-normal operation of the lift from the pit inspection station shall only be made under
the following conditions:
a) the landing doors giving access to the pit are closed and locked;
b) all the stopping devices in the pit are inactive;
c) the electrical reset device outside the well is operated and located:
1) in conjunction with emergency unlocking means of the door giving access to the pit; or
2) in a place accessible to authorized persons only, e.g. inside a locked cabinet located in close
proximity to the door giving access to the pit.
Commented [IJ155]: See N1538
Commented [IJ156]: See N1544ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
182 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Precautions shall be taken to prevent all involuntary movement of the car, in the event of one of the faults
listed in 5.11.1.2 appearing in the circuit(s) involved in the inspection operation.
5.11.1.5.2.35.12.1.5.2.3 Push buttons
The movement of the car in inspection operation shall solely depend on constant pressure on a direction
push button, and the "RUN" push button.
It shall be possible to operate the "RUN" button and a direction button with one hand simultaneously.
The inspection operation electric safety device shall be bypassed by one of the following solutions:
a) a series connection of a direction and the "RUN" push button.
These push buttons shall belong to the following categories, as defined in IEC 60947-5-1:20032017:
— AC-15 for contacts in A.C. circuits;
— DC-13 for contacts in D.C. circuits.
The durability shall be at least 1 000 000 mechanical and electrical operating cycles related to the
applied load.
b) an electric safety device in accordance with 5.11.2 which is monitoring the correct operation of the
direction and "RUN" push buttons.
5.11.1.5.2.45.12.1.5.2.4 Inspection control station(s)
The following information shall be given on the inspection control station(s) (see Figure 2229):
a) the words “NORMAL” and “INSPECTION” on or near the inspection operation switch;
b) the direction of motion identified by colours, as in Table 1720.
Table 17 20 — Inspection control station — Button designations
Control Colour of button Colour of symbol Symbol reference Symbol
UP White Black IEC 60417-5022
DOWN Black White IEC 60417-5022
RUN Blue White IEC 60417-5023
Formatted: LeftISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 183
Key
1 stopping device
2 upwards push button
3 downward push button
4 RUN push button
5 alarm push button
6 normal/inspection switch
NOTE Placing the alarm button in the control station is optional.
Figure 22 29 — Inspection control station — Controls and pictograms
Control of emergency electrical operation
5.12.1.6.1 If a means of emergency electrical operation is required in accordance with 5.9.2.3.3, an
emergency electrical operation switch in conformity with 5.11.2 shall be installed. The machine shall be
supplied from the normal main supply, or from the stand-by supply if there is one.
The following conditions shall be satisfied simultaneously:
a) operation of the emergency electrical operation switch shall allow the control of car movement by
constant pressure on buttons protected against accidental operation. The direction of movement shall
be clearly indicated;
b) after operation of the emergency electrical operation switch, all movement of the car, except that
controlled by this switch, shall be prevented;ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
184 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
c) the effects of the emergency electrical operation shall be overridden by switching on the inspection
operation as follows:
1) when actuating the emergency electrical operation switch while the inspection operation is
actuated, the emergency electrical operation is inactive, the up/down/run buttons of the inspection
operation shall remain effective;
2) when actuating the inspection operation while the emergency electrical operation is actuated, the
emergency electrical operation becomes inactive, the up/down/run buttons of the inspection
operation shall become effective.
d) the emergency electrical operation switch shall render inoperative, by itself or through another electric
switch in conformity with 5.11.2, the following electric devices:
1) those used for checking slack suspension meansrope or chain, according to 5.5.5.3 b);
2) those mounted on the car safety gear, according to 5.6.2.1.5;
3) those for overspeed, according to 5.6.2.2.1.6 a) and b);
4) those mounted on the ascending car overspeed protection means, according to 5.6.6.5;
5) those mounted on the buffers, according to 5.8.2.2.4;
6) final limit switches, according to 5.12.2;
e) the emergency electrical operation switch and its push buttons shall be placed so that the machine can
be observed directly or by display devices (5.2.6.6.2 c);
f) the car speed shall not exceed 0,30 m/s.
5.12.1.6.2 The emergency electrical operation means shall have a minimum degree of protection of IPXXD
(IEC 60529).
Rotary control switches shall have a means of prevention of rotation of the stationary member. Friction alone
shall not be considered sufficient.
Protection for maintenance operations
The control system shall be provided with means to:
— prevent the lift from answering to landing calls and remote commands;
— disable the automatic door operation; and
— give at least terminal floor calls for maintenance.
The means shall be clearly indicated and only accessible to authorized persons.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 185
Landing and car door bypass device
5.12.1.8.1 For maintenance of contacts of the landing door, car door, and door locking, a bypass device shall
be provided in the control panel or emergency and test panel.
5.12.1.8.2 The device(s) shall either:
a) be a switch protected against unintended use by mechanically movable means (e.g. cover, security cap)
permanently installed, or
b) a plug socket combination
The device(s) in a) or b) which shall satisfy the requirements for electric safety devices according 5.11.2.
5.12.1.8.3 The landing and car door bypass devices shall be identifiable by the word "BYPASS" written on
or near to them. In addition, the contacts to be bypassed shall be indicated with the identifiers according to
the electrical diagrams.
Alternatively, the symbol shown in Figure 23 30 together with an identifier according to electric diagrams
can be used.
Key
DS example of designation found on the wiring diagram
Figure 23 30 — Bypass pictogram
The activation state of the bypass device(s) shall be clearly indicated.
The following conditions for functioning shall be satisfied:
a) normal operation controls, including the operation of any automatic power-operated doors, shall be
neutralized;
b) bypassing the contacts of the landing doors (5.3.9.4, 5.3.11.2), the landing door locks (5.3.9.1), the car
door(s) (5.3.13.2) and the car door locks (5.3.9.2) shall be possible;
c) it shall not be possible to bypass the contacts of the car door(s) and landing doors at the same time;
Commented [IJ157]: See N1537 & N1541ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
186 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
d) a separate monitoring signal shall be provided to check that the car door(s) is/are in the closed position
in order to allow a car movement with bypassed car door closed contact(s). This applies also if the car
door closed contact(s) and the car door locked contact(s) are combined;
e) in case of manually operated landing doors, it shall not be possible to bypass the contacts of the landing
doors (5.3.9.4) and the landing door locks (5.3.9.1) at the same time;
f) movement of the car shall only be possible in inspection operation (5.12.1.5) or emergency electrical
operation (5.12.1.6);
g) an audible signal in the car and a flashing light under the car shall be activated during movement. The
sound level of the audible warning shall be minimum 55 dB(A) below the car at a distance of 1 m.
Prevention of normal operation of the lift with faulty door contact circuits
The correct operation of the electric safety device checking closed position of car door (5.3.13.2), the electric
safety device checking locked position of landing door locking device (5.3.9.1) and the monitoring signal
referred to in 5.12.1.8.3 d), shall be monitored while the car is in the unlocking zone, the car door is opened
and the landing door lock is released.
If devices are detected as faulty, the normal operation of the lift shall be prevented.
Electrical anti-creep system (see Table 1214)
An electrical anti-creep system shall satisfy the following conditions:
a) the car shall be dispatched automatically to the lowest landing within 15 min after the last normal
journey;
b) in the case of a lift provided with manually operated doors, or with power-operated doors where closing
is carried out under the continuous control of the users, there shall be a notice in the car as follows:
"CLOSE DOORS". The minimum height of the characters shall be 50 mm;
c) there shall be an inscription on or near the main switch as follows: "Switch off only when the car is at
the lowest landing".
Stopping devices
5.12.1.11.1 A stopping device shall be provided for stopping, and maintaining the lift out of service,
including the power-operated doors:
a) in the lift pit [5.2.1.5.1 a)];
b) in the pulley room [5.2.1.5.2 c)];
c) on the car roof [5.4.8 b)];
d) at the inspection control devices [5.12.1.5.1.2 d)];ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 187
e) at the lift machine, unless there is a main switch or another stopping device nearby that is directly
accessible within 1 m;
f) at the test panel(s) (5.2.6.6), unless there is a main switch or another stopping device nearby that is
directly accessible within 1 m.
The marking "STOP" shall be on or near the stopping device.
5.12.1.11.2 The stopping devices shall consist of electric safety devices in conformity with 5.11.2. They shall
be bi-stable and such that a return to service cannot result from an involuntary action.
Button type devices according to IEC 60947-5-5 shall be used as stopping device.
5.12.1.11.3 A stopping device in the car shall not be used.
Control of automatic rescue operation
5.12.1.12.1 Automatic rescue operation if provided shall move the lift car to a landing in case of failure or
loss of power supply.
5.12.1.12.2 The automatic rescue operation shall not make ineffective any electric safety device unless
additional electric safety device provides same safety function.
Note: As example electric safety devices for Overspeed detection and Check on retardation can be replaced with additional electric
safety device which operates at buffer rated speed or lower.
5.12.1.12.3 Car speed shall not exceed rated speed during automatic rescue operation.
5.12.1.12.4 Stopping accuracy during automatic rescue operation shall be +/-20mm.
Opening of doors during levelling according to 5.12.1.4 shall not be permitted during automatic rescue
operation.
An acoustic signal shall operate at any time the door(s) is (are) not closed when the car is more than 20mm
from the landing for more than 3 seconds.
5.12.1.12.5 Automatic rescue operation may use on-board power supply common with other functions
provided that all corresponding performance requirements are fulfilled after automatic rescue operation is
ceased.
5.11.25.12.2 Final limit switches
General
Final limit switches shall be provided:
a) at top and bottom of travel for traction and positive drive lifts;ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
188 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
b) at top of travel only for hydraulic lifts.
Final limit switches shall be set to function as close as possible to the terminal floors, without risk of
accidental operation.
They shall operate before the car (or counterweight if there is one) comes into contact with the buffers or
the ram comes into contact with its cushioned stop. The actuation of the final limit switches shall be
maintained while the buffers are compressed or the ram is in the zone of the cushioned stop.
Actuation of the final limit switches
5.12.2.2.1 Separate actuating devices shall be used for normal terminal stopping and final limit switches.
5.12.2.2.2 In the case of positive drive lifts, actuation of the final limit switches shall be effected by:
a) a device linked to the movement of the machine;
b) the car and by the balancing weight, if there is one, at the top of the well; or
c) the car at the top and the bottom of the well, if there is no balancing weight.
5.12.2.2.3 In the case of traction drive lifts, actuation of the final limit switches shall be effected either:
a) directly by the car at the top and bottom of the well; or
b) indirectly by a device linked to the car, e.g. by a rope, belt or chain.
In case b), breakage of, or slack in, this linkage shall cause the machine to stop by means of an electric safety
device in conformity with 5.11.2.
5.12.2.2.4 In the case of direct acting hydraulic lifts, actuation of the final limit switch shall be effected
either:
a) by the car or the ram, or
b) indirectly by a device linked to the car, e.g. by a rope, belt or chain.
In case b) the machine shall be stopped by means of an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2 if
breakage or slack in this linkage occurs.
5.12.2.2.5 In the case of indirect acting hydraulic lifts, actuation of the final limit switch shall be effected:
a) either directly by the ram; or
b) indirectly by a device linked to the ram, e.g. by a rope, belt or chain.
In case b), the machine shall be stopped by means of an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2 if
breakage of, or slack in, this linkage occurs.
Commented [IJ158]: ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 189
Method of operation of final limit switches
5.12.2.3.1 The final limit switch(es) shall open:
a) directly by positive mechanical separation of the circuits feeding the motor and brake; or
b) an electric safety device in conformity with 5.11.2.
5.12.2.3.2 After the operation of the final limit switches, car movement in response to car and landing calls
shall no longer be possible, even in the case of the car leaving the actuation zone by creeping for hydraulic
lifts.
When an electrical anti-creep system as per 5.12.1.10 is used, the automatic despatch of the car according to
5.12.1.10 a) shall come into operation immediately as soon as the car leaves the actuation zone of the final
limit switch.
The return to normal operation of the lift shall require the intervention of a competent maintenance person
competent in maintenance procedures..
5.11.35.12.3 Emergency alarm device and intercom system
5.12.3.1 A remote alarm system in accordance with EN 81-28 shall be installed (see also 5.2.1.6) ensuring
a two-way voice communication allowing permanent contact with a rescue service.
5.12.3.2 An intercom system, or similar device, powered by the emergency supply referred to in 5.4.10.4,
shall be installed between inside the car and the place from which the emergency operation is carried out, if
the lift travel exceeds 30 m, or if a direct acoustic communication between both locations is not possible.
5.11.45.12.4 Priorities and signals
5.12.4.1 For lifts with manual doors, a device shall prevent the car leaving a landing for a period of at least
2 s after stopping.
5.12.4.2 A passenger entering the car shall have at least 2 seconds after the doors have closed, to actuate
a control device before any external call buttons can become effective.
This requirement need not apply in the case of lifts operating on collective control.
5.12.4.3 In the case of collective control, an illuminated signal, which is clearly visible from the landing,
shall indicate to the users waiting on this landing the direction of the next movement imposed on the car.
For groups of lifts, position indicators on the landings are not recommended. However, it is recommended
that the arrival of a car be preceded by an audible signal.
Formatted: Automatically adjust right indent when grid
is defined, Adjust space between Latin and Asian text,
Adjust space between Asian text and numbers
Commented [IJ159]: See N1538
Formatted: Font: (Asian) Calibri, Complex Script Font:
11 ptISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
190 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
6 Verification of the safety requirements and/or protective measures
6.1 Technical compliance documentation
Technical compliance documentation shall be provided to facilitate the verification according to 6.2. The
technical compliance documentation shall contain the necessary information to ascertain that the
constituent parts are correctly designed and the installation is in conformity with this document.
NOTE Annex B gives guidance on the information to be included in the technical compliance documentation.
6.2 Verification of design
Table 18 21 indicates the methods by which the safety requirements and/or protective measures described
in Clause 5 shall be verified. Secondary subclauses, which are not listed in the table, are verified as part of
the quoted subclause. For example, 5.2.2.4 is verified as part of 5.2.2.
Table 121 — Means of verification of the safety requirements and/or protective measures
Subcla
use
Safety
requirements
Visual
inspectiona
Performanc
e check/
testb
Measureme
ntc Drawing/
calculationd
User
information e
5.1 General
5.1.1 Non-significant
hazards ✓ ✓
5.1.2 Notices and Labels ✓ ✓ 5.2 Well, machinery spaces and pulley rooms
5.2.1 General provisions ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.2.2
Access to well and to
machinery spaces and
pulley rooms ✓ ✓ ✓
5.2.3
Access and emergency
doors — Access trap
doors — Inspection
doors ✓ ✓ ✓
5.2.4 Notices ✓ ✓ 5.2.5 Well ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.2.6 Machinery spaces and
pulley rooms ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.3 Landing doors and car doors
5.3.1 General provisions ✓ ✓ ✓
5.3.2 Height and width of
entrances ✓ ✓ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 191
Subcla
use
Safety
requirements
Visual
inspectiona
Performanc
e check/
testb
Measureme
ntc Drawing/
calculationd
User
information e
5.3.3 Sills, guides, door
suspension ✓ ✓ ✓
5.3.4 Horizontal door
clearances ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.3.5 Strength of landings
and car doors ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.3.6 Protection in relation
to door operation ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.3.7
Local landing lighting
and “car here” signal
lights ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.3.8 Locking and closed
landing door check ✓ ✓ ✓
5.3.9
Locking and
emergency unlocking
of landing and car
doors ✓ ✓ ✓
5.3.10
Requirements
common to devices for
proving the locked
condition and the
closed condition of the
landing door
✓
5.3.11
Sliding landing doors
with multiple,
mechanically linked
panels ✓ ✓ ✓
5.3.12
Closing of
automatically
operated landing
doors ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.3.13
Electric safety device
for proving the car
doors closed ✓ ✓ ✓
5.3.14
Sliding or folding car
doors with multiple,
mechanically linked
panels ✓ ✓ ✓
Commented [IJ160]: See N1564ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
192 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Subcla
use
Safety
requirements
Visual
inspectiona
Performanc
e check/
testb
Measureme
ntc Drawing/
calculationd
User
information e
5.3.15 Opening the car door ✓ ✓ ✓ 5.4 Car, counterweight and balancing weight
5.4.1 Height of car ✓ ✓ ✓
5.4.2
Available car area,
rated load, number of
passengers ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.4.3 Walls, floor and roof of
the car ✓ ✓
5.4.4
Car door, floor, wall,
ceiling and decorative
materials ✓ ✓
5.4.5 Apron ✓ ✓ ✓
5.4.6 Emergency trap doors
and emergency doors ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.4.7 Car roof ✓ ✓ ✓
5.4.8 Equipment on top of
the car ✓ ✓
5.4.9 Ventilation ✓ ✓ 5.4.10 Lighting ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.4.11 Counterweight/balanc
ing weight ✓ ✓
5.5 Suspension means, compensation means and related protection means
5.5.1 Suspension means ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.5.2
Sheave, pulley, drum
and rope diameter
ratios, rope/chain
terminations ✓ ✓ ✓
5.5.3 Rope traction ✓ ✓
5.5.4 Winding up of ropes
for positive drive lifts ✓ ✓
5.5.5
Distribution of load
between the ropes or
the chains ✓ ✓ ✓
5.5.6 Compensation means ✓ ✓ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 193
Subcla
use
Safety
requirements
Visual
inspectiona
Performanc
e check/
testb
Measureme
ntc Drawing/
calculationd
User
information e
5.5.7 Protection for sheaves,
pulleys and sprockets ✓ ✓
5.5.8
Traction sheaves,
pulleys and sprockets
in the well ✓ ✓ ✓
5.6 Precautions against free fall, excessive speed, unintended car movement and creeping of the
car
5.6.1 General provisions ✓ ✓ ✓
5.6.2 Safety gear and its
tripping means ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.6.3 Rupture valve ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 5.6.4 Restrictors ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 5.6.5 Pawl device ✓ ✓ ✓
5.6.6
Ascending car
overspeed protection
means ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.6.7
Protection against
unintended car
movement ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.7 Guide rails
5.7.1
Guiding of the car,
counterweight or
balancing weight ✓ ✓ ✓
5.7.2 Permissible stresses
and deflections ✓ ✓
5.7.3 Combination of loads
and forces ✓
5.7.4 Impact factors ✓ 5.8 Buffers
5.8.1 Car and counterweight
buffers ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.8.2 Stroke of car and
counterweight buffers ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
194 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Subcla
use
Safety
requirements
Visual
inspectiona
Performanc
e check/
testb
Measureme
ntc Drawing/
calculationd
User
information e
5.9 Lift machinery and associated equipment
5.9.1 General provision ✓ ✓
5.9.2
Lift machine for
traction lifts and
positive drive lifts ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.9.3 Lift machine for
hydraulic lifts ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.10 Electric installations and appliances
5.10.1 General provisions ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.10.2
Incoming supply
conductor
terminations ✓
5.10.3
Contactors, contactor
relays, components of
safety circuits ✓ ✓ ✓
5.10.4 Protection of electrical
equipment ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.10.5 Main switches ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 5.10.6 Electric wiring ✓ ✓
5.10.7 Lighting and socket
outlets ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.10.8
Control of the supply
for lighting and socket
outlets ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.10.9 Protective earthing ✓ ✓ 5.10.1
0
Electrical
identification ✓ ✓ ✓
5.11 Protection against electric faults; failure analysis; electric safety devices
5.11.1
Protection against
electric faults; failure
analysis ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.11.2 Electric safety devices ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 5.12 Controls — Final limit switches — Priorities
5.12.1 Control of lift
operations ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 195
Subcla
use
Safety
requirements
Visual
inspectiona
Performanc
e check/
testb
Measureme
ntc Drawing/
calculationd
User
information e
5.12.2 Final limit switches ✓ ✓ ✓ 5.12.3 Emergency alarm
device and intercom
system ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.12.4 Priorities and signals ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ a Visual inspection is used to verify the features necessary for the requirement, by visual examination of the components
supplied.
b A performance check/test verifies that the features provided perform their function in such a way that the requirement is
met.
c Measurement verifies, by the use of instruments, that requirements are met to the specified limits.
d Drawings/calculations verify that the design characteristics of the components provided meet the requirements.
e Verify that the relevant point is dealt with in the instructions handbook or by marking.
6.3 Examinations and tests before putting into service
6.3.1 Braking system (5.9.2.2)
Before the lift is put into service, the particular tests specified in 6.3.1 to 6.3.14, as referred to in Table 1821,
shall be carried out.
The test shall demonstrate that:
a) the electro-mechanical brake on its own is capable of stopping the machine when the car is travelling
downwards at the rated speed and with the rated load plus 25 %. In these conditions, the retardation of
the car shall not exceed that resulting from operation of the safety gear or stopping on the buffer;
b) additionally, it shall be verified by practical tests that, where one brake set is not working, a sufficient
braking effort is exerted to decelerate the car travelling downwards at the rated speed and with the rated
load (see 5.9.2.2.2.1);
c) with the car loaded within the limits of Formulae (20) and (21):
(q − 0,1) · Q (20)
(q + 0,1) · Q (21)
where
q is the balance factor indicating the amount of counterbalance of the rated load by the
counterweight, and;
Q is the rated loadISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
196 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
it shall be verified that the manual release of the brake (5.9.2.2.2.7) causes a natural movement of the
lift, or that the means for that purpose (5.9.2.2.2.9 b) are available and operative.
6.3.2 Electric installation
The following tests shall be performed:
a) visual check (e.g. damage, loose wires, all earth wires connected);
b) continuity of the protective conductors according to IEC 60364-6:20062016, 6.4.1.3.2 a2) (5.10.9);
c) measurement of the insulation resistance of the different circuits (5.10.1.3). For this measurement, all
the electronic components shall be disconnected;
d) verification of the effectiveness of the measures for fault protection (protection against indirect contact)
by automatic disconnection of supply according to IEC 60364-6:20062016, 616.4.3.46 and 61.3.78.
6.3.3 Checking of the traction (5.5.3)
The traction shall be checked by making several stops with the most severe braking compatible with the
installation. At each test, complete stoppage of the car shall occur.
The test shall be carried out:
a) ascending, with the car empty, in the upper part of the travel;
b) descending, with the car loaded with 125 % of the rated load, in the lower part of the travel.
The counterweight shall be brought into contact with the buffer(s) and the machine shall continue to be
turned until suspension meansrope slippage occurs. If slippage does not occur, the car shall not be raised. It
shall be checked that the balance is as stated by the installer.
6.3.4 Car safety gear (5.6.2)
The aim of the test, before putting into service, is to check the correct mounting, correct setting and the
soundness of the complete assembly, comprising car and decorative finishes, safety gear, guide rails and their
fixing to the building.
The test shall be made while the car is descending, with the required load uniformly distributed over the car
area, the machine running until the suspension meansropes slip or become slack, and under the following
conditions:
a) instantaneous safety gear:
The car shall travel at the rated speed and be loaded either:
1) with the rated load when the rated load corresponds to Table 6 (5.4.2.1), or
2) for hydraulic lift;
i. with 125% of the rated load, orISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 197
ii. in case of lifts designed and load capacities to table 7, a load corresponding to the load from table
6
for hydraulic lifts, with 125 % of the rated load, except that the load shall not exceed the corresponding
Table 6 load when the rated load is smaller than the value given in Table 6 (5.4.2.1);
b) progressive safety gear:
For traction drive lifts, the car shall be loaded with 125 % of the rated load, and travel at the rated speed
or lower.
For positive drive lifts and hydraulic lifts, when the rated load corresponds with Table 6 (5.4.2.1), the
car shall be loaded with the rated load, and travel at the rated speed or lower.
For hydraulic lifts, when the rated load is smaller than the value given by Table 6 (5.4.2.1), the car shall
be loaded with 125 % of the rated load, except that the load shall not exceed the corresponding Table 6
load, and travel at rated speed or lower.
When the test is made at a speed lower than the rated speed, the manufacturer shall provide curves to
illustrate the behaviour of the type tested progressive safety gear when dynamically tested with the
suspensions attached.
After the test, it shall be ascertained that no deterioration, which could adversely affect the normal use of the
lift has occurred. If necessary, friction components may be replaced. Visual check is considered to be
sufficient.
In order to facilitate disengagement of the safety gear, it is recommended that the test be carried out opposite
a door in order to be able to unload the car.
6.3.5 Counterweight or balancing weight safety gear (5.6.2)
The aim of the test, before putting into service, is to check the correct mounting, correct setting and the
soundness of the complete assembly, comprising counterweight or balancing weight, safety gear, guide rails
and their fixing to the building.
The test shall be made while the counterweight or the balancing weight is descending, and under the
following conditions. The machine shall remain running until the ropes slip or become slack:
a) for instantaneous safety gear tripped by overspeed governor or safety rope, the test shall be made with
an empty car, at the rated speed;
b) for progressive safety gear, the test shall be made with an empty car, at the rated speed or lower.
When the test is made at a speed lower than the rated speed, the manufacturer shall provide curves to
illustrate the behaviour of the type tested progressive safety gear under counterweight or balancing weight
application when dynamically tested with the suspensions attached.
Commented [IJ161]: WG1 comment to make the
requirement clearer.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
198 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
After the test, it shall be ascertained that no deterioration, which could adversely affect the normal use of the
lift has occurred. If necessary, friction components may be replaced. Visual check is considered to be
sufficient.
6.3.6 Pawl device (5.6.5)
a) dynamic test:
The test shall be made while the car is travelling at a normal speed downwards, with the load uniformly
distributed; the contacts on the Pawl device and on the energy dissipation buffer (5.6.5.7), if any, being
short-circuited to avoid closing of the down direction valves.
The car shall be loaded with 125 % of the rated load and shall be stopped by the pawl device at each
landing.
After the test, it shall be ascertained that no deterioration which could adversely affect the normal use
of the lift has occurred. Visual check is considered to be sufficient;
b) visual examination of the engagement of the pawl(s) with all supports, and of the running clearance
measured horizontally between the pawl(s) and all supports during travel;
c) verification of the stroke of the buffers;
6.3.7 Buffers (5.8.1, 5.8.2)
a) for energy accumulation type buffers, the test shall be carried out in the following manner:
1) the car with its rated load shall be placed on the buffer(s);
2) the suspension means ropes shall be made slack or the pressure in the hydraulic system shall be
reduced to the minimum by pressing the emergency manual lowering button; and
3) it shall be checked that the compression corresponds to the valuesfigures given in the technical
compliance documentation (see Annex B);
NOTE It can be necessary to override the minimum pressure device or temporarily modify the setting of
the minimum low pressure device.
b) for energy dissipation type buffers, the test shall be carried out in the following manner: the car with its
rated load and the counterweight shall be brought into contact with the buffers at the rated speed or at
the speed for which the stroke of the buffers has been calculated, in the case of the use of reduced stroke
buffers with verification of the retardation (5.8.2.2.2).
After the test, it shall be ascertained that no deterioration, which could adversely affect the normal use
of the lift has occurred. Visual check is considered to be sufficient;
Commented [IJ162]: WG1 editorial changeISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 199
6.3.8 Rupture valve (5.6.3)
A system test shall be carried out, with the rated load uniformly distributed in the descending car at an
overspeed (5.6.3.1) to operate the rupture valve. The correct adjustment of the tripping speed can be
checked, for instance, by comparison with the manufacture's adjustment diagram (see Annex B).
For lifts with several interconnected rupture valves, check the simultaneous closing by measuring the
inclination of the car floor (5.6.3.4);
6.3.9 Restrictor/one-way restrictor (5.6.4)
Check that the maximum speed, vmax, does not exceed vd + 0,30 m/s:
— either by measuring; or
— by using Formula (22):
=
− max t
t
p v v p p
(22)
where
p is the full load pressure, in megapascals;
pt is the pressure measured during a downward journey with rated load in the car, in
megapascals;a
vmax is the maximum downward speed in the case of a rupture in the hydraulic system, in
metres per second;
vt is the speed measured during a downward journey with rated load in the car, in metres
per second.
a If necessary, pressure losses and friction losses shall be taken into account.
6.3.10 Pressure test
A pressure of 200 % full load pressure is applied to the hydraulic system between the non-return valve and
the jack included. The system is then observed for evidence of pressure drop and leakage during a period of
5 min (taking into account the possible effects of temperature change in the hydraulic fluid).
After this test, it shall be visually ascertained that the integrity of the hydraulic system is maintained:
This test should be carried out after the test of the devices against free fall (5.6), and include any hydraulic
elements included in the uncontrolled movement protection means.
6.3.11 Ascending car overspeed protection means (5.6.6)
The test shall be made while the empty car is ascending at not less than the rated speed, using only this device
for braking.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
200 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
6.3.12 Stopping of the car at landings and levelling accuracy (5.12.1.1.4)
The stopping accuracy of the car shall be verified to be in compliance with 5.12.1.1.4, at all landings, and in
both directions for intermediate floors.
It shall be verified that the car maintains levelling accuracy as per 5.12.1.1.4 during loading and unloading
conditions. This verification shall be made at the most unfavourable floor.
6.3.13 Protection against unintended car movement (5.6.7)
The aim of the test before putting into service is to check detection and stopping elements.
Test requirements: only the stopping element of the means defined in 5.6.7 shall be used for the tests for
stopping the lift. The test shall:
— consist in verifying that the stopping element of the means is triggered as required by type examination;
— be made by moving the empty car in the upward direction in the upper part of the well (e.g. from one
floor from top terminal) and a fully loaded car in the downward direction in the lower part of the well
(e.g. from one floor from bottom terminal) with a pre-set speed, e.g. as defined during type testing,
(inspection speed etc.).
The test, as defined by the type examination, shall confirm that the unintended movement distance will not
exceed the value given in 5.6.7.5.
If the means requires self-monitoring (5.6.7.3), its function shall be checked.
NOTE If the stopping element of the means involves elements present at landing floors, it can be necessary to
repeat the test for each concerned landing.
6.3.14 Protection against falling/shearing (5.3.9.3.4)
With the car outside of the unlocking zone (see 5.3.8.1) and the landing door held open with a gap of 100 mm,
it shall be checked that, when released, the landing door closes and locks.
6.3.15 Balancing of vertical sliding door (5.3.3.3.5)
It shall be checked that a vertical sliding door does not start to open by itself when it is at a position with a
gap of 100 mm from fully closed.
7 Information for use
7.1 General
The documentation shall consist of an instruction manual and a logbook.
7.2 Instruction manual
7.2.1 General
The manufacturer/installer shall provide an instruction manual.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 201
7.2.2 Normal use
The instruction manual shall give the necessary information about the normal use of the lift and rescue
operation as described in EN 13015 and, in particular, about the following:
a) keeping the machine and pulley rooms doors locked;
b) safe loading and unloading;
c) the precautions to be taken in case of lifts with partially enclosed well [5.2.5.2.3 e)];
d) the events needing the intervention of a competent maintenance person competent in maintenance
procedures;
e) the number of persons allowed on the car roof and in the pit for maintenance and inspection;
f) keeping the logbook updated;
g) the location and use of special tools, if any (see 7.2.3);
h) the use of the emergency unlocking key, detailing the essential precautions to be taken in order to avoid
accidents which could result from an unlocking which was not followed by effective relocking.
This key shall be available on the site of the lift installation and accessible only to authorized persons.
The emergency unlocking key shall have a label attached, drawing attention to the danger which can be
involved in using this key and the need to make sure that the door is locked after it has been closed;
h) i) rescue operation: in particular, detailed instructions shall be given on the release of the brake,
ascending car overspeed protection means, unintended car movement protection means, rupture valve
and the safety gear, including the identification of special tools, if any.
a)i) Rescue operation and maintenance with heavy/large landing and/or car doors where more than1
person is needed due to e.g. size, physical distances of unlocking devices or necessary manual forces.
7.2.3 Maintenance
The instruction manual shall be in accordance with EN 13015:2019.
It shall inform in particular about:
a) about the identification and use of the special tools.
b) about periodical checking on aging of accumulation type buffers made from synthetic materials
considering instructions from the manufacturer (see EN 81-50:2014, 5.5.1 c) and 5.5.4 i).
c) about testing of automatic rescue operation if provided,
Commented [IJ163]: See N1538
Commented [IJ164]: See N1564
Commented [IJ165]: See N1544ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
202 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
d) critical data of lifetime monitoring for suspension or compensation means shall be transferred at
repair/replacement of the device by a competent and authorized person only.
e) For SIL-rated circuits, the instruction manual shall inform about:
1) maximum actuation interval
2) replacement of device before maximum mission time is expired
3) parameters, their value ranges, dependencies, safe use and safe verification process.
4) method to compare actual parameter settings to configuration record.
1)5)necessity to verify correctness of the parameter settings after change.
Accumulation type buffers made from synthetic materials shall be checked periodically on aging considering
instructions from the manufacturer [see ISO 8100-2:2019, 5.5.1 c) and 5.5.4 i)].
7.2.4 Examinations and tests
The instruction manual shall inform about the following.
a) Periodical examinations:
When periodical examinations and tests on lifts are carried out after they are placed on the market, to
verify that they are in good condition, these periodical examinations and tests should be carried out in
accordance with Annex C and be recorded in the logbook.
b) any specific requirements.
7.3 Logbook
7.3.1 A logbook shall be provided, in which notes about repairs, examinations after modifications and
accidents and periodic checks, including those specified by the manufacturer/installer, can be recorded.
7.3.2 The basic characteristics of the lift shall be recorded in the logbook. This register or file shall
comprise:
a) a technical section giving:
1) the date the lift was put into service;
2) the basic characteristics of the lift;
3) the characteristics of the ropes and/or chains suspension means including terminals and traction
sheave profits or elastomeric coated timing belts;;
4) the characteristics of those parts for which verification of conformity is required (Annex B);
Commented [IJ166]: See N1722ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 203
5) the plans of installation in the building;
6) electric schematic diagrams;
The electric schematic diagrams may be limited to the circuits for the overall understanding of the
safety considerations and use IEC 60617-DB symbols. Any graphical symbol not shown in
IEC 60617-DB shall be separately shown and described on the diagrams or supporting documents.
The symbols and identification of components and devices shall be consistent throughout all
documents and on the lift.
The abbreviations used with the symbols shall be explained by means of a nomenclature.
If the electrical schematic diagram has several alternatives, it shall be indicated which alternative is
valid, e.g. by listing of the applicable alternative solutions;
7) hydraulic circuit diagrams (using symbols from ISO 1219-1).
The circuit diagrams may be limited to the circuits for the overall understanding of the safety
considerations. The abbreviations used with the symbols shall be explained by means of a
nomenclature;
8) the full load pressure;
9) the characteristics or type of hydraulic fluid;
10) the characteristics of each incoming supply:
— rated voltage, number of phases and frequency (if A.C.);
— full load current;
— short-circuit rating at the point of incoming supply terminals;
b) a section intended to keep duplicate dated copies of examination and inspection reports, with
observations. This register or file shall be kept up-to-date in case of:
1) important modifications to the lift (Annex C);
2) replacement of ropes or important parts;
3) accidents.
11) configuration record describing parameter settings
This register or file should be available to those in charge of the maintenance, and to the person or
organization responsible for the periodical examinations and tests.
Commented [IJ167]: See N1722ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
204 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
8 Use of ISO/TS 8100-3
ISO/TS 8100-3:2019, Clause 4, includes requirements that shall be followed when applicable for use in
combination with this document.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 205
Annex A
(normative)
List of the electric safety devices
Table A.1 — List of the electric safety devices
Clause Devices checked Minimum
SIL
5.2.1.5.1 a) Stopping device in the pit 3
5.2.1.5.2 c) Stopping device in the pulley room 3
5.2.2.4 Check of the stored position of pit ladder 1
5.2.3.3 Check of the closed position of access and emergency doors and inspection doors 2
5.2.5.3.1 c) Check of the locking of car door 2
5.2.6.4.3.1 b) Check of the inactive position of the mechanical device 3
5.2.6.4.3.3 e) Check of the locked position of the inspection doors or trapsdoors 2
5.2.6.4.4.1 d) Check of the opening of any door providing access to the pit 2
5.2.6.4.4.1 e) Check of the inactive position of the mechanical device 3
5.2.6.4.4.1 f) Check of the active position of the mechanical device 3
5.2.6.4.5.4 a) Check of the retracted position of the working platform 3
5.2.6.4.5.5 b) Check of the retracted position of movable stops 3
5.2.6.4.5.5 c) Check of the extended position of movable stops 3
5.3.9.1 Check on the locked position of landing door locking device 3
5.3.9.4.1 Check of the closed position of landing doors 3
5.3.11.2 Check of the closed position of the panels without locks 3
5.3.13.2 Check of the closed position of car door 3
5.4.2.2.1 b) 4) iv) Check active position of mechanical device 1
5.4.2.2.1 b) 4) v) Check active position of mechanical device 1
5.4.6.3.2 Check of the locking of the emergency trap and the emergency door in car 2
5.4.8 b) Stopping device on the car roof 3
5.5.3 c) 2) Check raising of car or counterweight 1
5.5.5.3 a) Check of the abnormal relative extension of a suspension member rope or chain
in case of two suspension membersropes or two chain type suspension 1
Formatted Table
Commented [IJ168]: See N1537
Commented [IJ169]: Comment made during final vote
on EN 81-20:2014ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
206 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Clause Devices checked Minimum
SIL
5.5.5.3 b) Check for slack rope or slack chain or slack timing belt for positive drive and
hydraulic lifts 2
5.5.6.2. f) Check of the tension in the compensation meansropes 3
5.5.6.1 c) Check of the anti-rebound device 3
5.6.2.1.5 Check of the inactive position of the car safety gear 1
5.6.2.2.1.6 a) Over speed detection 2
5.6.2.2.1.6 b) Check of the release of the over speed governor 3
5.6.2.2.1.6 c) Check on the tension in the over speed governor rope 3
5.6.2.2.3 e) Check of the breakage or slackening of the safety rope 3
5.6.2.2.4.2 h) Check of the retracted position of the tripping lever 2
5.6.5.9 Check of the retracted position of the pawl device 1
5.6.5.10 Check of the return to normal extended position of buffers where energy
dissipation are used in conjunction with pawl device 3
5.6.6.5 Check of the ascending car over speed protection means 2
5.6.7.7. Detection of unintended car movement with open doors 2
5.6.7.8 Check of the activation of the unintended car movement with open doors
protection 1
5.8.2.2.4 Check of the return to normal extended position of buffers 3
5.9.2.3.1 a) 3) Check of the positions of the removable wheel 1
5.10.5.2 Control of main switch by means of circuit breaker contactor 2
5.10.5.5 Check on main switch 3
5.12.1.3 Check of the retardation in the case of reduced stroke buffers 3
5.12.1.4 a) Check on levelling, re-levelling and preliminary operations 23
5.12.1.5.1.2 a) Inspection operation switch 3
5.12.1.5.2.3 b) Check of push buttons in conjunction with inspection operation 1
5.12.1.6.1 Emergency electrical operation switch 3
5.12.1.8.2 Bypass device for landing and car door contacts 3
5.12.1.11.1 d) Stopping device with inspection operation 3
5.12.1.11.1 e) Stopping device at the lift machine 3
5.12.1.11.1 f) Stopping device at tests and emergency operation panel 3
5.12.2.2.3 Check of the tension in the device for transmission of the car position (final limit
switches) 1
Formatted Table
Commented [IJ170]: See N1722ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 207
Clause Devices checked Minimum
SIL
5.12.2.2.4 Check of the tension in the device for transmission of the ram position (final limit
switches) 1
5.12.2.2.5 Check of the tension in the device for transmission of the ram position (final limit
switches). Indirect acting hydraulic lift 1
5.12.2.3.1 b) Final limit switches 1
NOTE The SIL levels are only relevant for SIL-rated circuitsPESSRAL as described in 5.11.2.64.
Formatted Table
Commented [IJ171]: AH06 update file – 12-6-18
Commented [IJ172]: See N1722ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
208 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Annex B
(informative)
Technical compliance documentation
The technical compliance documentation should include the following information, which can be necessary
for conformity assessment procedures:
— the name and address of the manufacturer/installer of the lift;
— details of the place where the lift can be examined;
— a general description of the lift (characteristics, load, speed, rise, stops, etc.);
— design and manufacturing drawings and/or diagrams (mechanic/electric/hydraulic);
NOTE Drawings or diagrams for understanding design and operation.
— a copy of the type examination certificates of the safety components used on the lift. See also ISO 8100-
2;
— certificates and/or reports, where applicable, of:
— ropes, blets or chains;
— glass-panels;
— door impact test;
— door fire test;
— results of any tests or calculations performed or subcontracted by the manufacturer, e.g. traction, guide
rail, hydraulic calculations;
— a copy of the instructions manual for the lift:
— plans and diagrams;
NOTE Plans and diagrams for performing normal use, maintenance, repair, periodical inspections and
rescue operations.
— instructions for use of the lift;
— maintenance instructions (see EN 13015);
— emergency procedures;ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 209
— manufacturers requirements for periodic inspections;
NOTE Requirements do not include national regulations.
— A copy of the the logbook;
NOTE Logbook for notes about repairs and, where appropriate, periodic checks.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
210 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Annex C
(informative)
Periodic examinations and tests, examinations and tests after an important
modification or after an accident
C.1 Periodic examinations and tests
Periodic examinations and tests shall not be more stringent than those required before the lift was put into
service for the first time.
These periodic tests should not, through their repetition, cause excessive wear or impose stresses likely to
reduce the safety of the lift. This is the case, in particular, of the test on components such as the safety gear
and the buffers. If tests on these components are made, they shall be carried out with empty car and at a
reduced speed.
The person appointed to make the periodic test should assure himself that these components (which do not
operate in normal operation) are still in an operating condition.
A duplicate copy of the report should be attached to the register or file in the part covered by 7.3.2 b).
C.2 Examinations and tests after an important modification or after an
accident
The important modifications and accidents shall be recorded in the technical part of the register or file
covered in 7.3.2 b).
In particular, the following are considered as important modifications:
a) change of:
— the rated speed;
— the rated load;
— the mass of the car;
— the travel;
b) change or replacement of:
— the type of locking devices (the replacement of a locking device by a device of the same type is not
considered as an important modification) (5.3.9.1 and 5.3.9.2);
— the control system;
— the guide rails or the type of guide rails (5.7);ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 211
— the type of door (or the addition of one or more landing or car doors) (5.3);
— the machine or the traction sheave (5.9.2);
— the overspeed governor (5.6.2.2.1);
— the ascending car overspeed protection means (5.6.6);
— the buffers (5.8);
— the safety gear (5.6.2.1);
— the unintended car movement protection (5.6.7);
— the pawl device (5.6.5);
— the jack (5.9.3.2);
— the pressure relief valve (5.9.3.5.3);
— the rupture valve (5.6.3);
— the restrictor/one-way restrictor (5.6.4);
— the mechanical device for preventing movement of the car (5.2.6.4.3.1);
— the mechanical device for stopping the car (5.2.6.4.4.1);
— the platform (5.2.6.4.5);
— the mechanical device for blocking the car or movable stops (5.2.6.4.5.2);
— the devices for emergency and tests operations (5.2.6.6).
c) Modification of:
— parameter or configuration of circuit according to 5.11.2.3 or 5.11.2.4
— parameter or configuration of control equipment according to 5.9.2.2.2.3 a) 2), 5.9.2.5.4 c), 5.9.2.5.4
d), 5.9.3.4.2 c), 5.9.3.4.2 d) or 5.9.3.4.3 c) Commented [IJ173]: See N1722ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
212 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Annex D
(informative)
Machinery spaces — Access
Key
1 doors and trap doors (5.2.3) A (5.2.6.4.3)
2 machinery spaces (5.2.6) B (5.2.6.4.5)
3 access (5.2.2) C (5.2.6.4.6)
D (5.2.6.4.4)
E (5.2.6.6)
F (5.2.6.5)
Figure D.1 — Machinery spaces - Access (5.2.2)ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 213
Annex E
(informative)
Building interfaces
E.1 General provisions
The building structure should be constructed to withstand loads and forces to which it is subjected by the lift
equipment. If not specified differently in this document for particular applications, these loads and forces
are:
— values resulting from the static masses; and
— values resulting from moving masses and their emergency operation. The dynamic effect is represented
by a factor of 2.
E.2 Support of guide rails
It is important that the guide rails of the lift be supported in such a way that the effects of movement of the
building structure to which they are connected are minimized.
When considering buildings made of concrete, blockwork or bricks, it can be assumed that the guide rail
brackets which support the guides are not subjected to displacement caused by movement of the well walls
(other than compression, see 5.7).
However, where the guide brackets are connected to the building fabric by steel beams, or by connection to
timber frames, there can be deflection of this structure due to the load imposed by the car through the guides
and guide brackets. Additionally, there can be movement of the lift’s supporting structure due to external
forces such a wind loading, snow loading, etc.
Any deflection of these beams or frames should be taken into account during the calculations required in 5.7.
The total permissible deflection of the guide rails for the safe operation of the safety geardevice, etc., shall
should include any displacement of the guide rail due to deflection of the building fabric, and the deflection
of the guide itself due to the load imparted on it by the car.
It is therefore important that the persons responsible for the design and fabrication of these supporting
structures communicate with the lift provider in order to ensure that they are suitable under all load
conditions.
E.3 Ventilation of car, well and machine rooms
E.3.1 General
See 0.4.2, 0.4.17 and 0.4.18.
Commented [IJ174]: See N1556ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
214 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
The requirement to suitably ventilate the well and machine rooms is often contained within local building
regulations, either specifically or as a general requirement, as would be given for any building space where
machinery is installed or people are accommodated (for leisure, work, etc.). As such, this document cannot
provide exact guidance on the specific requirements to ventilate such areas when the well and machine
rooms are part of one larger and often complex total build environment.
Doing so would conflict with these national requirements.
However, some general guidance can be given.
E.3.2 Ventilation of the well and car
The safety and comfort of persons in the lift, working in the well or who can become entrapped in the car or
well should the car become stalled between floors, depends on many factors:
— the ambient temperature of the well as part of the building or even totally standalone;
— the exposure to direct sunlight;
— volatile organic components, CO2, air quality;
— fresh air access in the well;
— the size of the well, both in cross-sectional area and height;
— the number, size, gaps around, and location of, landing doors;
— the expected heat output from installed equipment;
— the fire-fighting and smoke evacuation strategy and related BMS (building management system);
— the humidity, dust and fumes;
— the air flow (heat/cooling) and energy-saving building technology applied;
— the air tightness of the well and the entire building.
The car should be provided with sufficient ventilation aperture to ensure an adequate flow of air for the
maximum number of permitted occupants (see 5.4.9).
During normal operation and maintenance of the lift, the gaps around the landing doors, the opening/closing
of these doors and the pump effect of the lift travelling within the well, can generally be sufficient to provide
the air exchange necessary for human needs between the staircases, lobbies and the well.
However, for technical needs, and in some cases for human needs, the air tightness of the well and the entire
building, the environmental conditions, particularly higher ambient temperature, radiation, humidity, air
quality, result in the need for a permanent or on-demand ventilation aperture(s) and/or (combined with)
forced ventilation and/or fresh air entry. This can also be necessary when transporting certain items such as
motorized vehicles where exhaust fumes can be hazardous. This can only be decided on a case-by-case basis.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 215
Furthermore, in the event of a prolonged stoppage (considering normal and accidental conditions) of the car,
further sufficient ventilation should be provided.
In particular, attention should be given to those buildings (new and in case of refurbishing) in which energy
efficient design and technology is present.
Wells are not intended to be used as a means to ventilate other areas of the building.
In some cases, this can be an extremely dangerous practice, such as industrial environments or underground
car parks, where the drawing of dangerous gasses through the well can cause additional risk to persons
travelling in the car. Under these considerations, the stale air from other areas of the building should not be
used to ventilate the well.
Where the well forms part of a fire-fighting shaft, particular care needs to be taken.
In these cases, advice should be obtained by those who specialize in such equipment, or from local building
and fire regulations.
In order to allow the person responsible for the work on the building or construction to determine if/what
ventilation needs to be provided related to the total lift installation as part of the building, the installer of the
lift should provide the necessary information to allow suitable calculations and appropriate building design
to be made. In other words, they should keep each other informed of the facts necessary for the proper
operation and safe use and maintenance of the lift within the building, and take the appropriate steps to
ensure it.
E.3.3 Ventilation of machine rooms
The ventilation of the machine rooms is normally carried out to provide a suitable working environment for
the engineer and the equipment installed into such spaces.
For this reason, the ambient temperature of machine rooms should be kept as given in the assumptions. See
0.4.17. Additional care should be taken with regard to humidity and air quality to avoid technical problems,
e.g. condensation.
Failure to maintain these temperatures can result in the lift automatically removing itself from service until
the temperature returns to its intended levels.
In order to allow the person responsible for the work on the building or construction to determine if/what
ventilation needs to be provided in these machine rooms as part of the building, the installer of the lift should
provide the necessary information to allow suitable calculations and appropriate building design to be made.
In other words, they should keep each other informed of the facts necessary for the proper operation, safe
use and maintenance of the lift, and take the appropriate steps to ensure it.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
216 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Annex F
(normative)
Pit access ladder
F.1 Types of pit access ladder
The following types of pit access ladder may be used for access and egress to the pit of the lift (see Figure F.1):
a) a fixed ladder (Type 1), which stands upright in one position for both use and storage purposes;
b) a retractable ladder (Type 2a), which stands upright in two positions, one for use, other for storage. The
use position is obtained when a person is placing their weight on the rung;
c) a retractable ladder (Type 2b), which stands upright for storage and is manually put in position of use
by horizontal sliding of its bottom part;
d) a movable ladder (Type 3a), which stands upright for storage and is manually put in an inclined position
of use;
e) a movable ladder (Type 3b), which lays down on the pit floor for storage and is manually put in an
inclined position of use; or
f) a foldable ladder (Type 4), which is stored in the pit and then positioned and hooked onto the landing
door sill.
F.2 General provisions
F.2.1 According to the type of pit ladder chosen when designing a lift installation (see F.1), the ladder shall
be permanently stored in the lift pit so that it cannot be removed from the well or used for other purposes.
F.2.2 The ladder shall be:
a) able to withstand the weight of one person counting for 1 500 N;
b) made of aluminium or steel. In the case of steel, an anti-corrosion protection shall be applied. Wood
ladders shall not be used.
F.2.3 The length of the ladder shall be such that, in position of use, the length of the uprights, or other
suitable handhold, extends to a minimum height of 1,10 m measured vertically above the landing sill.
F.3 Ladder uprights and rungs
F.3.1 Ladder uprights
The cross-section of the ladder uprights shall be so that:ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 217
a) for easy and safe hand grasping, the width does not exceed 35 mm, and depth 100 mm; and
b) the mechanical strength tests as defined in EN 131-2:2010, Clause 5, are fulfilled. In countries where
EN 131-2 is not adopted, relevant national requirements shall apply.
F.3.2 Ladder rungs
The ladder rungs shall fulfil the following requirements:
a) the clear width of the ladder rungs shall be minimum 280 mm;
b) the rungs shall be equally spaced, between 250 mm and 300 mm;
c) the cross section of the ladder rungs shall be either circular or polygonal (square or more than 4 sides),
with a diameter or a flat tread of minimum 25 mm and maximum 35 mm;
d) the surface conditions of the rungs shall be non-slippery, i.e. by means of profiled surface or special
durable anti-slippery coating.
F.4 Specific provisions for non-fixed type ladders
For movable and foldable ladders (types 3 and 4), the following apply:
a) the maximum weight of the ladder shall not exceed 15 kg in order to allow easy and safe handling from
the landing sill;
NOTE National regulations can request a maximum weight less than 15 kg for manual handling.
b) safe use of the ladder in position of use shall be ensured by means of a device securing the ladder to the
landing sill, the bottom of the pit, or the wall of the well;
c) the ladder shall be prevented from tipping over when a person is standing or grasping the upper part of
the ladder (above landing sill level) by means of appropriate devices at bottom end of the ladder
uprights;
d) for retractable ladders (type 2a) and foldable ladders (type 4), provisions shall be fitted so that, when
putting the ladder from position of use back to storage position, the risk of shearing and/or crushing
hands or feet is prevented when retracting or folding back the parts of the ladder.
F.5 Location of the ladder in the pit
The location of the ladder in the pit shall be such that, in position of use, the following are fulfilled:
a) there shall be a clear distance of 200 mm minimum between the back of any rung and the pit wall, in the
case of vertical ladder;ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
218 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
b) the distance between the edge of the landing entrance and the ladder in its stored position (or the means
to access the ladder as in Figure F.1, Type 3b and Type 4) shall not be more than 800 mm;
c) the distance between the edge of the landing entrance and the middle of the rungs of the ladder in the
working position shall be 600 mm maximum for easy reach;
d) the height of the first rung of the ladder shall be positioned as close as possible at the same level as the
landing sill.
Commented [IJ175]: Editorial request by ChinaISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 219
Dimensions in millimetres
a) Type 1 — Fixed pit ladder b) Type 2a — Retractable pit ladder
c) Type 2b — Retractable pit ladder d) Type 3a — Movable pit ladderISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
220 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
e) Type 3b — Movable pit ladder f) Type 4 — Foldable pit ladder
Figure F.1 — Types of pit access ladderISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 221
Annex G
(informative)
Relationship between this document and ISO 8100-20
The requirements of this document are not intended to prevent the use of systems, methods, devices or
components of equivalent or superior safety, strength, effectiveness, durability, etc. to those prescribed by
this document, provided that the equivalency of the system, method, device, or component can be verified.
ISO 8100-20 and national regulations can be consulted for further information.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
222 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Annex ZA
(informative)
Relationship between this European Standard and the essential requirements
of Directive 2014/33/EU aimed to be covered
This European Standard has been prepared under a Commission’s standardization request
“M/549 C(2016) 5884 final” to provide one voluntary means of conforming to essential requirements of
Directive 2014/33/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 February 2014 on the
harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to lifts and safety components for lifts (recast).
Once this standard is cited in the Official Journal of the European Union under that Directive,
compliance with the normative clauses of this standard, given in Table ZA.1and Table ZA.2, confers
within the limits of the scope of this standard, a presumption of conformity with the corresponding
essential requirements of that Directive and associated EFTA regulations.
Table ZA.1 — Correspondence between this European Standard and Annex I of Directive
2014/33/EU
Essential Requirements of
Directive
Clause(s)/subclause(s) of
this EN
Remarks/Notes
1.1 See the clauses related to
2006/42/EC Table ZA.2 below
Referring to the application of
Directive 2006/42/EC
1.2 5.4.1, 5.4.2, 5.4.3, 5.4.4 See also EN 81-70
1.3 5.4.11, 5.5.1, 5.5.2, 5.5.4, 5.5.5,
5.5.6, 5.5.7, 5.5.8
Counterweight, suspension, safety
factors, terminations, positive drive,
distribution, compensation, pulleys
and sprockets
1.4.1 5.12.1.2 Load control
1.4.2 5.6.1, 5.6.2.2.1.1, 5.6.3, 5.6.4,
5.6.6
General provisions, governor, rupture
valve, restrictor, ACOP
1.4.3 5.6.1, 5.6.2.2.1.1, 5.6.6 General provisions, governor, rupture
valve, restrictor, ACOP
1.4.4 5.5.3 Traction
1.5.1 5.2.5.1, 5.9.1.1 Single machines
1.5.2 5.2.1.2, 5.2.1.5, 5.2.1.8, 5.2.1.9,
5.2.2, 5.2.3, 5.2.4, 5.2.5.2,
5.2.5.3, 5.2.5.5.2, 5.2.6.3,
5.2.6.4, 5.2.6.5, 5.2.6.6, 5.2.6.7,
5.3
Accessibility, pit equipment, building
fabric,
Commented [IJ176]: This will need to be amended to
include all new workISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 223
Essential Requirements of
Directive
Clause(s)/subclause(s) of
this EN
Remarks/Notes
1.6.2 5.1.2, 5.2.4, 5.2.6.2, 5.2.6.4.1.3,
5.4.2.3.2, 5.10.10, 5.12.1.1.1,
5.12.1.1.2, 5.12.1.1.3, 5.12.1.5,
5.12.1.10
Clear indication of control function
1.6.3 5.10.5.3, 5.12.4.3 Shared controls
1.6.4 5.9.2.5, 5.10, 5.11, 5.12,
Annex A
Main switches, Fault protection,
Electric Safety Devices, Controls
2.1 5.2.1.1, 5.2.1.2, 5.2.1.5, 5.2.1.8,
5.2.2, 5.2.3.3, 5.2.4, 5.2.5.2.2,
5.2.5.2.4, 5.2.5.3, 5.2.5.5.2, 5.3,
5.12.1.11
Access to the well, stopping devices
2.2 5.2.5.6, 5.2.5.7, 5.2.5.8 Refuge spaces
2.3 5.3 Landing and Car doors, general
provisions, dimensions, guidance,
clearances, strength, protection,
indication, locking, unlocking,
multiple panels, closing, electrical
safety,
3.1 5.3.1, 5.4.3, 5.4.4 General requirements, opening,
walls/floor/roof of car, finishes
3.2 5.6, 5.7, 5.9.2.4 Precautions against free fall,
excessive speed, unintended car
movement and creeping of the car,
guides
3.3 5.8 Buffers
3.4 5.6.2.1.5, 5.6.2.2.1.6, 5.6.2.2.3,
5.6.2.2.4.2, 5.6.3, 5.6.4, 5.6.5.9,
5.6.5.10, 5.6.6.5, 5.6.7.7
Monitoring of safety components
4.1 5.3.6.2 Door protection
4.2 5.3.5.3 Fire protection of landing doors
4.3 5.2.5.5.1, 5.4.11, 5.7 Counterweight guidance
4.4 5.2.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.2.6.2, 5.2.6.6,
5.3.6.3, 5.3.9.3, 5.3.15, 5.4.5,
5.4.6, 5.9.2.3, 5.9.3.9, 5.12.1.6
Evacuation of trapped personsISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
224 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Essential Requirements of
Directive
Clause(s)/subclause(s) of
this EN
Remarks/Notes
4.5 5.12.3 Alarm device
4.6 5.9.3.4, 5.9.3.11, 5.10.4.3,
5.10.4.4
Over temperature operations
4.7 5.4.9 Car ventilation
4.8 5.3.7, 5.4.10 Car and landing lighting
4.9 5.4.10.4, 5.12.3 Communications
5.1 5.2.6.2, 5.4.2.3.2, 5.4.2.3.3 Load plate
5.2 5.3.15 Self-rescue
6.1 7.1, 7.2, 7.3 Safety Components data
6.2 7.1, 7.2, 7.3 User manual
Table ZA.2 — Correspondence between this European Standard and Annex I of Directive
2006/42/EC applicable to lifts as referred to by the Directive 2014/33/EU Annex I, 1.1
Essential Requirements of
Directive
Clause(s)/subclause(s) of
this EN
Remarks/Notes
1.1.2 5.2.1.3, 5.2.1.4, 5.2.1.6,
5.2.1.7,
5.2.5.4, 5.2.6.1, 5.3.9.3.2,
5.4.7, 5.4.8, 5.6.2.1.6.3, 5.9,
5.11.2.6, 7.2.2, 7.2.3
Principals of safety integration,
Ventilation, Lighting, Entrapment
in the well, Handling of equipment,
Protection below the well,
Environmental influences, working
on car roof, lift machinery, special
equipment and accessories
1.1.3 5.4.4 Materials and Products
1.1.4 5.2.1.2.1, 5.2.1.4, 5.2.1.5,
5.2.2.2, 5.2.6.2, 5.2.6.6.3,
5.3.7.1, 5.10.5.1.1, 5.10.7,
5.10.8
Lighting
1.1.5 5.2.1.7 Handling
1.1.6 5.2.1.5.1, 5.2.1.6, 5.2.2.4,
5.2.2.5, 5.2.5.7, 5.2.5.8, 5.4.8,
5.12.1.5.2.3, Annex F
Ergonomics
1.2.1 See LD, Annex I, 1.6.4 Safety and reliability of control
systemsISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 225
Essential Requirements of
Directive
Clause(s)/subclause(s) of
this EN
Remarks/Notes
1.2.2 5.12.1.1, 5.12.1.6, 5.12.1.7,
5.12.1.8
Control devices
LD Annex I, 1.6.1, 1.6.2 and 1.6.3
deals only with the controls for the
user.
1.2.3 Starting
It is covered by the Lifts Directive,
Annex I, 1.6.4
1.2.4.1 Normal stop
It is covered by the Lifts Directive,
Annex I, 1.6.4
1.2.4.2 Operational stop
It is covered by the Lifts Directive,
Annex I, 1.6.4
1.2.4.3 Emergency Stop
It is covered by the Lifts Directive,
Annex I, 1.6.4
1.2.4.4 Assembly of machinery
It is covered by the Lifts Directive,
Annex I, 1.6.4
1.2.5 Selection of control or operating
modes
It is covered by the Lifts Directive,
Annex I, 1.6.4
1.2.6 Failure of the power supply
It is covered by the Lifts Directive,
Annex I, 1.6.4
1.3.1 5.4.3.2 Risk of loss of stability
1.3.2 5.4.3.2.1 Risk of break-up during operation
1.3.3 5.2.5.4, 5.2.6.3, 5.4.7.2 Risks due to falling or ejected
objects
1.3.7 5.9.1.2 Risks related to moving parts
1.3.8.1 5.2.5.5, 5.5.7 Moving transmission partsISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
226 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
Essential Requirements of
Directive
Clause(s)/subclause(s) of
this EN
Remarks/Notes
1.3.8.2 0.4.21, 5.2.5.5, 5.5.7 Moving parts involved in the
process
1.4.1 5.3.4.3, 5.2.5.5 General requirements for guards
1.4.2.1 0.4.21, 5.5.7 Fixed guards
1.4.2.2 5.2.3, 5.3 Interlocking movable guards
1.4.2.3 5.2.3 Adjustable guards restricting
access
1.4.3 Special requirements for
protective devices
It is covered by the Lifts Directive,
Annex I, 1.6.4
1.5.1 Electricity supply
It is covered by the Lifts Directive,
Annex I, 1.6.4
1.5.2 Static electricity
It is covered by the Lifts Directive,
Annex I, 1.6.4
1.5.3 5.9.3 Energy supply other than
electricity
1.5.5 0.4.16, 5.2.1.3, 5.2.6.1,
5.9.2.11, 5.10.4.3, 5.10.1.1.6,
5.11.4.2
Extreme temperatures
1.5.6 1.2, 5.2.1.2.1, 5.3.12, 5.2.2.3,
5.2.3.3, 5.3.5.3, 5.3.12
Fire
1.5.8 1.3 Noise
1.5.9 1.3, 5.9.3.3.1.1 Vibrations
1.5.10 5.10.1.1.3 Radiation
1.5.11 5.10.1.1.3 External radiation
1.5.13 5.2.1.9, 5.9.3.2.5.2, Emissions of hazardous materials
and substances
1.5.14 5.2.1.6, 5.2.6.4.3.1, 5.3.9.3.5 Risk of being trapped in a machine
1.5.15 5.2.1, 5.2.2, 5.4.7, 5.9 Risk of slipping, tripping or fallingISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 227
Essential Requirements of
Directive
Clause(s)/subclause(s) of
this EN
Remarks/Notes
1.5.16 Lightning
It is covered by the Lifts Directive,
Annex I, 1.6.4
1.6.1 5.12.1.7, 5.12.1.8, 7.2.2,
7.2.3
Machinery maintenance
1.6.2 5.2.1.4, 5.2.1.5, 5.2.2, 5.2.3,
5.2.4, 5.4.8
Access to operating positions and
servicing points
1.6.4 5.2.1.4, 5.2.1.5, 5.2.2, 5.2.3,
5.2.4, 5.4.8
Operator intervention
1.6.5 5.2.1.4, 5.2.1.5, 5.2.2, 5.2.3,
5.2.4, 5.4.8
Cleaning of internal parts
1.7.1 5.1.2, 5.2.4 Information and warnings on the
machinery
1.7.1.2 5.3.6.2.1.1 Warning devices
1.7.2 5.2.4, 5.10.1.2.1 Warning of residual risks
1.7.3 5.2.6.2, 5.4.2.3.2, 5.4.2.3.3 Marking of machinery
4.1.2.1 6 Risks due to lack of stability
4.1.2.2 5.3.3.2 Machinery running on guide rails
and rail tracks
4.1.2.3 0.4.3, 5.5.3, 6.3.3, 6.3.4, 6.3.6 Mechanical strength
4.1.2.4 5.5 Pulleys, drums, wheels, ropes and
chains
4.1.2.6 5.9.3.9 Control of movements
4.1.2.8.2 5.2.2, 5.2.3, 5.3 Access to carrier
4.2.1 5.12.1.5 Control of movement (hold to run)
6.3.2 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4.7.2 Falling from the carrier
WARNING 1 — Presumption of conformity stays valid only as long as a reference to this European Standard
is maintained in the list published in the Official Journal of the European Union. Users of this standard should
consult frequently the latest list published in the Official Journal of the European Union.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
228 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
WARNING 2 — Other Union legislation may be applicable to the product(s) falling within the scope of this
standard.ISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
© ISO 2019 – All rights reserved 229
Bibliography
[1] ISO 6743-4, Lubricants, industrial oils and related products (class L) — Classification — Part 4: Family
H (Hydraulic systems)
[2] ISO 7000:2014, Graphical symbols for use on equipment — Registered symbols
[3] ISO 7010:2011, Graphical symbols — Safety colours and safety signs — Registered safety signs
[4] ISO 7465, Passenger lifts and service lifts — Guide rails for lift cars and counterweights — T-type
[5] ISO 14122-2, Safety of machinery — Permanent means of access to machinery — Part 2: Working
platforms and walkways
[6] ISO 14798, Lifts (elevators), escalators and moving walks — Risk assessment and reduction
methodology
[7] IEC 61508-1, Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related
systems — Part 1: General requirements
[8] IEC 61508-2, Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related
systems — Part 2: Requirements for electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related
systems
[9] IEC 61508-3, Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety related
systems — Part 3: Software requirements
[10] IEC 61508-4, Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety related
systems — Part 4: Definitions and abbreviations
[11] IEC 61508-5, Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety related
systems — Part 5: Examples of methods for the determination of safety integrity levels
[12] IEC 61508-6, Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related
systems - Part 6: Guidelines on the application of IEC 61508-2 and IEC 61508-3
[13] IEC 61508-7, Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety related
systems — Part 7: Overview of techniques and measures
[14] EN/TS 81-11, Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts — Basics and interpretations —
Part 11: Interpretations related to EN 81 family of standardsISO/PRF 8100-1:2019(E)
230 © ISO 2019 – All rights reserved
[15] EN 81-21, Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts — Lifts for the transport of persons
and goods — Part 21: New passenger and goods passenger lifts in existing building
[16] EN 81-70, Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts — Particular applications for
passenger and goods passenger lifts — Part 70: accessibility to lifts for persons including persons with
disability
[17] EN 81-71, Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts — Particular applications to
passenger lifts and goods passenger lifts — Part 71: Vandal resistant lifts
[18] EN 81-72, Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts — Particular applications for
passenger and goods passenger lifts — Part 72: Firefighters lifts
[19] EN 81-73, Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts — Particular applications for
passenger and goods passenger lifts — Part 73 Behaviour of lifts in the event of fire
[20] EN 81-77, Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts — Particular applications for
passenger and goods passenger lifts — Part 77: Lifts subject to seismic conditions
[21] EN 13411-3, Terminations for steel wire ropes — Part 3: Safety. Ferrules and ferrule-securing
[22] EN 13411-6, Terminations for steel wire ropes — Part 6: Safety. Asymmetric wedge socket
[23] EN 13411-7,
相关文章
